Home

ZyXEL IES-612-51A User's Manual

1. seeeesssssss 351 Figure 227 DSL Port Downstream CarrierO Command Example 1 ccccccssseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseesseeeess 352 Figure 228 DSL Port Downstream Carriero Command Display Example 352 Figure 229 DSL Port Downstream Carter Command Example 2 sese 352 Figure 230 DSL Port Downstream Carrieri Command Example 1 353 Figure 231 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 2 353 Figure 232 DSL Port Downstream Carrieri Command Display Example sssss 353 Figure 233 PMM Parameters Command Example sss nennen nnne nnn nnns 354 Figure 234 Impulse Noise Protection Command Example nnnnnsssnssesnnnnrsressssrrrrrrrrresrrrnrrtrreennennnnne 355 Figure 235 Annex L Enable Command Example tert JOD Figure 236 Annex L Disable Command Example 356 Figure 237 Annex M Enable Command Example sess nnns 356 Figure 238 Annex M Disable Command Example nennen nnns 356 Figure 239 Annex Enable Command Example ccccccssseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseaeseeessuaeaeeees 357 Figure 240 Annex Disable Command Example iussione pite E ate br papa bsp au Iu E INS Eu HS oS bn Gc Piet Eed 357 Figure 241 DSL Port Show Command Example csisciscicssisasrcnetascapncianacavacvacesvamaineiinddrenpentusteesneieenepacian 357 Figure 242 Linedata Command Example E m UU o IT 358 Four
2. eeeeesseeeseeesseeeeennnnennennen 240 Powe T drei NEU 240 IES 612 51A User s Guide EI List of Figures FOU KR e ye ch E 241 Figure 126 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart EE 245 zm er et 246 lk e TE 248 Figure 129 Alarm Status oeiscenseubeskukiuniiid ke RE Rb een DETR EHE REX EAE E S HAE Ahi ER peel Med alae stie dab steht 249 siu mE uu A ibi 252 mE TILA Even EA RR t 253 as NEU ARM POTS Te RR m 254 Figure 133 LOS Show Command ee TEE 277 FOUG TAT iNo onon EKAMOS aR 280 Fidure TE en Show unn E 281 Figure 135 Statistics Monitor Command EEN denenstbutengege de sesto eege t blando pulsi ete bin obe P Te esaet opa 281 Figure 137 Statistics Port Command Example seeeeeessssesesseeseeseenn nennen nennen nnn nnns 282 Figure 138 Alum Show Command Kn E 284 Figure 139 Alarm Port Show Command Example cccccscseseceeceeeeeeceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeaeeeeseaaeeeeees 285 Figure 140 Alarm Port Set Command RS Zuel 285 Figure 141 Alarm Tablelist Command Example ENEE nennen nennen nnn nnn 286 Figure 142 Alarm History Show Command Example sees nnne nnne nnns 287 Figure 143 Alarm History Clear Command Example ccccccsececccccceeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseaas 287 Figure 144 Alarm Xedit Command Example ccccccsseccccceeeeeecceseececeeueeeecsaaseeecseaseeesssaeeeessesseesssaaes 288 Figu
3. 87 Chapter 7 System Information The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the device s model name ZyNOS F W Version This field displays the version number of the device s current firmware including the date created This field displays the Digital Signal Processor firmware version number This is DSP Code Version the modem code firmware Hardware Version This is the version of the physical device hardware This field may be blank Serial Number This is the individual identification number assigned to the device at the factory This field may be blank Ethernet Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the device ics Enable Select this check box to turn the hardware monitor on or clear it to turn the hardware monitor off Temperature Unit Select C to display all temperature measurements in degrees Celsius Select F to display all temperature measurements in degrees Fahrenheit Temperature Each temperature sensor can detect and report the temperature Temperature sensor 1 is near the DSL chipset Temperature sensor 2 is near the central processing unit Temperature sensor 3 is at the hardware monitor chip Tres Low lt gt Ke Status Voltage V voltage This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Over for those above Current Av
4. IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION L2 Time Set minimum time in seconds that the ADSL line must stay in the L2 power mode before reducing the power again in the L2 power mode L2 ATPR Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction ATPR in decibels dB that is permitted in a L2 power reduction The system can gradually decrease the ADSL line transmission power while it is in the L2 power mode This is the largest individual power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode L2 ATPRT Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction Total ATPRT in decibels dB that is permitted in the L2 power mode This is the total transmit power decrease that is allowed to occur in the L2 power mode Max L2 Rate Set the maximum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Min L2 Rate Set the minimum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 LO to L2 Rat
5. The test takes at least 15 seconds You can run the SELT Diagnostic Get Command to check the status of the test and to look at the results The following example starts a SELT test on DSL port 1 Figure 250 SELT Diagnostic Set Command Example ras adsl linediag setselt 1 IES 612 51A User s Guide 367 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 52 2 11 SELT Diagnostic Get Command Syntax ras adsl linediag getselt port number Use this command to display the status and the results of the SELT test on the specified port The report tells you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line measured both in meters and thousands of feet The following example displays the status and results SELT diagnostic results for DSL port 1 Figure 251 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example ras adsl linediag getselt 1 port inprogress cableType loopEstimateLength 1 INPROGRESS 24AWG O m 0 00 kFt ras gt adsl linediag getselt 1 port inprogress cableType loopEstimateLength 1 DONE 2 4AWG O0 m 0 00 KET 52 2 12 Tone Diagnostics 992 3 Command Syntax ras adsl linediag toneDiag port number Use this command to display the tone diagnostics for a port in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard You do not need to use the line diagnostics set command first Use the tone diagnostics to analyze problems with the physical DSL line 368 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The
6. 1 192 168 1 0 SE Bl 192 158 1 1 l C Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Usethissectiontocreateanewstaticroue 0 this section to create a new static route Type a name to identify this static route Use up to 31 ASCII characters lel and tabs are not allowed Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing Address is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your device IES 612 51A User s Guide 235 Chapter 35 Static Routing Table 79 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click A
7. 4 If your subscribers use VPI 0 and VCI 33 the default for all of the DSL ports go to step 13 Otherwise use the following steps to change the VPI and VCI settings for all of the DSL ports First you will delete the default virtual channel from all of the DSL ports You cannot edit it Then you will configure a new virtual channel for a port and copy it to the other DSL ports Adding another virtual channel without deleting the default virtual channel is not recommended since you cannot set the new channel to be the port s super channel The super channel can forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels A channel that is not the super channel can only forward frames with a single VLAN ID that is configured on that channel In this case the IES 612 51A drops any frames received from the subscriber that are tagged with another VLAN ID 5 In the navigation panel click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup The xDSL Port Setup screen appears Figure 21 xDSL Port Setup d xDSL PortSetup VC Setup PPVC Setup Copy Port EI Active Customer Info Customer Tal zt Features DR ProfileaMode D IGMP fiter 1 security l Frame Type settings Paste virtual Channels alarm Profile pviogpriority Packet Filter Active Customer Infa Customer Tel Profile Mode Channels a a enabled DEFVAL 1 enabled Ss DEFVAL enabled a MEN DEFVAL enabled DEFVAL enablad DEFYAL i
8. This command removes the specified multicast VLAN configuration s 47 8 3 Multicast VLAN Disable Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan disable lt vid gt where lt vid gt The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deactivates the specified multicast VLAN The following example disables multicast VLAN 12 Figure 188 Multicast VLAN Disable Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan disable 12 47 8 4 Multicast VLAN Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan enable lt vid gt where lt vid gt The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command activates the specified multicast VLAN 47 8 5 Multicast VLAN Show Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan show lt vlanlist gt 324 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 47 IGMP Commands where vlanlist You can specify a single VLAN lt I gt all VLAN lt gt a list of VLAN lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VLAN lt 1 5 6 10 gt 66 99 This command displays the current multicast VLAN settings In the state column indicates the multicast VLAN is not active while V indicates the multicast VLAN 1s active Figure 189 Multicast VLAN Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan show 1 F fixed X forbidden U untag T tag 47 8 6 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan group set lt vid gt lt index gt lt start mcast ip gt lt end mcast ip
9. Trellis Encoding This field displays whether Trellis encoding is turned on or off Trellis encoding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable Down Stream This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for Interleave Delay downstream transmissions Up Stream This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for upstream Interleave Delay transmissions Down Stream This field displays the amount of power that this port is using to transmit to the Output Power subscriber s ADSL modem or router The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Up Stream This field displays the amount of power that the subscriber s ADSL modem or Output Power router is using to transmit to this port The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Info Atur The Info Atur fields show data acquired from the ATUR ADSL Termination Unit Info Atuc Remote in this case the subscriber s ADSL modem or router during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscribe
10. 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 the beginning of the multicast ip range lt end mcast ip gt 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 the end of the multicast range It must be greater than lt start mcast ip gt bandwidth 100000 in units of kbps This command configures bandwidth allocation for the multicast channel s For multicast channel s for which you have not configured bandwidth settings the default multicast bandwidth setting applies see the switch igmpsnoop bandwidth default command 47 4 3 IGMP Bandwidth Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth delete index where index 1 96 a unique number for this setting This command removes the specified multicast bandwidth configuration profile 47 5 IGMP Bandwidth Port Commands Use the IGMP bandwidth port commands to set up bandwidth budgets for multicast traffic on specific ports IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 1 d Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 47 5 1 IGMP Bandwidth Port Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command deactivates multicast bandwidth settings of the specified port 47 5 2 IGMP Bandwidth Port Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port enable lt portlist gt where
11. ccccccccccsseecececeseeecceeeeceeeeeceeeeseeueeesseaseeeesanseeessanseesees 196 Ce Mlle o e eee 197 Foute 93 2004 Romed DOMEN MENT 198 FOU S E buo E 200 Figure 100 2684 Re 201 Figure 101 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example cccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 203 Figure 102 PPPoA to PPPOE 2ixisdhtnticidrimIauM E hepuH abkepbbim An ieieki pr E RED EtupDM HA rPETHUN die D ERIRUFUM 204 leift PPPOATSPPPOBE SUUS acssitessuretuthet n MP PETRI CDU MEME ub TEET 206 goi mU iugo o iT 209 gl EIUI RE d cc RE 210 Figure 106 Transparent LAN Service Network Example sese 212 po ics SUP ESF EE DOE RU CINA KMS ES DURUM M any are mer tty 213 gb EI T eM o E 217 Foure 109 E M iei DOUD MERE IUE 218 Figure 110 ACL Profile Map EE 220 Fille 11 Dooniicam Ee 6 2 EE 221 qi CRM c Ee NIENTE 223 rk cafe Rm 225 Figure EE Management Model RET E ES T 226 z i xr hr tret Eeee yEa es 229 Foue 115 Service ACCESS te EE 230 Figure 117 Remote Management Secured Client Setup ccccccseeeeecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeesseeeeeeeas 231 Figure 118 Static TEE 235 Foue TIS RMON TE 237 Foure 120 Firmaware tir Mmmm 238 Figure 121 Restore ComigUrationi EE 238 Fig re 122 Restore RE ri devise TREE D E m TT 239 Figure 123 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot
12. ccccccsseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseaaaaeeees 146 Toa VLAN SOUS ier RR 146 16 4 Static VLAN Setting Screen eesssssssssssssseeeeeeee eene nennen nnn nnns nn nnn nnne nnns 148 LESS VEAP EE EEN SEENEN NEU o omm 149 Chapter 17 GB oon FED TEE EEN 153 NEN c o A c 153 12 P Elte 153 E E S i EAE AE E eege 153 be ORIF TEE 153 BAe re eic mms 154 ke Arer Banon SOUS EEN 156 17 4 1 Bandwidth Port Setup Screen ccccccceeceecoseeeesccseneeecceseeecsoeeeeseccsseerseceseeeescees 157 EE E a eei EE 158 TeC FRSE E EE 159 Ter eF SO CIO EEN 159 TO RMF POLICE EE 160 17 9 IGMP Port Group Screen MER ERR 160 Chapter 18 le TT EE 163 WES cud s fne ERE eerie EAEE 163 D IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents EE ett 163 Chapter 19 vlc R5 165 19 1 Multicast VLAN Overview sssesssessseseeeneenneennnn nennen nnne nnnnnn nnns ais n nsns ness ansa rn 165 pa DIES Eecur peri m T m 165 1 MLAN SGUD ENEE RD UU uWWre m 166 194a MN LAN GIO SCOSI ee 168 Chapter 20 diii TRU A mem TE 171 201 Wee Filer Sete eeesiesaaeiid smosiigiesyeio tjedapmetoli tee ge 171 Chapter 21 Pte qii Ter 173 Ae ee Re teo 173 SIS TAAL FEIER BED wee 173 Chapter 22 Spanning Tree PIOBOBOL uis cericinciu n pd ood dcin ndo ed uan dn nba DEOR rd CHA 175 221 Roran E EE 175 22 2 Spanni
13. speed port 1 is ENET1 2 is ENET2 SN an internal sequencer number lt speed gt Ethernet connection speed for example 1000M or 100M Incorrect Password WARN Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start a console telnet or FTP session see the process field for the type of session Session Begin INFO A console telnet or FTP session has begun see the process field for the type of session Session End INFO A console telnet or FTP session has terminated see the process field for the type of session 2 8 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 42 Command Examples Table 90 Log Messages continued LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION Sync with timeserver WARN The device was not able to synchronize the time with the time server at the ip failed listed IP address Sync with timeserver INFO The device synchronized the time with the time server at the listed IP ip successful address Received File file INFO A file was uploaded to the IES 612 51A by FTP file received file s name Received Firmware WARN A checksum error was detected during an attempted FTP firmware upload Checksum Error Received Firmware WARN Someone attempted to upload a firmware file with a wrong identity via FTP Invalid Received Firmware Size WARN The file size was too large with an attempted FTP firmware upload too large THERMO LOW VOLTAGE WARN The device s voltage went above the accepted
14. 1 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 2 Wait forthe Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 3 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 296 Example Xmodem Upload io x Folder C Product Filename C Product config rom Browse i Protocol fi K modern Send Close Cancel Type the configuration file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 4 After a successful configuration file upload type at go to restart the IES 612 51A The IES 612 514A is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 414 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 55 16 Recovering the Firmware Usually you should use FTP or the web configurator to upload the IES 612 51A s firmware If the IES 612 51A will not start up the firmware may be lost or corrupted Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the IES 612 51A only when you are unable to upload firmware through FTP BS This procedure is for emergency situations only 1 Obtain the firmware file unzip it and save it in a folder on your computer 2 Connect your computer to the console port and use terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters e VTIOO terminal emulation e 9
15. 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters 9 zyxel com tw IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your IES 612 51A LS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The IES 612 51A may be also referred to as the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance Log Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 100000
16. MVLAN Group Click MVLAN Group to open the MVLAN Group screen where you can configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 4 on page 168 The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings for each multicast VLAN This is a sequential value and is not associated with this multicast VLAN Name VID This field shows the name and VLAN ID of this multicast VLAN 1712 These fields display whether or not each port is a member of this multicast ENET1 2 VLAN V displays for members and displays for non members You can change these settings in the MVLAN Setup screen otatus This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable 19 3 MVLAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN MVLAN Setup The Number of This is the number of multicast VLAN configured on the IES 612 51A MVLAN 166 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN Figure 78 MVLAN Setup MVLAM Status MVLAN Group Hame example Delete Cancel Active IT Marne VAN ID o 1 4084 Port Control Tagging Select EI None Select AN Select AN Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed C Forbidden C Forbidden C Forbidden C Forbidden C Forbidden C Forbidden Forbidden Tx Tagging Tx Tagging
17. Table 83 Alarm Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click this button to erase the clearable alarm entries This field displays the index number of the alarm entry in the system Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Timestamp This field displays the month day hour minute and second that the system created the log Source This field displays where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of entries Next Page Click this to display the following page of entries O 40 3 Alarm Descriptions This table describes alarms that the system can send ATUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber ATUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to the IES 612 51A A V in the CLEARABLE column indicates that an administrator can remove the alarm SEVERITY vc info Table 84 Alarm Descriptions ALARM CONDITION FACILITY dsl 5000 line up 5001 line_ down
18. The following example sets the impulse noise protection minimum to 1 DMT symbols for upstream and 0 5 DMT symbols for downstream for DSL port 5 Figure 234 Impulse Noise Protection Command Example rasa adsl fps GA 1 52 1 18 Annex L Enable Command This command turns on the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port s Annex L can be used with Annex A ADSL over POTS not Annex B ADSL over ISDN Syntax ras gt adsl annexl enable lt portlist gt The following example turns on the Annex L feature for port 5 Figure 235 Annex L Enable Command Example ras adsl annexl enable 5 52 1 19 Annex L Disable Command This command turns off the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port s Syntax ras adsl annexl disable lt portlist gt The following example turns off the Annex L feature for port 5 IES 612 51A User s Guide 355 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Figure 236 Annex L Disable Command Example es adsl annexl disable 5 52 1 20 Annex M Enable Command This command turns on the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63 Syntax ras adsl annexm enable lt portlist gt The following example turns on the Annex M feature for port 5 Figure 237 Annex M Enable Command Example eg adsl annexm enable 5 52 1 21 Annex M Disable Command This command turns off the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL
19. The following is an example of how to modify a static VLAN table Figure 153 Modifying the Static VLAN Example ras switch vlan set 2000 1 FU ras switch vlan set 2001 2 FU 45 4 4 2 Forwarding Process Example Tagged Frames 1 2 3 First the IES 612 51A checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames see Section 45 4 2 on page 300 The IES 612 51A checks the frame s source MAC address against the MAC filter The IES 612 51A then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table The IES 612 51A notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the IES 612 51A whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have a tag Frames might be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames Untagged Frames 1 2 3 4 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN The IES 612 51A checks the frame s source MAC address against the MAC filter The IES 612 51A checks the PVID table and assigns a VID and IEEE 802 1Q priority The IES 612 51A ignores the port from which the frame came because the IES 612 51A does not send a frame to the port from which it came The IES 612 51A also does not forward frames to forbidden ports If after looking at the SVLAN the IES 612 51A does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it drops the frame 45 4 5 VLAN Frame Type Command Syntax
20. Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging IES 612 51A User s Guide Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 MVLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Status Click MVLAN Status to open the MVLAN Status screen where you can view a summary of all multicast VLAN on the IES 612 51A see Section 19 2 on page 165 MVLAN Group Click MVLAN Group to open the MVLAN Group screen where you can configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 4 on page 168 VID This field shows the VLAN ID of each multicast VLAN Click it to edit its basic settings and port members in the fields below This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Yes or inactive No This field shows the name of this multicast VLAN Delete Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Active Select this if you want the multicast VLAN to be active Clear this if you want the multicast VLAN to be inactive Name Enter a descriptive name for the multicast VLAN The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII characters long Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 This field displays
21. lt portlist gt L0 L2 Sets the Power Management H H mode pmm set IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P pmm param cportlist Displays or sets the Power H H lOtime 12time Management parameter SlIZSgUpDE l2atprt j max 12 rate min l2rate 10tol12 rate dsbcast enable eportlijst Enable downstream broadcast on H H lt vlanlist gt xDSL port dsbcast disable Spottdg2st Disable downstream broadcast on H H vlanlizst xDSL port dsbcast show portlst Show downstream broadcast on M L xDSL port H inp C portlost Displays or sets the upstream us H H lt usINP gt and downstream ds Impulse lt dsINP gt Noise Protection minimum setting 073 mam SELL xedit lt alarm gt all Edit system alarm table cond condcode severity fac lt target gt lt target gt clearable history clear lt alarm gt all Clear history alarm lt condition gt all history clear Clear history alarm history show severity all Display history alarm lt alarm gt all lt condition gt all sdate all lt edate gt all for rev detail M L M M L M M L severity all Display current alarm L L lt alarm gt all lt condition gt all lt sdate gt all edate all show for rev de
22. ppp lcp config The number of config request PDUs received by the IES regust 612 51A from the CPE client device ppp lcp echo The number of echo request PDUs received by the IES 612 Dee 51A from the CPE client device ppp lcp echo The number of echo reply PDUs received by the IES 612 EEN 51A from the CPE client device pppoe padi The number of padi PDUs sent by the IES 612 51A to the BRAS pppoe pado The number of pado PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IES 612 S51A pppoe padr The number of padr PDUs sent by the IES 612 51A to the BRAS pppoe pads The number of pads PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IES 612 S51A pppoe padt The number of padt PDUs sent and received by the IES 612 S51A IES 612 51A User s Guide 395 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands pppoe srvcname error pppoe ac system error pppoe generic error The number of service name errors for example the IES 612 51A s specified service is different than the BRAS s setting The number of times the access concentrator experienced an error while performing the Host request for example when resources are exhausted in the access concentrator This value does not include the number of times the IES 612 51A checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU and finds a mismatch however The number of other types of errors that occur in the PPPoE session between the IES 612 51A and the BRAS 53 9 Transparent LAN Servi
23. ras gt ip set lt new ip address gt lt netmask gt ras ip gateway ip ras config save where new ip The IP address you want to configure for the IES 612 51A address gt lt netmask gt The bit number of the subnet mask of the IP address you want to configure for IES 612 51A s uplink downlink and IES 612 51A DSL ports To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 lt ip gt The default gateway IP address you want to configure for the IES 612 51A The first command changes the IP settings for the IES 612 51A s uplink downlink and IES 612 51A DSL ports If you don t enter the subnet mask the system automatically computes the subnet mask IES 612 51A User s Guide 33 Chapter 49 IP Commands The second command changes the default gateway next hop This tells the IES 612 51A where to send packets that have a destination IP address that is not on the same subnet as the IES 612 51A s IP address The third command saves the new configuration to the nonvolatile memory For example use the following command sequence sets the IES 612 51A to have 192 168 1 3 as the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 192 168 1 233 for the default gateway Figure 195 IP Settings and Default Gateway Ad
24. s ome pans _ DESCRIPTION E NN in HEN show E Br general system information reboot show sec cancel Sets the reboot timer or displays the timer and remaining time for reboot If a reboot has been scheduled use this command to prevent a reboot 258 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P snmp getcommunity community Sets the SNMP GetRequest H H community snmp setcommunity community Sets the SNMP SetRequest H H community snmp trapcommunity Sets the SNMP Trap community H H snmp tru sthost xpo Sets the SNMP trusted host Set H H 0 0 0 0 to trust all hosts H snmp trapdst set index ip Sets the SNMP trap server and lt port gt listening port Set 0 0 0 0 to not send any SNMP traps snmp trapdst del Deletes the SNMP trap server H H server show Displays the device s service M L status and port numbers server enable lt telnet ftp web ic Turns on a service H H mp server disable lt telnet ftp web ic Turns off a service H H mp server port telnet ftp web Sets a port for a service H H lt port gt client show Displays the device s secured M L client settings client enable Turns on a secure client HR client disable Turns off a secure client HR client set index start ip Sets a secured client set a range H H end ip telnet of IP addresses from which you
25. where vid The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 index 1 16 a unique number for this setting sstart mosst Start of the multicast IP address range ip lt end mcast ip gt End ofthe multicast IP address range This command creates a multicast VLAN group The following example creates a multicast VLAN with VID 10 and group index 1 The multicast address range is 224 224 224 1 224 224 224 10 Figure 190 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan group set 10 1 224 224 224 1 e RR 47 8 7 Multicast VLAN Group Delete Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan group delete lt vid gt lt index gt where lt vid gt The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 index 16 a unique number for this setting IES 612 51A User s Guide 325 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands This command removes the specified multicast VLAN group setting 47 8 8 Multicast VLAN Group Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan group show lt vid gt where vid The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command displays a multicast to VLAN translation entry 326 IES 612 51A User s Guide Packet Filter Commands This chapter describes the packet filter commands 48 1 Packet Filter Commands Use the following packet filter commands to filter out specific types of packets on specific ports 48 1 1 Packet Filter Show Command Syntax ras switch pktfilter show portlist wh
26. 10copper 100coppe connection speed r auto gt enet enable lt portList gt Turns on the specified Ethernet H H port s enet disable lt portlist gt Turns off the specified Ethernet H H port s H H M P H H H H H H H H H H H H H H M L H H H H H H H H M L H H enet length show Manually set the ENET cable length this is used for very rare cases when connect to some ENET PHY in most cases should set to auto system default enet length set lt portlist gt Display the ENET cable length auto lt length gt setting lt length gt 0 15 in units of 10m smcast show Display all MAC addresses joined M L to ADSL ports bk i S lt d IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 3 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P H H Lc MN set ads onc MN mac Use join leave to add remove lt join leave gt smcast delete lt mac gt Removes a static multicast filter H H entry by deleting the associated MAC address isolation show Displays the subscriber isolation M L feature s current setting NN multicast MAC addresses on specified ADSL ports a range of ADSL ports or all ADSL ports MAC example 01005E010203 isolation enable Turns the subscriber isolation feature on isolation disable Turns the subscriber isolation H H feature off isolation Set switch mode to daisychain H H daisychain mode isolation Set switch mode
27. Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Figure 100 2684 Routed Gateway ORE REE a Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Gateway IP 0 0 0 0 VID o 1 410894 Priority 0 0 7 default 0 Add Index Gateway IP VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 2684 Routed Gateway LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen where you can configure routed PVC settings see Section 27 2 on page 196 Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic see Section 27 3 on page 198 RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 199 Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation VI Specify a VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes to this gateway Priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that you send to this gateway dd A Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to s
28. Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 113 IES 612 51A Features continued Multicast Features Static or dynamic IGMP multicast setting IGMP proxy IGMP snooping v1 amp v2 port based IGMP filtering per DSL port IGMP bandwidth limiting per DSL port IGMP group count limiting per DSL port IGMP membership reports IGMP MVLAN Multicast VLAN support VLAN aware IGMP snooping Static multicast groups 256 each supporting 16 members Broadcast methodology Different video mapping to different VLANs Tracking IP address with IGMP ACL Filtering Packet filtering IP PPoE EAPoL IGMP DHCP NetBIOS ARP ACL filtering ACL Access Control Logic 14 possible rules and 4 possible actions 8 ACL per PVC L2 frame filtering based on for example the source MAC address and port L3 frame filtering based on for example the source IP address and IP protocol Rate limiting per ADSL port Rate limiting per ADSL VC IES 612 51A User s Guide 421 Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 113 ES 612 51A Features continued Per ADSL Port Number of ACL Profiles 8 Provisioning Number of DHCP snooping table entries 32 Number of static DHCP snooping table entries 32 Number of MAC filters 10 Number of Joined MVLANs 4 Number of PVCs PVC PPVC member TLSPVC PAEPVO 8 Number of RPVC RPVC routing entries 8 Number of PPVCs 2 Number of VLANs 16 Number of IGMP groups per DSL port 16 Number of IGMP host IP addresses per DSL port 16
29. ENET Apply Cancel Active Select this check box to copy this port s active setting This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Customer Info Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber information This is configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Customer Tel Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber s telephone number This is configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 24 Features Select this check box to copy this port s ADSL2 feature settings These are configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Profile amp Mode Select this check box to copy this port s port profile settings and ADSL operational mode The port profile settings are configured in the xDSL Port Profile Setup screens see Chapter 14 on page 125 The ADSL operational mode is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 IGMP Filter Select this check box to copy this port s IGMP filter settings These are configured in the IGMP Filter Profile screen see Section 14 8 on page 135 Security Select this check box to copy this port s security settings This is configured in the Port Security screen see Chapter 24 on page 185 Frame Type Select this check box to copy this port s allowed frame type This is configured in the Static VLAN Setting screen see Chapter 22 on page
30. Transfer the firmware file to the IES 612 51A The firmware file on your computer that you want to put onto the IES 612 51A is named irmware bin The internal firmware file on the IES 612 51A is named ras Figure 212 Example Transfer the Firmware File ftp gt put firmware bin ras Quit FTP Figure 213 Example Close FTP Client Etpa gut Wait for the update to finish The IES 612 51A restarts automatically IES 612 51A User s Guide 339 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands 340 IES 612 51A User s Guide SNMP Commands This chapter covers Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP with the IES 612 514A 51 1 SNMP Commands Use these commands to configure SNMP settings See Chapter 34 on page 225 for more information about SNMP 51 1 1 Get Community Command Syntax ras sys snmp getcommunity community where community The password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 2 Set Community Command Syntax ras sys snmp setcommunity community where community The password for the incoming Set requests from the management station Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 3 Trusted Host Set Command Syntax ras sys snmp trusthost ip IES 612 51A User s Guide 341 Chapter 51 SNMP Commands where ip The IP address of a
31. You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed The number 1 16 to identify a multicast IP address range Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields This command configures an IGMP filter profile The following example configures an IGMP filter profile named voice with a range of multicast IP addresses index 1 from 224 1 1 10 to 224 1 1 44 Figure 176 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command Example ras gt switch igmpfilter profile set test1 1 224 1 1 10 224 1 1 44 47 3 4 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpfilter profile delete lt name gt where lt name gt The name of an IGMP filter profile IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 i5 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands This command removes an IGMP filter profile The following example removes the voice IGMP filter profile Figure 177 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Example ras switch igmpfilter profile delete voice 47 3 5 IGMP Filter Profile Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpfilter profile show lt name gt where lt name gt The name of an IGMP filter profile or all of the IGMP filter profiles lt gt This
32. clearable 5000 line up locall 5001 line_down locall 5002 ad_perf_lol_thresh ocala 5003 ad_perf_lof_thresh locall 5004 ad_perf_los_thresh locali 5005 ad_perf_lop_thresh locali 5006 ad perf es thresh locali 5007 ad_perf_ses_thresh locali 5008 ad_perf_uas_thresh locali 5009 ad_atuc_loftrap local 5010 ad_atuc_lostrap locall 5011 ad_atur_loftrap locall 5012 ad atur lostrap locali 5013 ad_atur_lprtrap locall 10000 vol err locall critical 10001 temp_err locall critical 10002 hw rtc fail locali critical 10003 hw_mon_fail locali Critical 10004 cold_ start locali 43 7 Log Format The following table describes the columns in the list Table 92 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the alarm entry in this list display This is the category of alarms eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms condition There is a condition code number for the specific alarm message and a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies facility This is the log facility local1 local7 on the syslog server where the system is to log this alarm This is for alarms that send alarms to a syslog server snmp This displays V if the system is to send this alarm to an SNMP server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to an SNMP server syslog This displays V if the
33. lt I gt all VIDs lt gt a list of VIDs 1 3 you can also include a range of VIDs lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table Figure 159 VLAN Delete Command Example ras switch vlan delete 2 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 45 5 VLAN Enable Syntax ras switch vlan enable vid This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 45 6 VLAN Disable Syntax ras switch vlan disable vid This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 45 6 1 VLAN Show Command Syntax ras switch vlan show lt vlanlist gt where vlanlist You can specify a single VID 1 all VIDs lt gt a list of VIDs 1 3 you can also include a range of VIDs lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows information about the specified port s VLAN settings The following example shows the settings for all VIDs Figure 160 VLAN Show Command Example ras gt switch vlan show vid name F fixed X forbidden N normal U untag T tag 1 DEFAULT enabled 129450990712 12 ENFREEREFREERRE EF UUUUUUUUUUUU UU IES 612 51A User s Guide 305 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 306 IES 612 51A User s Guide MAC Commands This chapter describes how to configure the IES 612 51A s MAC commands 46 1 M
34. lt atur fast rateup gt lt atuc interleave rateup gt lt atur interleave rateup gt lt atuc fast ratedown gt lt atur fast ratedown gt lt atuc interleave ratedown gt lt atur interleave ratedown gt lt init fail enable gt lt atuc fail fast gt lt atuc Sos lt atur ses gt lt atuc uas gt lt atur uas alarmprofile profile Removes an alarm profile delete alarmprofile map lt port List gt Maps specified ADSL ports to an lt profile gt alarm profile alarmprofile port number Displays alarm profile to ADSL showmap port mapping alarmprofile lt port number gt Displays which alarm profile parameters are mapped to an ADSL port lt port number gt Display or set Maximum nominal transmit PSD in the US direction H H H H L L m L showport usnompsd H H lt max nominal psd gt IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P dsnompsd port number Display or set Maximum nominal lt max nominal transmit PSD in the DS direction psa uscarrier port number Display or set US carrier mask H H lt mi gt m from tone 0 to 63 H H dscarrier0 port number Display or set DS carrier mask m1 m2 m3 from tone 32 to 255 m4 m5 mo lt m gt dscarrierl lt port number gt Display or set DS carrier mask H H m0s xmi lt m2 gt from tone 256 to 511 m3 m4 m5
35. m6 m7 annexl enable pobntirst Turns on the Annex L feature on H H the specified port s annexl disable portlist Turns off the Annex L feature on H H the specified port s annexl show s pobtlist Displays the Annex L feature M L setting for the specified port s annexi enable Cporbtlrst Turns on the Annex feature on H H the specified port s annexi disable spontit Turns off the Annex I feature on H H the specified port s annexi show lt port List Displays the Annex feature M L setting for the specified port s annexm enable lt portlist gt Turns on the Annex M feature on H H the specified port s annexm disable lt portlist gt Turns off the Annex M feature on H H the specified port s lt portlist gt Displays the Annex M feature M L setting for the specified port s lt portlist gt Turns on Seamless Rate H Adaptation SRA ADSL2 on the specified port s lt portlList gt Turns off SRA ADSL2 on the H H specified port s cpoBtTTSE Displays the SRA ADSL2 setting M L for the specified port s lt portlist gt L2 L3 Turns on the Power Management H H feature on the specified port s lt portlist gt Turns off the Power Management H H feature on the specified port s lt p rtlist gt Displays the Power Management M L feature setting for the specified annexm show H sra enable sra disable sra show pmm enable pmm disable pmm show port s
36. ras switch vlan frametype lt portlist gt lt all tag gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 gt You can also include a range of DSL ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt allitag gt Use tag to have the specified port s accept only incoming Ethernet frames that have a VLAN tag Use a11 to have the specified port s accept both tagged and untagged incoming Ethernet frames This command sets the specified DSL ports to accept VLAN tagged Ethernet frames or both tagged and untagged Ethernet frames 302 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands LES The IES 612 51A accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames on the Ethernet ports The following example sets the IES 612 51A to accept only VLAN tagged Ethernet frames on DSL port 3 Figure 154 VLAN Frame Type Command Example ras switch vlan frametype 3 tag 45 4 6 VLAN CPU Show Command Syntax ras gt switch vlan cpu show This command displays the management VLAN CPU You can only use ports that are members of this management VLAN in order to manage the IES 612 51A The following example sets VLAN ID 2 to be the CPU management VLAN Figure 155 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras switch vlan cpu set 2 45 4 7 VLAN CPU Set Command Syntax ras gt switch vlan cpu set lt vid gt where lt vid gt The VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1
37. 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 Sy mbol tone 00 00 00 02 02 OZ OZ 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 OZ 02 02 02 02 OZ 02 02 02 00 00 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 01 02 02 02 02 EE 02 02 02 02 00 00 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 OZ U2 02 02 02 OZ 02 Og a m 202 OZ OZ 02 OZ OZ IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 52 2 3 Lineinfo Command Syntax Fas SLgLISLtriCcS adsl lrnerinto sSportlsb where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line operating values of a DSL port An example is shown next Figure 243 Lineinfo Command Example ras statistics adsl lineinfo 38 port 8 operating modes service type in operation adsl2 TRELLIS operation mode son connection detail down up stream interleaved delay ms 3 2 total transceiver DS output power dbm 2 5 total transceiver US output power dom 11 5 atuc information Vendor 3 30304235303035300000000000000000 VErs Lon numoer 6023233302525250502300000000900000000 serial number 303230303065303365393030303700000000000000000000000000000000
38. 327 IP Commands 331 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands 335 SNMP Commands 341 ADSL Commands 343 Virtual Channel Management Commands 375 ACL Commands 399 Commands Summary This chapter introduces the command line interface and lists the available commands 41 1 Command Line Interface Overview BS See the previous chapters for background information on features configurable by the web configurator The web configurator is the preferred configuration tool You can use text command lines for software configuration The rules of the commands are listed next 1 The command keywords are in courier new font 2 Commands can be abbreviated to the smallest unique string that differentiates the command For example the system date command could be abbreviated to sy d 3 The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets For instance config save means that the save field is optional 4 Command refers to a command used in the command line interface CI command 5 Thelsymbol means or 3 Using commands not documented in the User s Guide can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable 41 2 Command Privilege Levels There is a high middle or low privilege level for each command High privilege commands are only available to administrators with high privilege access High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts
39. 4 B O E O 16 Active Inactive Select Al None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 IGMP Count LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 154 Port This field shows each DSL port number Active This field shows whether or not the IGMP count limit is enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Count Enter the maximum number of IGMP groups a subscriber on this port can join This has no effect if the IGMP count limit is disabled Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the specified IGMP count limit on this port IES 612 51A User s Guide 159 Chapter 17 IGMP 17 8 IGMP Port Info Screen Use this screen to display the current number of IGMP related packets received on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Port Info Figure 74 IGMP Port Info D GME Fortino IGMP Status Show Port LA Port Group Count Query Count Join Count Leave Count 0 0 0 USE 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 IGMP Port Info LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 154 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port
40. 5000 line up locali V V info 2 dsl 5001 line down Loca Li V V minor V 3 dsl 5002 ad perf lol thresh locall V V minor V 4 dsl 5003 ad perf lof thresh locall V V minor V 5 dsl 5004 ad perf los thresh locall V V minor V 6 dsl 5005 ad perf lop thresh locsgll V V minor V 7 dsl 5006 ad perf es thresh locali V V minor V 8 dsl 5007 ad perf ses thresh locali V V minor V 9 dsl 5008 ad perf uas thresh locali V V minor V 10 dsl 5009 ad_atuc_loftrap locall V V minor 11 dsl 5010 ad atuc lostrap locall V V minor 12 dsl 5011 ad_atur_loftrap locall V V minor 13 dsl 5012 ad atur lostrap locall V V minor 14 dsl 5013 ad atur lprtrap locall V V minor 15 egpt 10000 vol err Tocall V V critical 16 eqpt 10001 temp err locall V V EE E tee 17 eqpt 10002 hw_rtc_fail locall V V critical m 18 egpt 10003 hw mon fail locall V V critical 19 egpt 10004 cold start locall V V info Press any key to continue e to exit n for nopause 43 4 Alarm Port Show Command Syntax ras alarm port show lt severity gt all This command displays port alarm severity level thresholds The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 43 Alarm Commands The following example displays the port alarm thresholds for all ports ifindex identifies the interface Figure 139 Alarm Port Show Command Example ra
41. 5002 ad_perf_lol_thres h 5003 ad_ perf lof thres h 5004 ad_perf los thres h d V h es V h SYSLOG minor minor minor minor LN po 5007 ad perf ses thre sh minor minor V d V d V d V d V d V d V d V d V d V 5008 ad perf uas thre local sh 5009 ad atuc loftrap d 5010 ad atuc lostrap 250 IES 612 51A User s Guide minor mesch fa sl sl sl sl sl sl sl sl sl sl V minor Chapter 40 Alarm SYSLOG SEVERITY ee Table 84 Alarm Descriptions continued ALARM CONDITION FACILITY dsl 5011 ad atur loftrap dsl 5013 ad atur lprtrap HS Ten nm ear V e em iess e mm 7 em mech feen Ju Jam t MIU lt lt lt lt lt lt a me p NO sys NO CO N sys i i lt lt eom ew v v ER lt lt 15002 alm_clear local ino fe lt lt lt lt 40 4 Alarm Event Setup Screen This screen lists the alarms that the system can generate along with the severity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Event Setup IES 612 51A User s Guide 25 Chapter 40 Alarm Figure 130 Alarm Event Setup QR Alarm Status Alarm Port Setup Index Alarm Condition Code Condition Facility SNMP Syslog Severity Clearable dsl S000 line up locali W Ww infa dsl S001 line down local 1 roi ror dsl S002 ad perf lal thresh
42. Customer Info Customer Tel IT zt Features Copy Port 1 rre leaMode D IGMP filter security iframe Type settings Paste virtual Channels alarm Profile O pviogpriority Packet Filter Fart Active Customer Info Customer Tel Profile Mode Channels 1 enabled DEFY AL 1 2 enabled DEFY AL 1 di enabled mE DEFY AL 1 d enabled E DEFVAL 1 5 enabled B DE FVAL 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 xDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Setup Click VC Setup to open the VC Setup screen where you can configure VC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 9 on page 116 PPVC Setup Click PPVC Setup to open the PPVC Setup screen where you can configure priority PVC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 11 on page 121 IES 612 51A User s Guide 109 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 19 xDSL Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Copy Port Paste Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports 1 Select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings 2 Select the settings that you want to copy 3 Click Paste and the following screen appears 4 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 5 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 47 Select Ports 12 3 4 56 7 8 3 1 9 Li L3 E EK EL E O is 3i2 2 O O ENET select EI None
43. Factory Default Profile Status Active Interleave Upstream ADSL Settings 512 Kbps 64 Kbps Latency Mode Downstream ADSL Settings 9088 Kbps 64 Kbps Max Rate Min Rate Latency Delay Max Margin 31 db 31 db Min Margin Target Margin Up Shift Margin Down Shift Margin 3 db 3 db Virtual Channel Default Settings Super channel Enabled VPI lt CO CO VC Profile Default VC Profile Settings DEFVAL Profile Settings Encapsulation DEFVAL factory default RFC 2684 Multiplexing LLC based Traffic Class UBR 300000 cells second U O JJ CDVT DEFVAL VC Profile Settings Encapsulation RFC 2684 Multiplexing VC based Traffic Class UBR PCR 300000 cells second CDVT Default IGMP Filter Profile The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is Settings assigned to all of the DSL ports by default It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications A The IES 612 51A DSL ports PVCs use ATM Adaptation Layer AAL 5 56 5 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Pin Assignments The following diagram shows the pin assignments of the Telco 50 connector Figure 298 Telco 50 Pin Assignments 419d OD TT 10d O2 0 l 10d OD 6 Hod OD 8 140d OF f 140d OF 9 110d OD S 10d OD F 110d OD E od OD Z 140d OD T 110d O2 zg E rr k 8 0g J8 40g 5M 9 310g esp 5 310g Jas p 110g Jaen E H
44. GEIER Web icmp H can manage the device and the protocols that can be used syslog show p Displays the syslog settings M L syslog enable MEN Turns on the syslog logging H H syslog disable BEEN Turns off the syslog logging H H syslog server ip Sets the IP address of the syslog H H server stdio show NENNEN Displays Current Stdio Timeout L L stdio set minute 0 no Sets Current Stdio Timeout H H timeout time show EMEN Displays the system s current L L time time set hh lt mm gt ss Sets the system s time H H date show NN Displays the system s current L L date date set Sets the system s date H H timeserver show E Displays the system s time server M L timeserver set Sets the system to not use a time H H Server IES 612 51A User s Guide 259 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P timeserver set daytime ip Sets the time service protocol H H nosync time server s IP address and the device s time zone timeserver set time nto 1p Sets the time service protocol H H lt utc lt time server s IP address and the 501001200 E device s time zone Retrieves the date and time from H H the time server wdog show Displays the current watchdog H firmware protection feature status and timer wdog set msec 0 disable Sets the watchdog count O turns H the watchdog off monitor show
45. Jes 7 ug esf T Mog Jaen 21 6 340g Jes T l 449d Jes FTT 34004 Jost TOT Ad es HSHDOGHoGHSGHESGBGQAGAAG OOOCCCS O EC EWU ES Gy EK E13 Et 44 SEI KR CEN EIU KOK ky ED ED ELO ER EO KI eb VE ES Cer lz CICICI I e m m SIS IFISISISISISISISigig aiie Ww foi Tu i sisse sss jejelss aja a a a a g a olola l l n In nna aio o 2 s s s s a s a 2 S S S 8 2 2 3 2 2 2 8 Alt TFS TSS SS 8 S S S 3 S SI SI SIS 51 513 mp POPOL OP b a Ea E Eea a E a al ad bed ied al eid eal Aialnair i 4 8 d BN d Eo dg B d 8 a3 Ff d i 8 i0 d id 18 IFN gt W t 8 d i This table lists the ports and matching pin numbers for the hardware Telco 50 connector Table 116 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers 1 USER 14 39 1 26 USER 15 40 2 27 C c C C C C C O O O O CO CO O O O O 56 6 Console Cable Pin Assignments The following diagrams and chart show the pin assignments of the console cable IES 612 51A User s Guide 425 Chapter 56 Product Specifications Figure 299 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector 0000 Figure 300 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector Table 117 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments RJ 11 MALE DB 9 FEMALE 426 IES 612 51A User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index The appendices provide general information Some details may not apply to your IES 612 51A Legal Information 429
46. Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile delete profile where profile The name of an alarm profile This command allows you to delete an individual alarm profile by its name You cannot delete the DEFVAL alarm profile The following example deletes the SESalarm alarm profile Figure 255 Alarm Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl alarm profile delete SESalarm 52 3 4 Alarm Profile Map Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile map lt portlist gt profile where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt profile gt The name of an alarm profile 3 2 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Sets the IES 612 51A to use an already configured alarm profile with the specified DSL ports The following example sets the IES 612 51A to use the SESalarm alarm profile with DSL port 5 Figure 256 Alarm Profile Map Command Example ras adsl alarmprofile map SESalarm 5 52 3 5 Alarm Profile Showmap Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile showmap profile where profile The name of an alarm profile Displays which alarm profiles the IES 612 51A is set to use for specific or all DSL ports The following example displays which alarm profile the IES 612 514A is set to use for DSL port 5 Figure 257 Alarm Profile Showmap Command Example ras adsl alarmprof
47. all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PPVC vci The VCI of the PPVC This command removes a PPVC Removing a PPVC also deletes all of the member PVCs The following example removes a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 Figure 268 PPVC Delete Command Example ras adsl ppvc delete 5 8 35 53 7 2684 Routed Mode Commands Use the 2684 routed mode to have the IES 612 51A add MAC address headers to 2684 routed mode traffic from a PVC that connects to a subscriber device that uses 2684 routed mode You can also specify the gateway to which the IES 612 514A sends the traffic and the VLAN ID tag to add See RFC 2684 for details on routed mode traffic carried over AAL type 5 over ATM Use the commands in the following order to set up a 2684 routed mode PVC 1 Usethe adsl rpvc gateway commands to configure gateway settings 2 Use the adsl rpvc set command to configure RPVCs 2684 routed mode PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic 3 Usetheadsl rpvc route set command to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE or Customer Premises Equipment This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers IES 612 51A User s Guide 383 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands 4 Usethe adsl rpvc arp commands to v
48. c D 1 4094 Priority o gt Add Modify Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port VPI VCI Encap PYD Priority Members Delete Of 32 llc 0 Delete Dad vc 1 Delete Of 36 llc 2 Delete UI 35 VC Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 PPVC Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION xDSL Port Setup Click xDSL Port Setup to go to the screen where you can configure DSL port settings see Section 13 7 on page 109 VC Setup Click VC Setup to open the VC Setup screen where you can configure VC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 9 on page 116 Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Select the encapsulation type Ilc or vc for this PPVC Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this PPVC Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this PPVC The IES 612 51A uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device This PVC cannot overlap with any existing PVCs on this port PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this PPVC Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Add Modify Click Add Modify to save PPVC settings for a port In order to change a port s PPVC settings just select the port from the Port drop down list box and then configure the settings you want These settings replace the port s old sett
49. doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth 14 3 2 Traffic Parameters These are the parameters that control the flow of ATM traffic IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 14 3 2 1 Peak Cell Rate PCR Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed 14 3 2 2 Sustained Cell Rate SCR Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR 14 3 2 3 Maximum Burst Size MBS Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again BS If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 56 PCR SCR and MBS in Traffic Shaping a 14 3 2 4 Cell Delay Variation Toler
50. ds carrier port 5 00000000 000F0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tone m0 256 287 m1 288 319 m2 320 351 m3 352 383 m4 384 415 m5 416 447 m6 448 479 m7 480 511 52 1 16 PMM Parameters Command Syntax pas adsl pmm param lt po rtlist gt lt 1L0time gt L2Ltgqme lt lz2atpr gt lt Iz2atprt gt lt max_l2rate gt lt min_l2rate gt lt l0tol2_rate gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt l0time Set the minimum time in seconds 10 65535 that the DSL line must stay in LO power mode before changing to the L2 power mode amp l2times Set minimum time in seconds 10 65535 that the DSL line must stay in the L2 power mode before reducing the power again in the L2 power mode IES 612 51A User s Guide 353 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands lt l2atpr gt SlIZatprba max l2rate min l2rate 10tol2 rate Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction ATPR in decibels dB that is permitted in a L2 power reduction The system can gradually decrease the DSL line transmission power while it is in the L2 power mode This is the largest individual power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode The range is 0 15 dB Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction Total ATPRT in decibels dB that is permitted in the
51. or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command lists the PVCs for handling 2684 routed mode traffic RPVCs IES 612 51A User s Guide 387 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands The following example displays the RPVCs for DSL port 1 Figure 275 RPVC Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc show 1 port vpi vci ip netmask gateway ip DO US vaprofrile d 8 20 E92 L6050L0Uv200732 J9ZLObLLbOIl02 DERVAL DERVAT 53 7 7 RPVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vci The VCI of the RPVC This command removes a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example removes a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic It is for DSL port 1 VPI 8 VCI 35 Figure 276 RPVC Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvc delete 1 8 35 53 7 8 RPVC Route Set Command 388 Syntax ras adsl rpvc route set port number lt vpi gt vci lt ip gt lt netmask gt where port number The port of the RPVC Specify a single DSL port 1 lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC lt vci gt The VCI of the RPVC IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Comma
52. s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Close to exit the screen without saving your changes IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 124 IES 612 51A User s Guide xDSL Profiles Setup A profile is a list of settings that you define Then you can assign them to one or more individual ports For background information about many of these settings see Chapter 13 on page 107 14 1 Port Profile Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup Figure 55 Port Profile Lc VC Profile Alarm Profile IGMP Filter Profile Index Hame Latency Mode Down Up Stream Rate kbps Select DEFVAL Interleave 2048 512 Ce H DEFVAL MAX Interleave HUDD 5132 C Modify Delete Marne Latency Mode Interleave Lp Stream Down Stream Max Rate l 64 4096ikbps 24000 54 32000 kbps Min Rate 32 32 4096 kbps ei 32 32000 kbps Interleave Delay fzo 1 255 ms on 1 255 ms Max SNR 3l D 31 dB 31 0 31 dB Min SMR p 0 31 dB o 0 31 dB Target SME s 0 31 dB e 0 31 dB Up Shift SMR s 0 31 dB EN 0 31 dB Down Shift SNR 3 0 31 dB 3 oan Add Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Port Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Profile Click VC Profile to op
53. tlspvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Create modify a TLS PVC eod lt DS profile L L L L L M H M H vcprofile US vid s tag VLAN id vcprofile lt pvid gt lt priority gt priority for s tag SDIJ EDU tlspvc show Display TLS PVC setting by port L L queuemap show Displays the xDSL priority level to M L physical queue mapping queuemap set priority queue Setthe xDSL priority level to H H physical queue mapping IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION linediag setld port number Sets the specified port to line diagnostic mode linediag getld port number Displays the specified port line L L diagnostics linediag port number Displays the specified port line L L g tld992 3 diagnostics linediag setselt lt port number gt Sets the specified port to line H H SELT linediag getselt lt port number gt Displays the specified port line L L SELT linediag toneDiag lt port number gt Displays the specified port line L L diagnostics alarmprofile show profile Displays alarm profiles and their L L settings alarmprofile set lt Orori les lt atuc Configures an alarm profile H H P H H lofs gt lt atuc loss gt lt atuc lprs gt lt atur loss atuc lprs Satu lofs gt lt atur olls gt lt atur ess gt lt atur ess gt lt atuc fast rateup gt
54. 108 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Connect the DSL modem or router directly to the DSL port using a different telephone wire DSL port may be limiting the speed to a certain rate If they do not match when a good wire is used contact the distributor If the rates match the quality of the telephone wiring that connects the subscriber to the IES 612 51A User s Guide an Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 55 10 Configured Settings The configured settings do not take effect Table 109 Troubleshooting the IES 612 51A s Configured Settings CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the config save command after you finish configuring to save the IES 612 51A s settings 55 11 Password If you forget your password you will need to use the console port to reload the factory default configuration file see Section 55 15 on page 413 55 12 System Lockout Any of the following could also lock you and others out from using in band management managing through the data ports 1 Deleting the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Incorrectly configuring the CPU VLAN 3 Incorrectly configuring the access control settings 4 Disabling all ports LES Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the system If you lock yourself and others out of the system you can try using the console port to reconfigure the system See Section 55 15 on page 413 55 13 SNMP The SNMP manager server cannot get information
55. 133 IGMP Filter Profile The IGMP filter profile defines which multicast groups a port can join Select a profile of IGMP filter settings to assign to this port Use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure IGMP filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 135 ADSL2 2 feature These are features available with ADSL2 2 The subscriber s ADSL device must also support the individual features in order to use them At the time of writing these features have not been fully tested and their performance and interoperability cannot be guaranteed Annex L Enable Annex L to use reach extended ADSL2 This allows increased connection distances Annex M Enable Annex M to use double upstream mode This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63 Annex Enable Annex to use all digital mode With Annex the ADSL connection uses the full soectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service This increases the upstream data rate Note The subscriber cannot use POTS or ISDN services when you enable Annex I PMM Enable the Power ManageMent PMM feature to reduce the amount of power used overall and reduce the instances of the connection going down PMM increases or decreases the transmission power based on line conditions PMM also decreases the number of service interruptions Select L2 to have the ADSL connection use power saving mode and reduce the rate when there is no traffic The rate comes back up when there is tra
56. 175 Virtual Channels Select this check box to copy this port s virtual channel settings These are configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 13 9 on page 116 Alarm Profile Select this check box to copy this port s alarm profile This is configured in the Alarm Profile Setup screen see Section 14 6 on page 133 PVID amp Priority Select this check box to copy this port s PVID and priority settings These are configured in the VLAN Port Setting screen see Chapter 22 on page 175 Packet Filter Select this check box to copy this port s packet filter settings These are configured in the Packet Filtering screen see Chapter 20 on page 171 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 19 xDSL Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This field shows each ADSL port number Active This field shows the active status of this port The port may be enabled or disabled This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Customer Info This field shows the customer information provided for this port This is configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Customer Tel This field shows the customer telephone number provided for this port This is configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Profile This field shows which profile is assigned to this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13
57. 19 25 37 Down enet2 M Status Up Down stream Interleave Fast Up Time Down f Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down ko iiao iN io ion ie e io d gt e oO D D D D D D D D ec en Sen en e e e en e en See D D D D D D D M Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Port 1 DI Clear Counter Reset Copvyriaht 1994 2006 by XEL Communications Co A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window See Section 4 4 on page 63 for more information B Click this to open the Home screen This is the same screen that is displayed above See Chapter 6 on page 75 for more information C Click this to log out of the web configurator IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 4 Navigation Panel In the navigation panel click a menu item to reveal a list of submenu links Click a submenu link to go to the corresponding screen Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu Links BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION ROUTING PROTOCOL ALARM MANAGEMENT CONFIG SAVE The following table briefly describes the functions of the screens that you open by clicking the navigation panel s sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION System Information Use this screen to display general system and hardware monitoring informa
58. 53 8 PPPoA to PPPOE PAE Commands EE 392 53 8 1 PAE PYC Delete Command WEE 392 53 8 2 PAE PYG Set CODI aici sbid apr rela p aRT aiaa lada ua R o mida eR Po ptRa eaaa 392 53 8 3 PAE PYC Show Command EE 393 5S3 A FVO Sgssion r une BEE 394 538 9 PAE PYG Counter COI BE 394 53 9 Transparent LAN Service TLS Commands sees 396 93 9 1 TLS PVC Delete eer LEE 396 MOZ ITLS Fe SEL E iid ci NRI 396 62 9 9 ILS FVC Show CONGO sect tre tege 397 Chapter 54 te Mer qn Rr P eee ee ET TT TETUER 399 54 1 ACL elen EE 399 21 1 AGE Froile Sa Comman geed 399 54 1 2 ACL Profile Delete Command EEN 401 54 1 3 ACL Profile Show Map COmMmMang RETE T rete 401 54 1 4 ALL Profile Show Command WEEN 401 EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents EE eege 402 54 2 1 ACL Assignment Sel Command WE 402 54 2 2 ACL Assignment Delete Commande 402 54 2 3 ACL Assignment Show Command cessisse sisse cese nenne ENNER aas 403 Part VI Troubleshooting and Specifications 405 Chapter 55 ee le e du ee 407 55 1 Ine DIS LED Doos Nor TUMI dusissdexieuiasaegeoRUApI Uk mtok tu pesi R TIED RIO E PERUN gU cH U TU SUE 407 WC e LE e ee 407 GEES LAN Fon LEES Oo No THU DE sensensa E a tasi dida 408 55 4 LAN Port Data Transmission ssssesssesssesesee eene nnn nnns 408 aD DSL DAR TEn mM O Laaetenitetttest ietasthei iom dbcU
59. 6 10 enetl enet2 gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC Use clear to have the IES 612 51A set the specified port s or PVC s counters back to zero This command displays and or erases port statistics The following example displays port statistics for DSL port 1 Figure 137 Statistics Port Command Example ras gt statistics port 1 adsl port 1 tx packets packets uni packets uni packets nonuni packets nonuni packets discard packets discard packets 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 errors tx rate bytes s rx rate bytes s tx bytes rx bytes C where tx uni packets rx uni packets tx nonuni packets rx nonuni packets C LO This field shows the number of unicast packets transmitted on this port This field shows the number of unicast packets received on this port This field shows the number of non unicast broadcast and multicast packets transmitted on this port This field shows the number of non unicast broadcast and multicast packets received on this port See Chapter 6 on page 75 for details on the other port statistics fields 282 IES 612 51A User s Guide Alarm Commands This chapter describes the alarm management commands 43 1 Alarm Commands Use these commands to view customize and clear alarms You can also set the device to report alarms to an SNMP or syslog server that you specify 43 2 General Alarm Command Parameters The following table
60. 7 1 on page 111 Mode This field shows which ADSL operational mode the port is set to use This is configured in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 Channels This field displays the number of PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits that are configured for this port This is configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 13 9 on page 116 13 7 1 xDSL Port Setting Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup and then click a port s index number IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Figure 48 xDSL Port Setting General Setup Active Custamer Infa Custamer Tel Profile iera d Mode auto gt Alarm Profile DEFvAL v IGMP Filter Profile DEFVAL v ADSL Z r feature Annex L disable Annex M disable Annex disable HMM disable SRA disable US INP o o d DMT Symbol DS INP o DMT Syrnbol MaxUSTXPSD o 400 40 0 1 d m MaxDSTXPSD Jo 400 40 0 1 dBmiHz LO Time 300 10 55535 sec default300 L2 Time 3 1065535 sec default 30 L2 ATPR L 0 15 dB defaut L2 ATPRT e 0 15 dB defaults Max 7 Rate 4026 32 4096 Kbps 4 Kops resolution default 4096 Min L2 Rate E 32 4096 Kbps 4 Kbps resolution default 22 LO ta L2 Rate hs Min L2 Rate 2 and 16 Kbps default 6 Mask Mack cz y Mask Mask Mask LIS Carrier 0 53 00000000 oo000000 DS Carrierl 32 255 ooonooog oonsogog pooonnoo Joaooooad oongooon ooonno
61. Address This is the IP address of an IP multicast group member is the IP address of an IP multicast group member bia 12 enet1 enet2 These columns indicate whether or not each port is a member of the ee ee ccc UNUM snooping group 17 4 IGMP Bandwidth Screen Use this screen to set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Bandwidth Setup Figure 70 IGMP Bandwidth Port Setup Detault Bandwidth 512 1 100 000iKbps Apply Index a Start Multicast IF 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 233 255 255 255 Bandwidth 512 1 100 000iKbps Apply Cancel Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP Bandwidth Kbps Select Delete Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 IGMP Bandwidth LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click Port Setup to open the Bandwidth Port Setup screen where you can set up multicast bandwidth requirements on specified ports see Section 17 4 1 on page 157 Default Bandwidth Enter the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements 156 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 17 IGMP Table 36 IGMP Bandwidth continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or
62. Align one bracket with the holes on one side of the IES 612 51A and secure it with the bracket screws smaller than the rack mounting screws 2 Attach the other bracket in a similar fashion Figure 4 Attaching Mounting Brackets and Screws 3 After attaching both mounting brackets position the IES 612 51A in the rack by lining up the holes in the brackets with the appropriate holes on the rack Secure the IES 612 51A to the rack with the rack mounting screws Figure 5 Rack Mounting 5 LS Li Li D L Li oO Li Li DDDD D I IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Di IES 612 51A User s Guide Front Panel This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the IES 612 51A and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel The figure below shows the front panel of the IES 612 514A Figure 6 Front Panel AC Input 3 1 1 Front Panel Ports The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel Ports LABEL DESCRIPTION CONSOLE Only connect to this port if you want to configure the IES 612 51A using the command line interface CLI via the console port Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router USER CO Connect the Telco 50 connector USER pins 14 25 39 50 to subscribers respectively Connect the Telco 50 connector CO pins 1 12 26 37 to the telephone company for subscribers respectively
63. Auto EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel 3 2 2 LAN Port Ethernet Connection Connect the LAN port of your IES 612 51A to an Ethernet WAN switch using a straight through Category 5 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable with RJ 45 connectors You may connect multiple IES 612 514A units to the same Ethernet switch up to the number of ports available on the Ethernet switch 3 2 3 Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames An MDF is usually installed between end users equipment and the telephone company CO in a basement or telephone room The MDF is the point of termination for the outside telephone company lines coming into a building and the telephone lines in the building Figure 7 MDF Wiring lawerports Connect wiring from end user equipment to the lower ports of an MDF using a telephone wire Connect wiring from the telephone company to the upper ports of an MDF see the previous figure e Some MDFs have surge protection circuitry built in between the two banks thus do not connect telephone wires from the telephone company directly to the IES 612 514A Use a punch down tool to seat telephone lines between MDF blocks 3 2 4 Telco 50 Cables Telco 50 cables are used for data and voice applications with MDFs Main Distribution Frame patch panels and distribution boxes They can also be used as extension cables Telco 50 cables are made up of 25 twisted pair copper wires Connect a Telco 50 connec
64. C These fields are for traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the IES 612 51A ATU R These fields are for traffic going from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber s device 15 Min LOF This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOS This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOL This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LPR This field sets the limit for the number of Loss of Power seconds on the ATUR that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min ES This field sets the limit for the number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to seconds occur within 15 minutes 15 Min SES This field sets the limit for the number of Severely Errored seconds that are seconds permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min UAS This field sets the limit for the number of UnAvailable seconds that are permitted seconds to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min Failed Fast This field sets the limit for the number of failed fast retrains that are permitted Retrain within 15 minutes Init Failure Trap Select Active to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap Fast Rate Up bps Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number t
65. Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop 194 IES 612 51A Users Guide RFC 2684 Routed Mode This chapter shows you how to set up 2684 routed mode service 27 1 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Use the RFC 2684 formerly RFC 1483 routed mode to have the IES 612 51A add MAC address headers to 2684 routed mode traffic from a PVC that connects to a subscriber device that uses 2684 routed mode You also specify the gateway to which the IES 612 51A sends the traffic and the VLAN ID tag to add See RFC 2684 for details on routed mode traffic carried over AAL type 5 over ATM Use the 2684 Routed PVC Screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic Use the 2684 Routed Domain Screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE or Customer Premises Equipment This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Use the RPVC Arp Proxy Screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them Use the 2684 Routed Gateway Screen to configure gateway settings For upstream traffic Since the subscriber s device will not send out a MAC address after the IES 612 51A reassembles the Ethernet packets from the AALS ATM cells the IES 612 51A will append the routed mode gateway s MAC address and the IES 612 51A s MAC address as the destination sour
66. Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer E xj 2 The Web page you are viewing is trying to clase the window Do vou want bo clase this window IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator ep IES 612 51A User s Guide Initial Configuration This chapter describes initial configuration for the IES 612 51A See Chapter 56 on page 417 for various default settings of the IES 612 51A 5 1 Initial Configuration Overview This chapter shows what you first need to do to provide service to DSL subscribers 5 2 Initial Configuration This chapter uses the web configurator for initial configuration See the CLI chapters for information on the commands Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled 1 Login to the web configurator See Section 4 3 on page 61 for instructions 2 Inthe navigation panel click Basic Setting IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears Figure 20 IP Setup IP mask 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway az 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel 3 Use this screen to change the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address for your network Apply the settings IES 612 51A User s Guide 69 Chapter 5 Initial Configuration Es If you change the IP address of the IES 612 514 after you click Apply IP setting you have to use the new IP address to log into the web configurator again
67. Class A 56 2 Firmware Features This section introduces the IES 612 51A firmware features Table 113 IES 612 51A Features Basic Function Power On System Test POST Uplink Interface Fast Ethernet Thermal cutoff protection Temperature and voltage monitoring and threshold setting Management Interfaces In band Ethernet management One mini RJ11 console port for local management Management Features Embedded Web Configurator HTTP NetAtlas Element Management System EMS Command Line Interface CLI up to 5 concurrent sessions 3 Cl privilege levels and two Web privilege levels Telnet management Remote Management via Telnet FTP Web or SNMP 2 ENET ports supported DSL profile function for managing DSL line card connections Firmware upgrade through web configurator FTP and serial console port Text based configuration file backup via FTP or Web IEEE 802 1X port based authentication RADIUS client support for user s name and password UNIX syslog NTP Network Time Protocol IP ping SNMP up to 4 SNMP trap hosts supported Database backup restore Fault and alarm management Configuration management Performance counters Performance statistics 15m 24h Event log Internal trace and debug 418 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 113 IES 612 51A Features continued Alarm System Alarm Monitoring Security Automatic alarm and status report and Logging Programmable alarm f
68. Click this to select all entries in the Server List Select None Click this to un select all entries in the Server List 190 IES 612 51A User s Guide DHCP Snoop This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports 26 1 DHCP Snoop Overview DHCP snooping prevents clients from assigning their own IP addresses The IES 612 51A can store every DSL port MAC address IP address tuple offered by the DHCP server Then it only forwards packets from clients whose MAC address and IP address are recorded Packets from unknown IP addresses are dropped 26 2 DHCP Snoop Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop Figure 93 DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Counter Select Select Al None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 DHCP Snoop LABEL DESCRIPTION HCP Snoop Status Click DHCP Snoop Status to open the screen where you can look at or clear the current DHCP snooping table on each port see Section 26 3 on page 192 DHCP Counter Click DHCP Counter to open the screen where you can look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port see Section 26 4 on page 193 This field displays each DSL port number This field displays whether DHCP snooping is active V or inactive on this port IES 612 51A User s Guide M91 Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop T
69. Command Syntax ras switch dhcpsnoop show lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet1 enet2 gt Use this command to display the current DHCP snooping settings of the specified port s The following example displays the settings of ports 1 5 Figure 147 DHCP Snoop Show Command Example ras gt switch dhcpsnoop show 1 5 port enable 44 4 5 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics dhep counter porbtlcst clear hl 296 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 44 DHCP Commands where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 Use this command to display a summary of DHCP packets on the specified port s The following example displays the settings of port 1 Figure 148 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Example raso statistics dhcp counter 1 port discover offer request Each field is described in the following table port The selected DSL port number s discover The number of DHCP Discover packets on this port offer The number of DHCP Offer packets on this port request The number of DHCP Request packets on this port ack The number of DHCP Ack packets on this port overflow The DHCP server can ass
70. IES 612 51A Provide Internet access and multimedia services for Multiple Tenant Units MTU e Other applications include telemedicine surveillance systems remote servers systems cellular base stations and high quality teleconferencing 1 2 1 MTU Application The following diagram depicts a typical application of the IES 612 51A with DSL modems in a large residential building or multiple tenant unit MTU This application leverages existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access to all tenants and the tenants can continue to use the existing phone services IES 612 51A User s Guide a Chapter 1 Getting to Know the IES 612 51A Figure 1 MTU Application Internet 1 2 2 Curbside Application The IES 612 51A can be used by an Internet Service Provider ISP in a street cabinet to form a mini POP Point of Presence to provide broadband services to residential areas that are too far away from the ISP to avail of DSL services Residents need a DSL modem connected as shown in the previous figure Figure 2 Curbside Application ird iiid Internet Di IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know the IES 612 51A 1 3 Ways to Manage the IES 612 51A Use any of the following methods to manage the IES 612 51A e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the IES 612 51A using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 61 e Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternat
71. IES 612 51A and the BRAS IES 612 51A User s Guide 207 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE 208 IES 612 51A User s Guide DSCP This chapter shows you how to set up DSCP on each port and how to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values 29 1 DSCP Overview DiffServ Code Point DSCP is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks The higher the value the higher the priority Lower priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network 29 2 DSCP Setup Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DSCP on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DSCP Figure 104 DSCP Setup DSCP Map Select Select MI None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 DSCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Map Click DSCP Map to open the screen where you can set up the mapping between source DSCP priority and IEEE 802 1p priority see Section 29 3 on page 210 This field displays each port number This field displays whether DSCP is active V or inactive on this port IES 612 51A User s Guide 209 Chapter 29 DSCP Table 65 DSCP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the DSCP on this port Click this to enable DSCP on the selected ports Click this to disable DSCP on the selected ports All Click this to select all entries in the table None Click this to
72. L2 power mode This 1s the total transmit power decrease that 1s allowed to occur in the L2 power mode The range is O 15 dB Set the maximum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Set the minimum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Set the down stream transfer rate in Kilobits per second that serves as the threshold for whether the port 1s to use the LO or the L2 power mode The system changes from LO mode to L2 mode when the downstream transfer rate stays below this threshold for LO Time The system changes back from L2 mode to LO mode when the downstream transfer rate goes above this threshold This rate must be less than or equal to one half of the Min L2 Rate and at least 16 Kbps Use this command to display or set Power ManageMent PMM parameters for the specified DSL port s The following example sets DSL port 5 to use the following PMM settings e Stay in the LO power mode for 180 seconds before a
73. N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field If the configuration request was received on a DSL port a 2 byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number the first byte is always 0 the second byte is in hexadecimal format The next field is 2 bytes and displays the DHCP request packet s VLAN ID The last field A can range from 0 to 24 bytes and is optional information that you specify about this relay agent amp amp pom am poss amp aep e aep ou ep ap 2 ep as aep aep oe asp ou op aep sp ap aes am cep oe aep ep cs amp mp pump mm dur dun e e ke e UE ee ONQ GR ON a ON UR ON UR GR g a GR UN GE Gm am m m IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP Relay The Agent Information field that the IES 612 51A adds also contains an Agent Remote ID sub option of information that you specify The following figure shows the format of the Agent Remote ID sub option The 2 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field Then there is the number of the port in plain text format upon which the DHCP client request was received The next field B in the figure is 0 to 23 bytes of optional information that you specify This is followed by the name and telephone number configured for the DSL port The port number optional information B in the figure DSL name and DSL telephone number fields are separated by forward s
74. This field shows each port number Group Count This is the total number of Group packets received on this port Query Count This is the total number of Query packets received on this port This is the total number of Join packets received on this port This is the total number of Leave packets received on this port Clear Click Clear to delete the information the IES 612 51A has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen 17 9 IGMP Port Group Screen Use this screen to display the current list of multicast groups each port joins To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Port Group Figure 75 IGMP Port Group VF F IGMP Status Show Port 1 E Port VID Multicast IP Source IP Refresh 160 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 17 IGMP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 IGMP Port Group Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 154 VID This field shows the associated VLAN ID Multicast IP This field shows the IP address of the multicast group joined by this port This field shows the IP address of the client that joined the multicast group on this port Click Refresh to display updated information IES 612 51A User s Guide M61 Chapter 17 IGMP 162 IES 612 51A Users Guide Static Multicast This chapter describes the Static Multicast screen 18 1 St
75. V for enabled for disabled operational mode upstream and downstream maximum rates up time and the number of errored seconds The following example displays connection statistics for DSL port 1 Figure 241 DSL Port Show Command Example ras statistics adsl show 1 port status mode up downstream up time error second 15M 24H 512 9089 00000 00 04 59 IES 612 51A User s Guide 35 7 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 52 2 2 Linedata Command Syntax ras statistics adsl linedata lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line bit allocation of a DSL port Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This command displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support DSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist See the ITU T G992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 upstream carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for t
76. WAN IP 192 168 10 200 LAN IP 10 10 10 10 IP 10 10 10 1 ees Note the following The CPE device s WAN IP 192 168 10 200 in this example must be in the same subnet as the gateway s IP address 192 168 10 102 in this example e The IES 612 51A s management IP address can be any IP address it doesn t have any relationship to the WAN IP address or routed gateway IP address 384 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands The IES 612 51A s management IP address should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the WAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device It is suggested that you set the netmask of the subscriber s WAN IP address to 32 to avoid this problem The IES 612 51A s management IP address should not be in the same subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain It will make the IES 612 51A confused if the IES 612 51A receives a packet with this IP as destination IP The IES 612 51A s management IP address also should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the LAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device Make sure you assign the IP addresses properly In general deployment the computer must set the CPE device s LAN IP address 10 10 10 10 in this example as its default gateway The subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain must be unique Use the following command sequence to configure the IES 612 51A for this example set up Figure 270 2684 Routed M
77. all The type of alarm messages that the device is to send SNMP syslog or all You can specify more than one separated by commas clearable clearable unclearable This sets whether or not the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the system This command sets the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s BS Use the alarm tablelist command to display alarm setting details The following example creates an alarm report entry that sets all system alarms to the major severity level and sends them to an SNMP server at the local 3 log facility Figure 144 Alarm Xedit Command Example me alarm xedit sys all major local3 syslog 43 11 Alarm Cutoff Command Syntax ras gt alarm cutoff 288 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 43 Alarm Commands This command cancels an alarm This stops the sending of the alarm signal current This is useful in stopping an alarm if you have the alarm output connector pins connected to a visible or audible alarm The alarm entry remains in the system 43 12 Alarm Clear Command Syntax ras alarm clear This command erases the clearable alarm entries IES 612 51A User s Guide 289 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 290 IES 612 51A User s Guide DHCP Commands This chapter describes how to use the DHCP Relay and DHCP Snoop commands 44 1 DHCP Relay Commands Use these commands to configure the DHCP relay feature See Chapter 25 on page 187 for back
78. also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your device The real time is then displayed in the logs To open this screen click Basic Setting General Setup Figure 38 General Setup EIDEN Host Mame Location Contact Person s Marne Model Use Time Serer when Bootup Time Server IP Address Current Time Mew Timed hh mm sS Current Date Mew Dated yar mm did Time Zong m po AAMT 212 51 pu LE EE Er When synchronizing with time server It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your device You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Enter the name of the person in charge of this device You can use up to 31 Name ASCII characters spaces are allowed IES 612 51A User s Guide DI Chaper8GeneralSetup 0000000000000 Table 12 General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays your device type Use Time Server Select the time service protocol that the timeserver uses Not all time servers When Bootup support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a pro
79. ases ibn dba c taaGa qul dei e alo telah mint 305 Figure 161 MAC Filter Show Command Example sssssessssesseseee nennen nennen nnn 307 Figure 162 MAC Filter Enable Command Example iium eritis rk RE lb rk a bd vw ra rn ica bu anrea 308 Figure 163 MAC Filter Disable Command Example ccccccssssecceeeceseseceeceeeaeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeanseeeeeeees 308 Figure 164 MAC Filter Mode Command Example cccccsssececceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeseaaeeessaaess 309 Figure 165 MAC Filter Set Command Example dag reiege eher 309 Figure 166 MAC Filter Delete Command Example s oannnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnrnsosnrnnsnnrnnsnnrrrsnnrrrsnnrrrennrrrsennrenne 309 Figure 167 MAC Count Show Command Example esses nnne 310 30 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Figures Figure 168 MAC Count Enable Command Example EES 310 Figure 169 MAC Count Disable Command Example ccccccsssssceeeeeseessseeeesseeeseeeeeessausseeeeeessanseeeees 311 Figure 170 MAC Count Set Command Example ccccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeesessssaaaeeees 311 Figure 171 IGMP Snoop Show Command Example EE 313 Figure 172 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Example sssseseessssssessssene nennen nennen 313 Figure 173 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Example A 314 Figure 174 IGMP Filter Show Command Example eeeeeseeesesssseseeenen nennen nnns 314 Figure 175 IGMP F
80. change to the L2 power mode is permitted power Once in L2 power mode wait for 90 seconds before further reducing the transmission Each L2 power mode power reduction can only be 2 dB or less The total power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode is 15 dB Figure 233 PMM Parameters Command Example ras gt adsl pmm param 5 180 90 2 15 354 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 52 1 17 Impulse Noise Protection Command Syntax ras adsl inp Sportlriste SusrNP I dsctNB J where lt usINP gt Sets the minimum upstream us impulse noise protection setting Use 0 3 to define a number of DMT symbols 0 0 DMT symbols 1 2 0 5 DMT symbols 2 1 DMT symbols 3 2 DMT symbols dsINP Sets the minimum downstream ds impulse noise protection setting Use 0 3 to define a number of DMT symbols 0 0 DMT symbols 1 0 5 DMT symbols 2 1 DMT symbols 3 2 DMT symbols This command sets the upstream us and downstream ds impulse noise protection minimum setting on the specified DSL port s Sudden spikes in the line s noise level impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the DSL physical layer connection against impulse noise This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds It is recommended that you use a non zero setting for real time traffic that has no error correction like videoconferencing
81. command displays an IGMP filter profile s settings The following example displays the voice IGMP filter profile s settings Figure 178 IGMP Filter Show Command Example ras switch igmpfilter profile show voice profile index 22A sis CO CO CO CO CO CH Ch Ch CH CO CH CH CO O O CO CO CO CH CO CH Ch Ch CH CO CH CH CO O O CO CO Ch CO CO CH Ch Ch CH CO CH CH CO O O Kach 0 0 OU 0 0 OU 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 O30 HH 0 0 O09 0 0 CO CH CO CO CO CH CH CO CH CO CH CO CO c CH CO CH CO CO CO CH CH CO CH CO CH CO c0 CH CO CH CO CO CO CH CH CO CH CO CH CO CO CH CH 47 4 IGMP Bandwidth Commands Use the IGMP bandwidth commands to set up bandwidth budgets for specific multicast channels 47 4 1 IGMP Bandwidth Default Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth default bandwidth 316 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 47 IGMP Commands where bandwidth Allowed bandwidth between 1 and 1000 000 kbps kilo bits per second This command sets the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements yet Multicast bandwidth settings on channels using the switch igmpsnoop bandwidth set command have higher priority over this default setting 47 4 2 IGMP Bandwidth Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth set index start mcast ip lt end mcast ip gt bandwidth where index 1 96 a unique number for this setting start mcast
82. configuration file to your computer N See the CLI chapters to edit the configuration text file N You can change the dat file to a txt file and still upload it back to the IES 612 51A 36 5 Load Factory Defaults Use this function to clear all device configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults lt gt Restoring the default configuration deletes all the current settings It is recommended to back up the configuration file before restoring the default configuration To do this click Management Maintenance Click here Restore Default Configuration Figure 122 Restore Default Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer X I 22 Restore default configurations and reboot the system 3 Cancel Click OK to begin resetting all device configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes If you want to access the web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 IES 612 51A User s Guide 239 Chapter 36 Maintenance Figure 123 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot Microsoft Internet Explorer E d X AN rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 36 6 Reboot System Use this function to restart the device without physically turning the power off To open thi
83. cuaubegc io m eK 249 EI Eden aen AE TTE TE eis eerie eee 250 Table 85 Alarm EVER E 252 Table 86 Alarm Event Setup Edit etartetettteetein frei Et btt krh E RET ARpER RERERKR Rai KE RR hei GEI RIA M0 R Pet reti t adn 253 TE ein EE 254 DESSEN Rd EE 258 Ee E regii eR 277 TISSU LOS ET 278 Table 91 General Alarm Command Parameters ccccceecccceececceeceeeeececeeeeeeuceeesueceseseessueeessaeeesaaes 283 T Env uic 286 Table TE ln E e 336 Table 94 Line Performance Counters ccccccseeccccsesseeeeceeecceeeeeseceeceesceeeeeaeceeseuseceesseuseeessageceesaaanesees 360 Table 95 15 Minute e en TE lt 362 Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Commande 364 Table 97 Line Diagnostics Gel 992 3 Command NEEN 366 DEAE TELE ut EEN 369 TOGS OTS LED TOULO NOOU E 407 Table 100 ALM LED Troubleshooting EE 407 Tabie t01 10 100 LED Tasha seagate ntsc inian aa ekar ia anad 408 Table 102 Troubleshooting Data Transmission ccccccseecececeeeeceeceeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeesssaeeeessaeseees 408 Table 103 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting 408 Table 104 DSL VOCS DEER aessexiikisebt ebltiwebeti s EES HIM FIGR M1TRTEebUEMIDEE beri EpPOTRI THE S kPUHE PUER SOPEOIS 409 EE EES E ee 409 Ds m cU ie nouse Tu AREIS UM 410 Table 107 Troubleshooting a Local rues idee 411 Table 108 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate sseeesei
84. dotted decimal notation netmask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Make sure that the routed PVC s subnet does not include the IES 612 51A s IP address gateway ip The IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation This command adds a PVC to handle 2684 routed mode traffic LES You must use the rpve gateway set command to configure the gateway s settings before you use the rpve sec command The following example adds a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic It is for DSL port 1 VPI 8 VCI 35 It sets the DEFVAL profile for downstream traffic shaping and for upstream traffic policing The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 with a netmask of 32 and the gateway s IP address is 192 168 10 102 Figure 274 RPVC Set Command Example fasc dsl pve set T B8 95 DEFVALDEFEVANM 1924169104200732 19216810102 53 7 6 RPVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc show lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt The port s for which you want to display the RPVCs You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt
85. e EE 177 Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol Zitt EEN 179 Ei AR EE 182 jii 2 05 7 e Y M 183 Bs f gl MR 185 c ROI Le 4s Ae PQ 189 te oe gd llli 191 Tuer Ear St I d 192 E KE LOU EE 193 Table 59 RFC 2684 Routed PVO auoasneptesicurebxebes se skiakia deck krlnsltionzktbulens bes bed dini e ht eebe e LH DE M Dui 197 TORT TOI S SEROUS Be t 199 Jic Ao EEN T IE A E A A er E T eee E 200 THONG C2 2064 Roed Go EE 201 e TR a E E TETTE 204 Ee et e 206 TOE 4 eu A 209 E D OPNI EE 210 Bc 1 g 3415 1 erases ease ena 213 Ei Re OS EE 217 Boecl Ee BL EE 218 oc e he 1 eteem tm m 220 ET e e be e e EE 221 i o cru gd 223 Tube RER Lone in tu EE 225 T E ONE Eu TEE 226 Tabie 75 DMMEVE ET 227 TED EEN 229 Eeer ut NEE 230 Table 78 Remote Management Secured Client Setup eeeseessseesseeeessseeeerrenn nnne 231 Ee E EE 235 TEE oc RR UE 242 Ei CAR 4r A O0 246 36 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Tables I rob LEE MTM sn 248 EL
86. eeeessssseeeeeeeeeeeenn nennen nennen nnne nnne nar nnns nna nnns 69 lee TE de E tnmE 69 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 11 eee i eese ee LLeeeciieeere eene nenne anna nna n esa RRE 75 ipei DERE 75 0 1 1 Blhiermel Forn SIIUISIOS DBI BOE EE 76 C2 DSL agii sce i i P T e E ENT 79 DS RMON Statistics Screen Luieimpxidei hob dT pERKR I Hd bend aps Em CRAS darte a Ra dir bad 81 REENEN sri DU TNR 83 ELS RMON History RE EE 84 Chapter 7 nom ELE 87 Chapter 8 SEKR os atin 91 Chapter 9 Biggs eee P ai MN TT Pm 93 AEN ee 93 Eer EE 94 12 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 10 Ltr o MENOR Rm 97 ELE EE EE 97 pul peg ea Ae Eeer 97 102 1 Sind E ES EE 97 10 2 2 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example 98 ENNER RUM TUO tee 98 10 2 4 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example sss 98 REENEN gesteet Ee EEN 99 Chapter 11 lub i m SM 103 Chapter 12 Be We 070 DER 105 Chapter 13 AN le Es m O 107 13 1 ADSL Standarda LIVBPVIBW eo tases eitis iara AE 107 13 2 Downstream and Upstream sseeeessssssseseeeeee nnne nennen nennen nnn nnns nnn nns 107 E Rog 6 L EE 107 SEENEN ee 108 STONE I d oc E mU eem 108 13 9 Conhigured ve
87. following example displays the tone diagnostics results for DSL port 8 Figure 252 Tone Diagnostics Command Example ras ad lined toneD 1 port 1 number_of_subcarries 512 32 latn zu 2 7 satn 24 1 61 3 snrm 30 2 Zed attndr 28008000 1248000 farEndActatp E aU 1 9 log dB QLN dBm SNR dB N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 21 125 5 T 74 zio er L24 0 26 Y 123 0 Sala H WO MONA On OF WN EF CH The following table lists the tone diagnostic parameters See the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 98 ToneDiag Command DESCRIPTION number_of_ Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each This number indicates how many upstream and downstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the maximum upstream and downstream scale factor used in producing the channel characteristics function This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the
88. gt lt max nominal psd gt IES 612 51A User s Guide 349 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands where max nominal 400 40 unit of measure is 0 1dBm Hz psd gt This command displays or sets the upstream maximum nominal transmit PSD Power Spectral Density The following example sets the upstream maximum nominal transmit PSD for port 7 to 10 dBm Hz Figure 223 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Example ras adsl usnompsd 7 100 52 1 12 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Syntax ras gt adsl dsnompsd lt portNo gt lt max nominal psd gt where lt max nominal 400 40 unit of measure is 0 1dBm Hz psd gt This command displays or sets the downstream maximum nominal transmit PSD Power Spectral Density The following example sets the downstream maximum nominal transmit PSD for port 7 to 10 dBm Hz Figure 224 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Example ras adsl dsnompsd 7 100 52 1 13 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Syntax ras adsl uscarrier lt portNo gt lt m0 gt lt m1 gt where m0 m1 The upstream subcarriers to be masked disabled Each mx can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 00000000 ffffffff Each mx represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones m0 tones 0 31 m1 tones 32 63 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on i
89. gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PAE PVC The VCI of the PAE PVC Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile 4094 the VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes using this PVC Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that uses this PVC ER IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands lt acname gt This field is optional Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or that you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator lt srvcname gt This field is optional Specify the name of the service that uses this PVC This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator lt hellotime gt 0 600 specify the timeout in seconds for the PPPoE session Enter O 1f there is no timeout This command creates a PPPoA to PPPoE PVC to allow communication between the ATM CPE and Ethernet network BRAS segments The PVC is mapped to a PPPoE session that connects to the specified BRAS The following example creates a PPPoA to PPPoE PVC 1 33 for port 1 The VLAN ID is 1 and the IEEE 802 1p p
90. hours igmpsnoop info clear Display protocol packets counters L L amp number of learned groups igmpsnoop group Display IGMP learned group L L member information Display received protocol packets L L counters number of joined Displays line performance M L igmpsnoop port info groups igmpsnoop port lt portlist gt Display joined groups in this port M L group dhcp counter lt portlist gt Display DHCP statistics for a port L L clear dhcp snoop lt portlist gt Display snooping L L rmon stats hastory Display uplink subtending link M L enetl enet2 RMON information Displays RSTP information M L vlanlist Displays current VLANs M L mac Displays current MAC address M L forwarding table port portlist vpi This command displays and or M L lt Vai gt Teless erases port statistics dotlx portlist Shows the dot1x status of the M L specified port enet Displays Ethernet port settings M L and statistics ip Displays a Management port s M status and performance data show sys sw adsl ip st Displays the device s M L at all nopause configuration Saves the current configuration H H restore Reloads the factory default H H configuration exit Ends the console or telnet L L session CONT IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 5 Chapter 41 Commands Summary 276 IES 612 51A User s Guide Command Examples This chapter gives some examples of commands 42 1 Command Example
91. id 1 1 2v 2 1 8v 323 3v 4224v voltage threshold voltage limit voltage voltage of the DC power when logged nominal lt nominal gt mV voltage voltage of the DC power when logged value lt voltage gt mV THERMO OVER VOLTAGE INFO The device s voltage is back inside the accepted operating range released nominal nominal voltage of the DC power IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 9 Chapter 42 Command Examples 42 3 2 Log Clear Command Syntax ras sys log clear This command clears the system error log Es If you clear a log using the log clear command you cannot view it again 42 3 3 Info Show Command Syntax ras sys info show This command shows general system settings the BIN firmware version system uptime and bootbase version An example is shown next Figure 134 Info Show Example ras gt sys info show Hostname Location Contact Model ZyNOS version F W size MAC address System up time Bootbase version F W build date DSP code version AAM1212 51 V3 52 ABA 0 2147672 00 13 49 DE 00 AD 0 days 22 293149 V1 03 AAM1212 51 02 18 2005 Jul 7 2006 10 00 31 6 04 0003 07 07 2006 Hardware version Serial number 42 4 Isolation Commands Turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber ports When you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers 42 4 1 Isolation Show
92. if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to look at or remove the multicast IP addresses currently added to it Name This field displays the name of this multicast VLAN State This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable Entry Index This field displays the index number of each multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses configured for this multicast VLAN IES 612 51A User s Guide 169 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN IES 612 51A User s Guide Filtering This chapter describes how to configure the Packet Filter screen 20 1 Packet Filter Screen Use this screen to set which types of packets the IES 612 51A accepts on individual DSL ports To open this screen click Advanced Application Filtering Figure 80 Packet Filter e OZ a Part a PPPoE Only PPPoE V Pass through IP Pass through ARP V Pass through MetBias Iv Pass through DHCP M Passthrough EAPOL M Pass through IGMP Iv Pass through Add Cancel Y Pass through Filter out Don t care Port PPPoE ARP MetBios DHCP EAPOL IGMP PPPoE Only 1 V i 3 4 H The following table describes the labels in this screen Table Ap Packet Fil
93. lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command activates multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port 47 5 3 IGMP Bandwidth Port Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port set lt portlist gt lt bandwidth gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt bandwidth gt 100000 in units of kbps This command sets the bandwidth allowed for multicast traffic on the specified port s It does not automatically enable it however 47 5 4 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port show lt portlist gt 318 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 47 IGMP Commands where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port s and whether or not this setting is active The following example displays the bandwidth budget for port 1 Figure 179 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port show 1 port enable bandwidth 47 6 IGMP Count Limit Commands Use
94. lt stos gt etos Isrcport sport lt eport gt Idstport sport lt eport gt The input values for these values have the following ranges vid 1 4094 priority 1 7 lt etype gt 0 65535 protocol tcp udp ospf igmp ip gre icmp lt ptype gt lt ptype gt 0 255 lt mask gt 0 32 IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 5 Chapter 31 ACL e tos 0 255 e port 0 65535 If you apply multiple profiles to a PVC the IES 612 51A checks the profiles by rule number The lower the rule number the higher the priority the rule and profile has For example there are two ACL profiles assigned to a PVC Profilel is for VLAN ID 100 rule number 9 traffic and Profile2 is for IEEE 802 1p priority O traffic rule number 12 The IES 612 51A checks Profilel first If the traffic is VLAN ID 100 the IES 612 51A follows the action in Profilel and does not check Profile2 You cannot assign profiles that have the same rule numbers to the same PVC 31 1 2 ACL Profile Actions The IES 612 51A can perform the following actions after it classifies upstream traffic rate rate change the rate to the specified value 1 65535 kbps e rvlan rvlan change the VLAN ID to the specified value 1 4094 rpri rpri change the IEEE 802 1p priority to the specified value 0 7 e deny do not forward the packet The IES 612 51A can apply more than one action to a packet unless you select deny If you select the rvla
95. margin 0 31 dB Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Up Shift SNR The upstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the upstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin 126 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 25 Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Down Shift SNR The upstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the upstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions Max Rate Type a maximum downstream transfer rate 64 to 32000 Kbps bps for this port Configure the maximum downstream transfer rate to be greater than the maximum upstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum downstream transfer rate 32 to 32000 Kbps for this port Conf
96. of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join see Section 17 7 on page 159 IGMP Port Info Click IGMP Port Info to open the IGMP Port Info screen where you can look at the current number of IGMP related packets received on each port see Section 17 8 on page 160 IGMP Port Group Click IGMP Port Group to open the IGMP Port Group screen where you can look at the current list of multicast groups each port has joined see Section 17 9 on page 160 Clear Click Clear to delete the information the IES 612 51A has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen This is the total number of Query packets received This is the total number of Report packets received This is the total number of Leave packets received Number of IGMP This is how many IGMP groups the IES 612 51A has identified on the local Groups network Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all of the Next information cannot be seen in one screen Click this button to refresh the screen Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information IES 612 51A User s Guide 155 Chapter 17 IGMP Table 35 IGMP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups This is the IGMP group index number The VID is the VLAN ID on which the IGMP group is created IP IP
97. one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data See RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively 17 2 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different sub network A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the ANA web site for more information 17 2 1 IGMP Snooping A layer 2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the IES 612 51A to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The IES 612 51A forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP
98. pcr Peak Cell Rate 150 to 300000 the maximum rate cells per second at which the sender can send cells Bee Cell Delay Variation Tolerance is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay number of cells 0 to 255 cells or means 0 SvbrE QEE The real time vbr or non real time nrt vbr Variable Bit vbr nrt vbr gt Rate ATM traffic class lt scr gt The Sustained Cell Rate sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted cells per second SCR applies with the vbr traffic class lt bt gt Burst Tolerance this is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards number of cells BT applies with the vbr traffic class This command creates a virtual channel profile After you create a virtual channel profile you can assign it to any of the DSL ports on the IES 612 514A The following example creates a virtual channel profile named gold that uses LLC encapsulation It uses constant bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 300 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells Figure 258 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 1 ras gt adsl vcprofile set gold llc cbr 300000 5 The following example creates a virtual channel profile named silver that uses VC encapsulation
99. policing this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands This command allows the configuration of a PVC permanent virtual circuit for one or a range of DSL ports The following example sets a PVC on DSL port 1 with VPI 1 VCI34 default VID 100 priority 3 It sets the platinum profile for downstream traffic shaping and a VC profile named plus for upstream traffic policing Figure 262 PVC Set Command Example ras adsl pvc set 1 1 34 100 3 platinum plus 53 3 3 PVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl pvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC lt vpiS eet This command deletes the specified PVC channel 53 4 Priority based PVCs A PPVC Priority based PVC allows you to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN The IES 612 51A uses eight priority queues also called levels for the member PVCs The system maps frames with certain IEEE 802 1p priorities to a PVC with a particular priority queue See Chapter 13 on page 107 for the factory default mapping Use these commands to configure PPVCs and add and r
100. rate 108 console port 415 pin assignments 425 settings 50 Constant Bit Rate CBR 128 contact information 433 contact person s name 91 copyright 429 customer support 433 D Daytime RFC 867 92 IES 612 51A User s Guide 439 Index default gateway 103 default privilege level 95 DEFVAL 116 DEFVAL profile settings 423 DEFVAL VC 116 DHCP 172 187 DHCP relay 187 option 82 187 Diagnostic 241 disclaimer 429 Discrete Multi Tone See DMT DMT 141 double upstream mode 113 double tagged frames 211 downstream traffic 107 DSL LED troubleshooting 409 DSL port statistics 79 duplex 105 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E EAPoL 172 encapsulation LLC 116 VC Mux 116 Errored Seconds ES 140 Ethernet address See MAC address Ethernet port default settings 50 statistics 77 Extensible Authentication Protocol See EAPoL F factory defaults 239 413 Far End Block Errors FEBE 140 fast channel 108 fast mode 108 126 FCC interference statement 429 filtering databases 299 firmware upgrade 237 335 file names 335 using FTP 335 when unable to use FTP 415 firmware version 88 front panel 49 FTP 43 240 335 full duplex 105 G GARP 97 GARP timer 100 GARP timer setup 97 General Setup 91 Generic Attribute Registration Protocol See GARP H Home screen 62 75 host name 91 IEEE 802 1D See STP IEEE 802 1Q See VLAN IEEE 802 1w See RSTP IEEE 802 1x 1
101. restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Administrators with high privilege access can use all commands including the lower privilege commands IES 612 51A User s Guide 25 7 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Administrators with middle privilege access can use middle or low privilege commands Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only 41 3 Saving Your Configuration Use the following command to save your configuration when you are done with a configuration session ras config save lt gt Do not turn off your IES 612 51A while saving your configuration This command saves all system configurations to nonvolatile memory You must use this command to save any configuration changes that you make otherwise the IES 612 51A returns to its default settings when it is restarted Save your changes after each configuration session Nonvolatile memory refers to the IES 612 51A s storage that remains even if the IES 612 51A s power is turned off Run time memory is lost when the IES 612 51A s power is turned off 41 4 Commands The following table lists commands that you can use with the IES 612 51A The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command H for high M for middle or L for low and the equivalent in the web configurator H for high or L for low Table 88 Commands
102. s Guide System Management Terminal see SMT system up time 75 T Tag Control Information TCI 145 Tag Protocol Identifier TPID 145 tagged VLAN See VLAN telco 50 connector pin assignments 425 temperature 88 terminal emulation 415 Theoretical Arrival Time TAT 130 Time RFC 868 92 time server protocols supported 92 time zone 92 TLS 211 ToneDiag 243 tones 141 trademarks 429 traffic parameters 128 traffic shaping 128 transmission error correction 108 126 Transparent LAN Service See TLS Trellis encoding 138 troubleshooting 407 U UnAvailable Seconds UAS 140 UNIX syslog 223 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR 128 up time 76 upstream traffic 107 User Account 93 V Variable Bit Rate VBR 128 VC 116 VC Mux 116 VC Profile Screen 131 VC Setup 116 Index vendor information 138 ventilation holes 47 virtual channel 115 downstream profile 117 profile 116 upstream profile 118 Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI Virtual Circuit See VC Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Path Identifier VPI VLAN 145 explicit tagging 299 forwarding 146 implicit tagging 299 priority frame 146 registration information 299 VLAN ID 145 VLAN ID maximum number of 145 when VLAN ID is zero 146 VLAN stacking See TLS voltage 88 W warranty 430 note 431 web configurator 43 X XMODEM upload 414 415 IES 612 51A User s Guide 443 Index 444 IES 612 51A User s Guide
103. sales zyxel com my e Telephone 603 8076 9933 e Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America e Support E mail support zyxel com e Support Telephone 1 800 978 7222 e Sales E mail sales zyxel com e Sales Telephone 1 714 632 0882 e Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www zyxel com IES 612 51A User s Guide 435 Appendix B Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support 9 zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales 2 zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 Inter
104. screen Table 21 VC Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION xDSL Port Setup Click xDSL Port Setup to go to the screen where you can configure DSL port settings see Section 13 7 on page 109 PPVC Setup Click PPVC Setup to open the PPVC Setup screen where you can configure priority PVC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 11 on page 121 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view or configure settings This field is read only once you click on a port number below Super Channel The IES 612 51A forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to have this channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 21 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic
105. shows the number of bytes that have been transmitted on this port This includes collisions but not jam signal or preamble SFD Start of Frame Delimiter bytes Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Tx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames transmitted on this port not including broadcast frames Tx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast frames transmitted on this port not including multicast frames Tx mac pause This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames transmitted on this port Tx fragments This field shows the number of transmitted frames that were less than 64 octets long and with an incorrect FCS value This field shows the number of complete good frames transmitted on this port Tx error underrun This field shows the number of outgoing frames that were less than 64 octets long Tx undersize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS Tx jabber This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an incorrect FCS value Tx oversize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were bigger than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 VLAN and contained a valid FCS packet lt 64 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 64 o
106. signal from the voice band signal and feeds the voice band signal to the CO port The following figure gives an overview on a possible installation scenario for the IES 612 51A Data and voice signals can coexist on the same telephone wiring 52 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure9 Installation Overview POTS Splitter RIEN DSL Modem You can also attach RJ 11 connectors to the Telco 50 cable and connect directly to a DSL modem s or patch panel This chapter discusses connections using MDFs 3 2 7 Typical MDF Scenarios This section describes typical installation scenarios 3 2 7 1 Installation Scenario A You want to install the IES 612 51A in an environment where there are no previously installed MDF s There is no phone service and you want to install the IES 612 51A for data access only No connections from the CO lines are necessary You may connect using an MDF or attach RJ 11 connectors to the non IES 612 51A end of the Telco 50 cable and then connect to DSL modems directly IES 612 51A User s Guide 53 Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure 10 Installation Scenario A FN ES Ge j ud 6 P d K GZ N USER AY B v MDF Ll DSL Modem 3 2 7 1 1 Procedure To Connect To An MDF 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the upper ports of the MDF using a punch down tool
107. these commands to limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription IGMP count is useful for ensuring the service quality of high bandwidth services like video or Internet Protocol television IPTV IGMP count can limit how many channels IGMP groups the subscriber connected to a DSL port can use at a time If each channel requires 4 5 Mbps of download bandwidth and the subscriber s connection supports 11 Mbps you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the DSL connection 47 6 1 IGMP Count Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns off the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command turns off the IGMP count limit for port 4 Figure 180 IGMP Count Disable Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop igmpcount disable 4 IES 612 51A User s Guide 319 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 47 6 2 IGMP Count Enable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount enable lt portlist gt where
108. to all ports except the incoming ane Le outgoing port different from incoming port Filter this frame Forvard to outgoing port 1 The device examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The device checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table e f the device has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the device has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion IES 612 51A User s Guide 245 Chapter 38 MAC Table e If the device has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame 38 2 MAC Table Screen To open this screen click Management MAC Table Figure 127 MAC Table OMS Ca Show port Di Refresh time 00 05 19 1970 01 01 Index Port MAC 1 Enet 1 00 50 8d 48 58 Lt Refresh Flush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Show port Select a port for which to display learned MAC addresses or display all of them Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Next Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen i
109. to daisychain mode Daisychain switch mode with port isolation enabled blocks communications between subscriber ports on an individual IES 612 51A and between the subscribers of any daisychained IES 612 51A see Figure 42 on page 99 for an example Use the same port isolation setting on all IES 612 51A that you set up in a daisychain 10 2 4 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example In the example below the IES 612 51A 1 has its Ethernet port one ENET 1 connected to the Ethernet backbone switch 3 and it s Ethernet port two ENET2 connected to Ethernet port one ENET 1 of the daisychained IES 612 51A 2 EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 10 Switch Setup With port isolation turned on communications between A and B must first go through another switch or router 3 in the figure A and B also cannot communicate with C without their communications going through another switch or router Figure 42 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example Internet 10 3 Switch Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting Switch Setup IES 612 51A User s Guide EI Chapter 10 Switch Setup Figure 43 Switch Setup HIE MAC Address Learning Aging Time soo 10 10000 seconds O Disabled GARP Timer Join Timer zo 100 55535 milliseconds Leave Timer eng Leave Timer must gt 2 Join Timer Leave All Timer 10000 Leave All Timer must gt Leave Timer Port Isolation Active Iv MAC Anti Bpaafing
110. trusted host Use this command to add the host IP address to the list of trusted hosts If you enter a trusted host your IES 612 51A will only respond to SNMP messages from this address If you leave the trusted host set to 0 0 0 0 default the IES 612 51A will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source 51 1 4 Trap Community Command Syntax ras gt sys snmp trapcommunity lt community gt where lt community gt The password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 5 Trap Destination Set Command Syntax ras gt sys snmp trapdst set lt index gt lt ip gt lt port gt where lt index gt The number of the trap server 1 4 lt ip gt The IP address of the trap server lt port gt The port number upon which the trap server listens for SNMP traps The IES 612 51A uses the default of 162 if you do not specify a trap port Use this command specify the IP address and port number of a trap server to which the IES 612 51A sends SNMP traps If you leave the trap destination set to 0 0 0 0 default the IES 612 51A will not send any SNMP traps 51 1 6 Show SNMP Settings Command Syntax ras gt sys snmp show This command displays the current SNMP get community set community trap community trusted hosts and trap destination settings 342 IES 612 51A Users Guide ADSL Commands This chapter describes some of the c
111. un select all entries in the table 29 3 DSCP Map Screen Use this screen to convert DSCP priority to IEEE 802 1p priority To open this screen click Advanced Application DSCP DSCP Map Figure 105 DSCP Map WDE Map DSCP Setu Source DSCP 802 1P Priority o oz O on on LU 0 7 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 DSCP Map LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Map Click DSCP Setup to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate DSCP on each port see Section 29 2 on page 209 Source DSCP This field displays each DSCP value 802 1P Priority Enter the IEEE 802 1p priority to which you would like to map this DSCP value Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 210 IES 612 51A User s Guide TLS PVC This chapter shows you how to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q on each port 30 1 Transparent LAN Service TLS Overview Transparent LAN Service also known as VLAN stacking or Q in Q allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use TLS to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By taggin
112. y n gt restoring configuration Saving configuration to flash IES 612 51A User s Guide D Chapter 55 Troubleshooting The IES 612 514A is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default user name of admin and the default password of 1234 55 15 2 Uploading the Default Configuration File If you forget your password or cannot access the IES 612 51A you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 BS Uploading the factory default configuration file erases the IES 612 51A s entire configuration Obtain the default configuration file unzip it and save it in a folder Use a console cable to connect a computer with terminal emulation software to the IES 612 51A s console port Turn the IES 612 51A off and then on to begin a session When you turn on the IES 612 51A again you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode To upload the configuration file do the following
113. 0 or 1048576 and so on e g 1s a Shorthand for for instance and e means that is or in other words IES 612 51A User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The IES 612 51A icon is not an exact representation of your IES 612 51A IES 612 51A Notebook computer Houter K IES 612 51A User s Guide 5 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings lt gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT pla
114. 00 00 atur information vendor id b5004244434d00000000000000000000 version number 41327042303139610000000000000000 serial number 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The service type in operation is the ADSL standard that the port is using G dmt Gdmt Annex B Glite ANSI T1 413 issue 2 ADSL2 or ADSL2 Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in DSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable The numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream and upstream transmissions are listed The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s DSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the higher the power will be DS refers to the power output of the IES 612 51A US refers to the power output of the subscriber s DSL modem or router Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information 3 Atthe time of writing the IES 612 51A always uses Trellis coding IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The atuc information fields show data acquired from the ATUC ADSL Termination Unit Central in this case IES 612 51A during negotiation provisioning message interchanges The atur information fields show data acquired from the ATUR ADSL Termination Unit Remote i
115. 00 Designated port Ox an Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Spanning Tree Protocol Status ENET 1 Disabled ENET 2 Poll Intervalre LABEL STP Config Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Status Our bridge ID Designated root ID Topology change times Time since change Cost to root IES 612 51A User s Guide DESCRIPTION Click STP Config to modify the IES 612 51A s STP settings see Section 22 3 on page 178 This field displays On if STP is activated Otherwise it displays Off If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Designated root ID if the IES 612 51A is the root switch E J E E E E D H E 3 This is the unique identifier for the root bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Our bridge ID if the IES 612 51A is the root switch This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 50 Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Root port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch
116. 1A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 136 IES 612 51A User s Guide xDSL Line Data 15 1 xDSL Line Rate Info Screen This screen displays an ADSL port s line operating values Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Figure 61 xDSL Line Rate Info EUESSLDIEEO u EN Line Performance Line Data Part 7 Refresh Fart Name Down up Stream Rate Ebps i 90877511 Down up Stream Noise Marginfdbj 31 0 25 1 Down up Stream Attenuation db 24 0 2 5 Down up Stream Attainable RatelEbpsi 2009247 l252 service Mode adsle Trellis Encoding On Down Stream Interleave Delay 3 ms Up Stream Interleave Delay 3 mz Down Stream Output power 2 5 dbn Up Stream Output power 11 5 dbm Fate Atur vendor id gt bS0042 4445 40d00000000000000000000 Atur version number 4152704230515 96L0000000000000000 Atur serial number OOOODOOU0000000000000000000000000 pgaaoagaaaagagaaoaggaaoagaaaaaggaaoagaaggaa vendor id s03042353030355300 0000000000006000 version number 665z2333330303 030 00 0080000800000000 serial number 3 035z303035134350335653893030350360 000 pgaaoagaaaaaagaaaggaaagaaaaagagaoag
117. 2 Config Request 51A from the CPE client device PPP LCP Echo This field displays the number of echo request PDUs received by the IES 612 Request 51A from the CPE client device PPP LCP Echo This field displays the number of echo reply PDUs received by the IES 612 51A Reply from the CPE client device PPPoE PADI This field displays the number of padi PDUs sent by the IES 612 51A to the B i This field displays the number of pado PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IES 612 51A This field displays the number of padr PDUs sent by the IES 612 51A to the B This field displays the number of pads PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IES 612 51A This field displays the number of padt PDUs sent and received by the IES 612 51A PPPoE PADO PPPoE PADR PPPoE PADS PPPoE PADT T T o o PPPoE Service Name Error This field displays the number of service name errors for example the IES 612 51A s specified service is different than the BRAS s setting PPPoE AC System Error This field displays the number of times the access concentrator experienced an error while performing the Host request for example when resources are exhausted in the access concentrator This value does not include the number of times the IES 612 51A checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU and finds a mismatch however PPPoE Generic This field displays the number of other types of errors that occur in the PPPoE Error session between the
118. 2 Remote ID Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay Option 82 agent information feature sub option 2 This feature applies regardless of whether or not the DHCP relay is on 44 3 1 Option 82 Sub option 2 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 enable This command turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 2 feature 44 3 2 Option 82 Sub option 2 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 disable This command turns off the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 2 feature 44 3 3 Option 82 Sub option 2 Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 set lt relay info gt 294 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 44 DHCP Commands where lt relay info gt Upto 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the IES 612 51A to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the name of the IES 612 51A or the ISP This command adds the specified information for the relay agent 44 4 DHCP Snoop Commands Use these commands to configure or show DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports The system gets the client MAC IP address information in the reply from a DHCP server and stores it in the DHCP snooping table The system only forwards packets from the clients whose MAC IP address is in the DHCP snooping table Packets from unknown IP address es are not forwar
119. 2 2 port s Syntax ras gt adsl annexm disable lt portlist gt The following example turns off the Annex M feature for port 5 Figure 238 Annex M Disable Command Example ras gt adsl annexm disable 5 52 1 22 Annex Enable Command This command turns on the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s With Annex I the DSL connection uses the full spectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service Syntax ras gt adsl annexi enable lt portlist gt The following example turns on the Annex I feature for port 5 356 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Figure 239 Annex Enable Command Example We adsl annexi enable 5 52 1 23 Annex I Disable Command This command turns off the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s Syntax ras adsl annexi disable lt portlist gt The following example turns off the Annex I feature for port 5 Figure 240 Annex Disable Command Example ras gt adsl annexi disable 5 52 2 DSL Port Statistics Commands Use these commands to display DSL port statistics 52 2 1 DSL Port Show Command Syntax ras gt statistics adsl show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays DSL port connection statistics including the status
120. 3 2 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table 2 LEDs LED coLoR STATUS DESCRIPTION ALM Red On The IES 612 51A is functioning abnormally Ion The IES 612 51A is functioning normally IES 612 51A User s Guide DI Chapter 3 Front Panel Table 2 LEDs continued LED DESCRIPTION SYS Green The IES 612 51A s system is running mm The IES 612 51A is booting ETHERNET Green On The IES 612 51A has a successful 10 Mbps connection 172 on this port Blinking The IES 612 51A is sending receiving data on this port Orange On The IES 612 51A has a successful 100 Mbps connection on this port Blinking The IES 612 51A is sending receiving data on this port ADSL 1 12 The IES 612 51A has a successful DSL connection Blinking The IES 612 51A is looking for a DSL connection am Off The IES 612 51A does not have a DSL connection 3 2 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters e VTIOO terminal emulation e 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit e No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the IES 612 51A Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM or other COM port of your computer 3 2 1 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the IES 612 514 are e Speed Auto e Duplex
121. 3 Connect the telephone wiring from each end user s DSL modem to the lower ports of the MDF 3 2 7 2 Installation Scenario B Phone service is available There is one MDF from which end users CO connections are made see next figure EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure 11 One MDF for End user and CO Connections This installation scenario requires three MDFs Please refer to the following figure for the connection schema e MDF 1 is the original MDF used for telephone connections only e MDF2 is used for telephone connections only e MDF3 is for ADSL service connections BS Change the wiring in the following figure from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want ADSL service IES 612 51A User s Guide 55 Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure 12 Installation Scenario B Telephone 3 LE jJ cables MDF 2 POTS splitter User with telephone and DSL service User with telephone service only 3 2 7 2 1 Procedure To Connect To MDFs 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the upper ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool 3 Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s DSL modem s to the lower ports of MDF 3 4 Connect the CO wiring of the Telco 50 cable to the lower ports of MDF 2 using a punch down tool 5 Connect the upper ports of MDF 2 to t
122. 3 IGMP Snoop Disable Commande 314 EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents a RRIF ERAN EEN 314 47 a1 GMP Filter Show Command E 314 47 3 2 IGMP Filter Set Command EE 314 aroa OMF Filer Frase Set E ug un Le EE 315 47 3 4 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Commande 315 47 3 5 IGMP Filter Profile Show Command assssessoisessessnsnnsrrerrsrnnrnnrnnrrnrrenrnnrrerrerrenrrnrrerens 316 47 4 IGMP Bandwidth Commands E 316 47 4 1 IGMP Bandwidth Default Commande 316 Sr S IGMP Bandwidih Set Command EE 317 47 4 3 IGMP Bandwidth Delete Commande oir 47 5 IGMP Bandwidth Port Commands E 317 47 5 1 IGMP Bandwidth Port Disable Commande 318 47 5 2 IGMP Bandwidth Port Enable Commande 318 47 5 3 IGMP Bandwidth Port Set Command eese eere nnne riens 318 47 5 4 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Commande 318 4 5 ISP Coum KEE seed ASA 319 47 6 1 IGMP Count Disable Command EE 319 476 2 IGMP COUN Enable Command cadets ccnmaditiktes kx hil Ded MS ques DE e GIN Pad C SO harina 320 47 6 3 IGMP Count Set Command EE 320 47 64 IGMP Count Show Command EE 320 47 7 IGMP Snoop Statistics Commands eeeessssssessesssessene nennen nnne nnns 321 47 7 1 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Commande 321 47 7 2 IGMP Group Statistics Command E 321 47 1 3 IGMP Part Info Statistics Command BEE 322 FP TE Tt Fon Group Statistics E ul mL 322 47 8 Multicast VLAN Commands uissssecrdddutbnpbkbk vid dd P Deb YOR DI dp n DELI REDE be E ROO DO DERE 323 47 8 1 Multi
123. 4 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 226 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 34 3 1 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance See Appendix on page 417 for the list of MIBs the IES 612 51A supports 34 3 2 SNMP Traps The IES 612 51A can send the following SNMP traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs ATUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the IES 612 514 to the subscriber ATUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to the IES 612 51A Table 75 SNMPv2 Traps TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION coldStart This trap is sent when the IES 612 51A is turned on warmsStart This trap is sent when the IES 612 51A restarts linkDown This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down Enterprise specific adsl atuc los traps are sent when an ADSL link is down linkUp This trap is sent when the Ethernet or ADSL link comes up authenticationFailure This trap is sent when the SNM
124. 4094 This command sets the management VLAN CPU You can only use ports that are members of this management VLAN in order to manage the IES 612 51A The following example sets VLAN ID 2 to be the CPU management VLAN Figure 156 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras switch vlan cpu set 2 IES 612 51A User s Guide am Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 45 4 8 Configuring Management VLAN Example LES After the following example configuration you must connect to the first Ethernet port through a VLAN aware device that is using the proper VLAN ID in order to perform management By default the IES 612 51A s DSL ports are members of the management VLAN VID 1 The following procedure shows you how to configure a tagged VLAN that limits management access to just one Ethernet port BS Use the console port to configure the IES 612 51A if you misconfigure the management VLAN and lock yourself out 1 Use the switch vlan set command to configure a VLAN ID VID 3 in this example for managing the IES 612 51A the management or CPU VLAN Figure 157 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ras switch vlan set 3 enet1 FT 2 Usethe switch vlaniq vlan cpu command to set VID 3 as the management VLAN Figure 158 Deleting Default VLAN Example ras switch vlan cpu Set 3 45 4 9 VLAN Delete Command Syntax ras switch vlan delete lt vlanlist gt where vlanlist You can specify a single VID
125. 42 option 82 187 P packet filter 171 password 65 Peak Cell Rate PCR 129 Permanent Virtual Circuit See PVC Philips Screwdriver 2 46 ping 242 PMM 243 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE Port Security 185 Port Setup 105 Port VLAN ID See PVID PPPoE 172 PPVC 379 PPVC Setup 121 PPVC Setup Members 122 priority queue assignment 101 product registration 431 PVC 115 377 PVID 118 default 146 Q Q in Q See TLS Quality of Service QOS 127 R Rack 46 Rack mounted Installation Requirements 46 RADIUS 181 shared secret 182 RADIUS Setup 182 IES 612 51A User s Guide e Index Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP reach extended ADSL2 113 real time Variable Bit Rate rt VBR 128 reboot 240 Reed Solomon 108 126 registration product 431 related documentation 3 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service See RADIUS Remote Management screen 230 restart 240 restore configuration 238 RFC 1305 See NTP RFC 2131 See DHCP RFC 2132 See DHCP RFC 2138 See RADIUS RFC 2139 See RADIUS RFC 2486 See EAPOL RFC 3046 See Option 82 RFC 867 See Daytime RFC 868 See Time RSTP 175 port states 176 See also STP S safety warnings 6 save configuration 66 Screwdriver 46 Secured Client Setup screen 230 SELT 242 Service Access Control 229 Service Provider s Network SPN 211 Severely Errored Seconds SES 140 shared secret 95 Simple Network Management Pr
126. 45 2 2 Installation Scenarios uiis iesesivcexbare vel Tasa Ye OUR bkn ca REDE nni a roo raa FE DR Tor EEN Eed 45 2 2 1 Desdo5Iinsalaln ENER tege Ee 45 2 2 2 PACK Mounted Installation EENS 46 Chapter 3 ig e E NTTN mee 49 H E OSEE TOME LuusunstmiMedistzunediatiedic mM M Me M II IAM EMI IL MR EMILE EM IM PERS 49 CNN Fom Panel Forns Ret 49 TE LEDE ET 49 Dr OWOG 9 GE 50 9 2 2 LAN Port Ethernet GOGO quissmeicexsssebsrebermesp sUmmmrepti EES ee i enl predi 51 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents 3 2 3 Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames cccccceseecceeeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseanees 51 CUL as voci aeons RON 51 das IND ENEE eebe 52 COUEIS IRL UN reip cero PRU I MIRI 52 3 2 7 Typical MDF Scenarios sseeesssssseseseseeeee nennen nennen nnn nnne nnn nnns nnn rna nnns 53 PREET d E 59 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 11 eee Lleeee ee Leeeeenriieeee nennen nenne nhan nana annus 61 4 1 Web Configurator OIC EEN 61 4 2 Screen Privilege Levels Abee See eiui ido Molan pid 61 4 3 Accessing the Web Configurator ssssesessssssssessseeeeeeene nennen nennen nnn nnne nnn nnn nnns 61 e IU TEE 63 Q2 LONE TON PASSON ER 65 EEN EE SEENEN REOR mE 66 4 7 Logging Qut of the Web Configurator EE 66 Chapter 5 Mia TOPPED EEN 69 5 1 Initial Configuration Overview
127. 45 4 4 VLAN Set Command Syntax ras switch vlan set vid lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X N gt lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X gt name where vid The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt you can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt SESTIUE The lt F gt stands for a fixed registrar administration control flag and registers a port gt to the static VLAN table with vid For a fixed port you also have to specify TIU the tag control flag T has the device add an IEEE 802 1Q tag to frames going out through this port s lt U gt has the device send frames out through this port s without an IEEE 802 1Q tag X N gt This is the registrar administration control flag lt X gt stands for forbidden and blocks a lt port gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vid gt lt N gt stands for normal and confirms registration of the port gt to the static VLAN table with vid This 1s used in GVRP applications name A name to identify the SVLAN entry This command adds or modifies an entry in the static VLAN table Use the switch vlan show command to display your configuration An example of a configuration is shown next IES 612 51A User s Guide 301 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 45 4 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example
128. 47 FOUS S RACK lei qos E 47 FOU E FON EE IBDUE teen 49 rae rs BEI SIDE EE TEE o1 Figure 8 Telco 50 Cable with RJ 11 Connectors i c onset teste o anite ima asit En ote e qiu tu c Sen RE RC netu pE RE E Ics 52 EE s A REI Tm 53 FONS mis I qe Eit qo P2 NRI ES 54 Figure 11 One MDF for End user and CO Connections eeeeesssssseesesseeeeeee nennen nnn 55 Filure 12 EE ET 56 Figure 13 Two Separate MDFs for End user and CO Connections seeeeeeeeeeeenee 57 mirada clou C 58 g CARE EEA E ER 62 FRUTA E eebe 62 uoo E E ENG eer 65 EI EE EE ERN T rte cee eee ey ewer ere ree 66 zo 3 35e keener tree rene nee er er eter ter tem eee ncren ener Reet P P 67 EE EE eege CERTE 69 Figure 21 XDSL Forn DEBT EG 70 P r EE 71 a e co D anea aE EET E 71 eye ie wid gees OTF E 71 mih f e A 72 SIE Deo ce H Om 72 EE EE EE eege 73 FOUG E EE 73 Figure 29 Config Sav usideneiieixiknbbpa lem bett bkn d Ae ERE PELEEEURERKE NRI ED AE GERA hg ATL ME KR EGLI Ea kd dieta lodi dep kd ends 73 Figure 30 ON Save Save UCI E 74 PER EE ee 75 zc Fon as Dt ci E m t i Tt ees 7 ee hie ee ee ale digas icles cg eebe 80 FOUG EEN Age 82 Finure 25 Port Diese RRON tee A E 84 Figure 36 Port Statistics RMON History Detail isoeasoi cies sep Ee peak
129. 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table8 Port Statistics RMON continued LABEL DESCRIPTION EtherStatsOversizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too big received transmitted on this port EtherStatsFragments This is the number of frames received transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths EtherStatsJabbers This is the number of frames received transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors EtherStatsCollisions This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset EtherStats64Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 64 octets or less in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats65to127Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 65 to 127 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats128to255Octets This is the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 128 to 255 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats256to511Octets This is the number of f
130. 6 and make sure you follow them Perform the installation as follows 1 Make sure the IES 612 51A power is not connected 2 Install the hardware See Section 2 1 on page 45 3 See Section 3 1 on page 49 for instructions on making front panel connections 4 See Section 3 2 5 on page 52 for instructions on connecting the Telco 50 connectors 2 2 Installation Scenarios The IES 612 51A can be placed on a desktop or rack mounted on a standard EIA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the IES 612 51A This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 1 Desktop Installation Procedure Do the following to install the IES 612 51A on top of a desk or table The figures in this section are examples and are not intended as an exact representation of the IES 612 51A 1 2 3 Make sure the IES 612 514A is clean and dry Set the IES 612 51A on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the IES 612 51A and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby Make sure there is enough clearance around the IES 612 51A to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the IES 612 51A Thes
131. 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames received on this port Rx fragments This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths This field shows how many times an Ethernet transmitter overrun occurred Rx error mru This field shows the number of received frames that were dropped due to exceeding the Maximum Receive Unit frame size Rx dropped This field shows the number of received frames that were received into the IES 612 514 but later dropped because of a lack of system resources Rx jabber This field shows the number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors Rx error alignment This field shows the number of frames received that were 64 to 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN octets long but contained an invalid FCS and a non integral number of octets Rx oversize This field shows the number of frames received that were bigger than 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN octets and contained a valid FCS Rx undersize This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS This field shows the number of frames dropped based on packet filtering Tx bytes This field
132. 600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 3 Turn off the IES 612 51A and turn it back on to restart it and begin a session 4 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press a key to enter debug mode 5 Type atba5 after the Enter Debug Mode message this changes the console port speed to 115200 bps 6 Change the configuration of your terminal emulation software to use 115200 bps and reconnect to the IES 612 51A 7 Type atur after the Enter Debug Mode message 8 Waitforthe Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 9 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 297 Example Xmodem Upload Send File E Folder C sPraduct Filename Ic Product Firmware biri S Protocol fi K modern b Send Close Cancel Type the firmware file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 10 After a successful firmware upload type atgo to restart the IES 612 51A The console port speed automatically changes back to 9600 bps when the IES 612 51A restarts IES 612 51A User s Guide D Chapter 55 Troubleshooting oe IES 612 51A User s Guide Product Specifications This chapter provides the specifications for the IES 612 51A 56 1 Device Specifications The following tables sum
133. 7 4 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc gateway delete gateway ip where gateway ip The IP address of the gateway to which you no longer want the device to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation This command removes a gateway IP address that the device was set to use for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example has the device remove a 2684 routed mode traffic gateway entry for IP address 192 168 10 102 Figure 273 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway delete 192 168 10 102 53 7 5 RPVC Set Command Syntax ras gt adsl rpvo set portlist lt ypi gt lt vei1 gt DS voprofile US veprotile lt ip gt lt netmask gt gateway ip where Sportllst The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vel The VCI of the RPVC DS vcprofile Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping 386 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel WEITEN upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile ip The subscriber s CPE WAN IP address in
134. 7 8 3 1 9 Ei EX Ei Erg ELE EU E i0 12 0 0O 7 ENET select A None ENET Apply Cancel IES 612 51A User s Guide 119 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 21 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to copy settings from one PVC to another port or ports Copy 1 Click the Select radio button of the PVC from which you want to Paste copy settings Click Paste The following screen appears Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes Click Apply to copy the settings Figure 52 Select Ports 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 1 9 Ge EA EX HI D DEE is i2 2 O O ENET select A None ENET Apply Cancel 13 10 Priority based PVCs A PPVC Priority based PVC allows you to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN The IES 612 51A uses eight priority queues also called levels for the member PVCs The system maps frames with certain IEEE 802 1p priorities to a PVC with a particular priority queue The following table gives the factory default mapping Table 22 IEEE 802 1p Priority to PPVC Mapping DIENEN LN 120 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 13 11 PPVC Setup Screen Use this screen to view and configure PPVCs To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Figure 53 PPVC Setup xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Encap iic 0 VCI
135. 81 183 IEEE 802 1x See also RADIUS IGMP 172 leave packets 155 modes 158 query packets 155 report packets 155 IGMP Filter Profile Screen 135 IGMP snooping 153 initial configuration 69 Installation Rack Mounted 47 Installation Requirements 46 interleave delay 108 126 interleave mode 126 Internet Explorer 61 69 Internet Group Multicast Protocol See IGMP Internet Protocol See IP IP 172 ip commands 331 IP Setup 103 440 IES 612 51A User s Guide L LAN LED troubleshooting 408 latency mode 126 LDM test 242 Line Data 140 line operating values 137 Line Performance 138 line type 140 LLC 116 location 91 log format 277 286 log messages 278 logging out 66 Login screen 62 loopback test 242 MAC address 88 MAC address learning 100 MAC filter 173 Management Information Base MIB 226 managing the device good habits 43 using FTP See FTP using SMT See SMT using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator Maximum Burst Size MBS 129 Media Access Control See MAC address metric 236 model 92 Mounting Brackets 47 multicast MAC address 164 Multicast VLAN See MVLAN MVLAN 165 N Near End Block Errors NEBE 140 NetBIOS 172 Network Basic Input Output System See NetBIOS Index non real time Variable Bit Rate nrt VBR 128 NTP RFC 1305 92 O OAM F5 Loopback 2
136. AC Commands Overview Use the MAC commands to configure MAC filtering or limit the MAC count 46 2 MAC Filter Commands Use the MAC filter to control from which MAC Media Access Control addresses frames can or cannot come in through a port 46 2 1 MAC Filter Show Command Syntax ras switch mac filter show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt I gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the MAC filtering status V for enabled for disabled and the fixed source MAC addresses on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the MAC filtering mode status and the fixed source MAC addresses on DSL port 5 Figure 161 MAC Filter Show Command Example sw mac filter show 5 status V enable mac filter function status disable mac filter function mode status mac accept 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 IES 612 51A User s Guide 307 Chapter 46 MAC Commands 46 2 2 MAC Filter Enable Command Syntax ras switch mac filter enable portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns on the MAC filtering feature on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified T
137. AN H H group delete translation entry igmpsnoop mvlan vlanitste Show a multicast to VLAN M L group show translation entry igmpfilter set lt portlist gt lt name gt Sets an ADSL port s to use an H H IGMP filter profile igmpfilter show portlist Displays which IGMP filter profile M L an ADSL port s is using lgmpribter profile lt name gt lt index gt Configures an IGMP filter profile H H set lt startip gt lt endip gt igmpfilter profile lt name gt Removes an IGMP filter profile H H delete igmpfilter profile name Displays an IGMP filter profile s M L show settings queuemap show Displays the system s priority level M L to ENET queue mapping queuemap set priority queue Maps a priority level to a ENET H H queue garptimer show Display the system s garp M L settings 268 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued posme o rstp fwdelay fwdelay sec Set system rstp s forward delay time rstp port enable Set enet port to enable rstp stp port disable Set enet port to disable rstp reto port prororlby lspostbrsete Set enet port s rstp priority SpEUTOITUy rstp port pathcost lt portlist gt Set enet port s rstp pathcost lt pathcost gt dhcprelay server vid primary Set DHCP server IP address M H set server where the DHCP request will lt secondary forward to server vid VLAN primary server
138. ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens This command records the telephone number of a DSL subscriber telephone number The following example records the telephone number 12345678 for DSL port 5 Figure 221 DSL Port Tel Command Example ras gt adsl tel 5 12345678 52 1 10 DSL Port Loopback Command Syntax ras adsl loopback lt portlist gt 5 gt vpri vci where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt GAS Use f5 to perform an OAMFS loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operational Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test vplo voi When you perform an OAMFS loopback test specify a VPI VCI This command has the IES 612 51A perform an OAMFS loopback test on the specified DSL port s The following example has the IES 612 51A perform an OAMFS loopback test on DSL port 1 s PVC at VPI 0 and VCI 33 Figure 222 DSL Port Loopback Command Example ras gt adsl loopback 1 f5 0 33 port 1 OAM F5 loopback test failed 52 1 11 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Syntax ras adsl usnompsd lt portNo
139. Active E Switch Mode Standalone Priority 7 Queue 3 Priority amp Queue 3 Priority 5 Queue 2 Priority 4 Queue 2 Priority 3 Queue 1 Priority 2 Queue US Priority 1 Queue US Priority D Queue 1 Priority 7 Queue 7 Y Priority amp Queue 56 Priority 5 Queue 5 S Priority 4 Queue 4 Priority 3 Queue 3 Priority 2 Queue 2 Priority 1 Queue 1 Priority D Queue US Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter a time from 10 to 10 000 seconds This is how long all dynamically Learning learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned Enter O to disable the aging out of MAC addresses Enet Priority Queue Assignment ADSL Priority Queue Assignment E Aging Time GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values Click here for more information on VLANSs Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds Leave Timer Leave Timer sets the duration of the Leave Per
140. BroadcastPkts MulticastPkts CRCAlignErrors UndersizePkts OversizePkts Fragments DESCRIPTION Click this to return to the previous screen Click this to update this screen This field displays the index of the sample interval This field displays the sample number This field displays the data sampling time This field displays the total number of packets that were dropped in the sampling period This field displays the total number of octets received transmitted in the sampling period This field displays the total number of good packets received transmitted in the sampling period This field displays the total number of broadcast packets received transmitted in the sampling period This field displays the total number of multicast packets received transmitted in the sampling period This field displays the total number of CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check alignment errors in the sampling period This field displays the total number of packets that were too small received transmitted in the sampling period This field displays the total number of packets that were too big received transmitted in the sampling period This is the number of frames received transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths IES 612 51A User s Guide os Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail continued
141. Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 MVLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Status Click MVLAN Status to open the MVLAN Status screen where you can view a summary of all multicast VLAN on the IES 612 51A see Section 19 2 on page 165 MVLAN Setup Click MVLAN Setup to open the MVLAN Setup screen where you can configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 3 on page 166 168 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN Table 45 MVLAN Group continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to configure a range of multicast IP addresses Select the index number of the multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses you want to configure for this multicast VLAN If you want to change the current settings select an index number that already exists If you want to Index add a new multicast VLAN group select an index number that does not exist Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP Enter the end of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes
142. Chapter 41 SEENEN 257 41 1 Command Line Interface Overview c ccccccceccccececcccececcececscuccececsccecececaueucecsuausenecausacs 257 EE 257 EE EE tege 258 5M deals EE 258 Chapter 42 Bleu pez chri e Le 277 42 1 Command Examples CUDIVIBW eegne eege 277 REENEN geeiert 277 ESI Ea OM LB EE 277 SEO EE eege 277 E Re Co ti NIRE NEN 2 8 ele WO ot Rn D osmipaiesabuitekAzkiutarHbXG nU F RB RIMNUEIRIAMEESKUU GREIFT HEN 280 42 3 3 Info Show Commande 280 42 4 Isolation CommandS RTRRRRRTUDTRRKRE R AAAMW TS 280 42 4 1 Isolation Show Command cicidawavascdeavdseiccarinucdbcabhisaunidiecnadvsdcadindidbonddivdaebbadenawedicwoine 280 42 4 2 Isolation Enable Command 14 5 tra trat erra e raaFE ARA RAIER ENER AER EEN EN 281 22 4 3 Isolation Disable Command ME 281 42 5 Statistics Monitor Commande 281 18 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents EE enn EE 281 Chapter 43 BED LOIR oca o VE UDIN ERO E CHE MENTRE I UM LP IN EIER ARP MI I OM EREPE DUI UE OH MEINE 283 43 1 Alarm Commands MET CT MUTET 283 43 2 General Alarm Command Parameters cccscsecccccesecececeeeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeesaeseeeeseaaeeeseaaaes 283 SEORSIM eh 283 43 4 Alarm Port Show Command ME 284 Aa Fron Ser N TUTTI TNNT 285 AO Alam Tapeli nu 1 seisin T UT 285 GC EEE E rean EAA AAO EAT E A 286 43 8 Alami History Show CONG geingen a ai 287 43 9 Alarm History Clear Commande 287 LN IBN ciu iceideunp te Em 288 e NET ten hen
143. Command Syntax ras gt switch isolation show This command displays the current setting of the subscriber isolation feature 280 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 42 Command Examples An example is shown next Figure 135 Isolation Show Example ras switch isolation show System isolation enabled 42 4 2 Isolation Enable Command Syntax ras switch isolation enable This command turns on the subscriber 1solation feature 42 4 3 Isolation Disable Command Syntax ras switch isolation disable This command turns off the subscriber 1solation feature 42 5 Statistics Monitor Command Syntax ras statistics monitor This command shows the current hardware status voltage and temperature An example is shown next Figure 136 Statistics Monitor Command Example ras statistics monitor Hardware monitor status enabled nominal limit hi limit lo current status Normal 1 800 1 944 1 656 820 Normal 3 300 3 564 3 036 R 200 Normal 18 000 19 440 16 560 175 Normal limit hi limit lo current avg status 000 Normal 000 Normal 000 Normal 42 6 Statistics Port Command Syntax Pads statisties porc pDorLtirst Svp vor Jlebcear IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 42 Command Examples where portlisto vplo vol clear You can specify a single port 1 all ports or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5
144. Customer Support 433 Index 439 427 Legal Information Copyright Copyright O 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer Zy XEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication 1s subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interf
145. DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the MAC count settings on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the MAC count settings for DSL port 4 Figure 167 MAC Count Show Command Example ras switch mac count show 4 port status count 46 3 2 MAC Count Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch mac count enable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command enables the MAC count filter on the specified DSL port s When the MAC filter accept mode is enabled see Section 46 2 on page 307 the IES 612 51A ignores the MAC count setting and accepts all of the MAC addresses listed for the port in the MAC filter settings The following example turns on the MAC count filter on DSL port 4 Figure 168 MAC Count Enable Command Example 310 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Commands 46 3 3 MAC Count Disable Command Syntax ras switch mac count disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command disables the MAC filtering feature on the specif
146. Displays the hardware monitor s L Statistics monitor disable lL Turns the hardware monitor off monitor vlimit lt idx gt lt high gt lt low gt Sets the maximum lt high gt or minimum lt low gt voltage at the specified voltage sensor You can specify a voltage with up to three digits after a decimal point 0 941 for example Normal voltage at each sensor Idx 121 2v 221 8v 323 3v 4 24v IIOSVILC IL H H H H H H Monitor tiimit lt idx gt lt high gt lt low gt Sets the maximum lt high gt or minimum lt low gt temperature at the specified temperature sensor You can specify a temperature with up to three digits after a decimal point 50 025 for example Temperature sensor locations Idx 1 DSL 2 CPU 3HW monitor user enable lt name gt Turns on the specified user name H H of multi login user disable name Turns off the specified user name H H of multi login user set username Creates or edits the password and H H password privilege level of the specified high middle low user name user delete name Removes the specified user name H H of multi login IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P user show Displays the authentication mode M L RADIUS server settings and user info user server ip porto Set remote authentication server cs
147. ES 612 51A User s Guide 389 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands The following example displays the domains for 2684 routed mode traffic for devices connected to DSL ports 1 and 2 Figure 278 RPVC Route Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc route show 1 2 port vpi vci ip netmask 235 105 101020724 35 10 T0 51120724 53 7 10 RPVC Route Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc route delete port number lt vpi gt vci lt ip gt lt netmask gt where port number The port of the RPVC Specify a single DSL port 1 lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC SNO The VCI of the RPVC ip The subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation lt netmask gt The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 This command removes a domain for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain includes the subscriber s LAN IP addresses The following example removes a domain for a CPE device is connected to DSL port on the IES 612 51A and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and uses a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This includes the CPE device s LAN
148. F 3 F Test F determines if there is a building wiring problem between the subscriber s wall jack and MDF 3 Figure 294 Testing In house Wiring Z L J N BN U S E R XU FHEHHEH E CELETTE MDF 2 cables i User with User with telephone telephone and DSL service only service User with telephone service only Connect a standard telephone to MDF 1 If there is no dial tone then a problem with the wire or wire connections between MDF 1 and the TELCO exists Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting Connect a telephone to the upper port of MDF 2 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between MDF 1 and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire and connections between MDFs 1 and 2 Disconnect the telephone wire from CO Connect a telephone to the telephone wire If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire s pin assignments see Section 56 5 on page 425 for the proper pin assignments Replace the telephone wire if the pin assignments are OK and there is still no dial tone Reconnect the telephone wire to CO Disconnect the telephone wire from USER Connect a telephone to USER see Section 56 5 on page 425 for the proper pin assignments If there is no dial tone your device s internal splitter may be faulty contact your vendor 410 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting Table 106 Testing In house Wiring con
149. FOR OFF FOE TE 203 PRE FFO OFFF EE aie ptt tl E 203 eoa PFPA TO FFOR E 206 Chapter 29 E EE 209 E EE EE 209 C PLE ES nibo MCH 209 29 3 DSLP Ee WEE 210 Chapter 30 ih 2 1000 Terr rn 211 30 1 Transparent LAN Service TLS Overview ceesecciiieeiee eene n a aetate rana nnn ah 211 UURMEES i 1S2 s M 211 a SD I4i o0 Ee n 212 Chapter 31 EE 215 21 1 Access ee te ee 215 ANE S R I uu Nt RM EE RS 215 SLIUCAULTIDES et NT TEE 216 camur car Nel UN roii MERE EN NS 216 dho AUL FOI Serup E 218 SLAAGL PI Map SCEE dM TREE TET 219 16 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 32 Downstream E TT E 221 OREM er ucc EE erte 221 32 2 Downstream Broadcast Screen Leusiccsmiiettebno beide EH Ur PE Ioa bibet os eee RUE Md 221 Chapter 33 BUND eacus IH ba NIE THEN IN EIE MM aetna esd MI D MEI MAN EMEN MM ANM NEA ME I ME 223 ELI ictum Men AMD NIE MINIMUM EMI MM MM EUM 223 SECULI SN SE EE 223 Chapter 34 hieell Bet MMTTTT HY 225 Bel GEELEN Geer 225 coBN re tee i A E 225 GE a 225 DIL SEENEN BUS gedet 227 DLE NEP TERRE een mee er R 227 ENEE eebe 228 34 5 Service Access Control Screen sessssssssesssssssssseee ener nennen ness anas 229 34 6 Remote Management
150. Figure 293 ACL Assignment Show Command Example cccccssesceccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeseeseeeeees 403 mici el Ail pt UTER 410 Figure 295 Resetting the Switch Via Command cccccssssssececessesseececesensseeeeeseauseeeeesseaseeeeesseaseeetentes 413 Fide 295 Example moneri ET ME 414 IES 612 51A User s Guide 33 List of Figures FOUTS 297 neen TIS EEN 415 Figure 298 Tolco 50 Fin ASSiQNMENIS geeiert n REOR Dixi uto a red bet Rp PoRIN DO EATER a Road ueri cdd 425 Figure 299 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector eesssesesessesseeeeeennnn nennen mnn nnne 426 Figure 300 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector ccccccccccccsssseeeceeeeeeeceeseeesseeeeeeeseaeeeessaaeeeeeaaees 426 EI IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables JEDE T PIMAE PON Zeg 49 E ai E 2p qoem ere P I Q 49 Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu LINKS isuasiserxvivaswE p EXUROUDOBEG a C XPRESS ANDR ad ADR UD DEO ONU Edw HA 63 Table 4 Web Configurator Screens EEN 63 JOE E PIRE ET EE GUNT DeL E 75 ELE e ten naan 77 Ee Bgl age weno ot Ie Bee eee eee Ea MEI MU M PHI DE PIDEN 80 Tihi KEE 82 Taole d Fon ONIS ARRAN MIOT EEN 84 Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail 11 ice rere piment Snap b mna rx a Rr na EXPO e 85 pr XR un EE 88 Ee CET MEET 91 Table 13 User ore EEN 93 Ee ET EE 95 ji 305 700 X XA AT O 100 EE
151. H albae accept tagged untagged or Ethernet frames or both Note enet1 enet2 are fixed at all vlan cpu show Displays the VLAN ID of the M Management VLAN vlan cpu set lt vid gt Sets the VLAN ID of the H Management VLAN mac flush Clears learned MAC addresses H H from the forwarding table H Displays the MAC aging out time M L period H mac agingtime set lt sec Sets the MAC aging out time 10 10000 0 disabl period ed gt mac antaspooting Show the MAC antispoofing show status mac antispoofing Turns on the MAC antispoofing enable mac antispoofing Turns off the MAC antispoofing disable mac count show port irst Displays the system s current MAC address count settings H H H H H H H H M mac count enable portlist Turns on the MAC address count filter for an ADSL port s mac count disable lt portlist gt Turns off the MAC address count filter for an ADSL port s TIT Displays MAC fiter settings portlist Turns on the MAC filter mac filter disable portlist Turns off the MAC filter mac filter mode lt port gt Sets the MAC filter to accept or accept deny deny mac filter set lt port lt mac gt Adds a MAC filter MAC entry on lt mac gt lt mac gt an ADSL port s mac filter delete port mac Removes a MAC filter MAC entry H H mac mac on an ADSL port s portlrst Display packet filter settings eene set Bert lt pore
152. H IDE TEE 247 PII EE 249 BESIDE EUNT 255 enaner RN m RN 257 unner 277 ENEE a a a aee 283 Bog ueri de RTI RT heen 291 IEEE 8024 10 Tagged VLAN Commands egene Eet Seege 299 DI LEID E 307 IZ bd e RET QU PNE EP 313 x ig Q9 ME T I TIL 327 HEEN NR CN NH 331 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands essere 335 GREEN erte 341 ADSL LOTO EE 343 Virtual Channel Management Commands c sccccccseeeeeeceeeececseeeseeeseuseeeceaaeeeeeseueeeesaaeeeseas 375 e enn E E 399 Troubleshooting and Specifications 1111 eeeeeeLeeee eee Leeeee rennen enne nena n nnns 405 Dii pet ER 407 uva nde elec ru c RERO 417 D SE GEI EEN 427 Di IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Cle TTE TETTE 3 Document Convin DEA EEN 4 ccu ID RE M TT TT TU E 6 SEENEN 9 Tabe ol OnE G e m T TT 11 KSE 27 E 4e ce RTT HU 35 Part l Introduction EENS 39 Chapter 1 Getma to Know me IES D TREO TE 41 ERES 7 0 OW oea aa NONE eebe 41 EEN EE 41 BR MEER e eli eege 41 IX EQUIS PIDE tegen 42 1 3 Ways to Manage the ARA E 43 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the IES 612 514A 0 cccccccceceeccseeceseceecesscceesencossneeseceeeeesccerees 43 Chapter 2 Hardware InstallatiOn 1 1 c eerie ree nenne nene nn nune ne nhau nh unu a Reus u nurus 45 2 1 General Installation Inslr cllofis deed eege
153. IES 612 51A 12 port ADSL2 2 Standalone mini DSLAM User s Guide Version 3 52 9 2007 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address Mhttp 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the IES 612 51A using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the IES 612 514A LS It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the IES 612 51A e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents e ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team Zy XEL Communications Corp
154. IP address for primary server secondary server IP address for secondary server Maximum 32 entries can be configured Default empty list dhcprelay server vid primary Delete DHCP server for 1 VLAN delete server gt dhcprelay server lt vid gt lt active Activate primary or secondary active server gt DHCP server for 1 VLAN dhcprelay mode DHCP relay mode auto both relaymode dhcprelay option82 Turns on the DHCP relay agent enable information Option 82 feature dhcprelay option82 Turns off the DHCP relay agent M H disable information Option 82 feature dhcprelay option82 relay info Adds the specified information for M H set the relay agent dhcprelay Turns on option 82 sub option 2 opt82sub2 enable dhcprelay Turns off option 82 sub option 2 opt82sub2 disable dhcprelay relay info Adds the specified information for M H opt82sub2 set sub option 2 IES 612 51A User s Guide 269 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P acl profile set name rule Create modify a acl profile M H action rule lt l2 gt lt I3_ protocol mfc lt l2 gt Layer 2 match fields listed in priority sequence match etype lt etype gt vlan vid etype lt etype gt smac mac etype lt etype gt dmac mac vlan vid smac mac vlan vid dmac mac smac mac dmac mac vlan vid priority priority ety
155. IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 279 RPVC Route Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvo route delete 1 9 35 L0 10 10 1 24 53 7 11 RPVC ARP Agingtime Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime set sec 390 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands where sec The number of seconds 10 10000 the device is to keep the Address Resolution Protocol table s entries of IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways Use 0 to disable the aging time This command configures how long the device stores the IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode in the Address Resolution Protocol table The following example sets the device to store the IP addresses 2684 routed mode gateways in the Address Resolution Protocol table for 500 seconds Figure 280 RPVC ARP Agingtime Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime set 500 53 7 12 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime show This command displays how long the device stores the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways in the Address Resolution Protocol table The following 1s an example Figure 281 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime show rpvc aging time sec 500 53 7 13 RPVC ARP Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvo arp show This command displays how long the device stores the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways in the Add
156. It uses real time variable bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 250 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells The average cell rate that can be transmitted SCR 1s set to 100 000 cells per second The maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT is set to 200 Figure 259 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 2 ras adsl vcprofile set silver vc vbr 250000 5 100000 200 3 6 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands The following example creates a virtual channel profile named economy that uses LLC encapsulation It uses unspecified bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 50 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CD VT is set to 100 cells Figure 260 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 3 ras adsl vcprofile set gold llc cbr 50000 100 53 2 3 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax ras adsl vcprofile delete lt vcprofile gt where vcprofile The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot delete the DEFVAL or DEFVAL VC profiles You cannot delete a virtual channel profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that a
157. LABEL DESCRIPTION Jabbers This is the number of frames received transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors Collisions This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Utilizations This field displays the port utilization status in the sampling period 86 IES 612 51A User s Guide System Information The System Information screen displays general device information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as temperature status You can check the firmware version number and monitor the hardware status in this screen To open this screen click Basic Setting System Information Figure 37 System Info Systeminfo NE eae ceret s SE oo ANOS FW Version V352 ABAD OTIDZDOD DSP Code Version 8040003 Hardware Version Serial Number Hardware Monitor M Enable Temperature Unit C Z Temperature C Current MAX Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Current MAX MIN Average ThresholdjLow Threshold Hi ee USE d pase uml ee 1 820 1820 1 820 1 820 p MC Md Hew threshold ABply Temperature C Hi Temperature C Lo Volt Hi Volt Lo DES ms CR Pall Intervali s ao Set Interval Stop IES 612 51A User s Guide
158. Maintenance Screen To open this screen click Management Maintenance Figure 119 Maintenance OMAR Firmware Upgrade Click here Restore Text Configuration Click here Backup Text Configuration Click here Restore Default Contiguration Click here Reboot System Click Here 36 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Use this screen to upgrade your device firmware See the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device lt gt Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device To open this screen click Management Maintenance Click here Firmware Upgrade IES 612 51A User s Guide SET Chapter 36 Maintenance Figure 120 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Tim To upgrade the switch s firmware browse to the location af the binary HIN file and click the Upgrade button File Path Browse Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the device in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade 36 3 Restore Configuration Screen Use this screen to load a configuration file from your computer to the device To open this screen click Management Maintenance Click here Restore Text Configuration Figure 121 Restore Con
159. Map Click ACL Profile Map to open the screen where you can look at which ACL profiles are assigned to which PVCs see Section 31 4 on page 219 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port to which you wish to assign an ACL profile This field is read only once you click on a port number below Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port ACL Profile Use the drop down list box to select the ACL profile you want to assign to this PVC Apply Click this to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display ACL profile settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port ACL Profi
160. N EE 103 TET ENET age vies EE EE 105 Table 18 ADSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates sees nnns 107 Ee NEE KR DB Gusivenexmibuch raum MERE ano M DEDI NIMM CUPIS 109 ToL EJ ng un e EE 112 Dai o cp EE 117 Tabie 22 IEEE E 1p Frionty t0 FPPVG DEENEN eege 120 agreed 121 EK E e EE 123 TES PUR EN 125 BC Pu S P pe MUERTE H 131 BET vi RE RE 133 Tob 20 IOMP Far TEE 136 Table 29 xDSL Line Rate Info oo ceccccsecceeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeseeeeesseeeeseueeessueesseaeeeseaeeeseueeeeseneeessees 137 Toe Ka EN POONA RR E UU AT 139 T A E EE 142 O ER E 147 EE GIN IE MT ELE THEE ISI URP PET 148 TIEREN TE N FON BN EE 150 e EE EE 155 Table 36 IGMP BandWidth snevrciniadicedicniccvencdantsveaveinsiaiausexsiaoranssapsaannnobpoiesaunetaniaventolmdaareneyomceedieaioraneies 156 Table ar Bandwidth Fort SetU EE 158 EEN E KT a ERE 158 IES 612 51A User s Guide 35 List of Tables D cR dci aera AT TN RTTEREN 159 RE crac ein ue EE E 160 TEMA RAN Fon GOUD E 161 BE Ae a ec c MERE eebe 163 Table 43 MVLAN Status ieeieeeeieiee eines teta m nnn rn barn aka naa DI Rak Ra PARAR D RR RM M A RR DAR SERA RADAR A e MAR RR DIOA 166 BEI AR d Ec M v T 167 Ee 0 2 1 5 5 1007 168 TOES Tt EEN 171 ps TOT exl TTE UTI TREE 173 fo eb Gee uv RR 175 E TR A ug 176 Table 50 Spanning Tree
161. Ns on the network Filtering Use this screen to configure packet filtering MAC Filter Use this screen to configure MAC filtering for each port Protocol and configure RSTP settings Port Authentication Use these screens to configure RADIUS and IEEE 802 1x security settings Port Security Use this screen to limit the number of MAC address that can be learned on a port DHCP Relay Use this screen to configure the DHCP relay settings DHCP Snoop Use these screens to drop traffic from IP addresses not assigned by the DHCP server and to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port 2684 Routed Mode Use this screen to configure the IES 612 51A to handle 2684 routed mode traffic Spanning Tree Use these screens to display Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP information PPPoA to PPPoE Use this screen to enable PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port DSCP Use this screen to set up DSCP on each port and to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values TLS PVC Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q on each port Use this screen to set up Access Control Logic profiles and to assign them to each PVC Downstream Use this screen to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to Broadcast specified VLANs on specified ports SysLog Use this screen to configure the syslog settings Access Control Use this screen to configure service access control and configure SNMP and remote management Stat
162. Number of IGMP host IP addresses per Ethernet port 1024 System wide Number of VLANs 256 Provisioning Number of ACL profiles 128 Number of ADSL profiles 24 Number of ATM profiles 48 Number of IGMP filter profiles 128 Number of ADSL alarm profiles 24 Number of DHCP relay servers 32 Number of IP routes 128 Number of static multicast addresses 32 Number of MVLAN 16 Number of Multicast bandwidth control groups 96 Number of IGMP groups 256 groups Number of User administrator accounts 16 Number of Dot1X profiles 64 Number of MAC addresses learnable 9 5k 128 per ADSL port 4k per ENET port Number of RPVC gateway IP addresses 96 56 3 Standards Supported The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the IES 612 51A Table 114 Standards Supported Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 PPP over ATM over ADSL 422 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 114 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DMT ITU standard f
163. P Snoop 26 4 DHCP Counter Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop DHCP Counter Figure 95 DHCP Counter N DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status Show Port fall Port Discover Request ick Overflow U U 1 H 3 4 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 DHCP Counter LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Snoop Click DHCP Snoop to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port see Section 26 2 on page 191 DHCP Snoop Status Click DHCP Snoop Status to open the screen where you can look at or clear the current DHCP snooping table on each port See Section 26 3 on page 192 This field displays the selected DSL port number s This field displays the number of DHCP Discover packets on this port This field displays the number of DHCP Acknowledge packets on this port Overflow The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit Clear Click Clear to delete the information the IES 612 51A has learned about DHCP packets This resets every counter in this screen Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information This field displays the number of DHCP Offer packets on this port This field displays the number of DHCP Request packets on this port IES 612 51A User s Guide 193
164. P community check fails reboot This trap is sent when the system is going to reboot The variable is the reason for the system reboot overheat This trap is sent when the system is overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius overheatOver This trap is sent when the system is no longer overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius voltageNormal This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is back within the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts adslAtucLofClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Frame detected on the ATUC is over adslAturLofClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Frame detected on the ATUR is over adslAtucLosClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Signal detected on the ATUC is over adslAturLosClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Signal detected on the ATUR is over adslAturLprClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Power detected on the ATUR is over voltageOutOfRange This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is out of the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts IES 612 51A User s Guide 22 f Chapter 34 Access Control Table 75 SNMPv2 Traps continued TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred withi
165. Port Downstream Carrieri Commande 352 52 1 18 PMM Parameters Command Luseasienecsqe inbiu vorbei aX EN p i 353 92 1 17 impulse Noise Frotechon Command RE 399 52 1 18 Annex L Enable Command EE 355 52 1 19 Annex L Disable Command WEE 355 52 1 20 Annex M Enable Commande 356 52 1 21 Annex M Disable Commande 356 Be bee SEET EE AIA asecseasateviditiiebbverbbtsbidqenidunmridekuudadiddper kid vbb iud ut Ut idus 356 52 1 23 Annex I Disable WIIG BE 357 S22 DSL ear EREMO 357 OS ILSUFOTSUDN Gar EEN oor CC E up c MR 358 occ G Lineni LOB EE 359 SERA ANI ic E iig MC E E 360 52 2 5 15 Minute Performance Commande 361 92 2 6 1 Day Fernomance Command NR Sg EEN 362 52 2 7 Line Diagnostics Set Command cccccccccssessessssseeceeeessnccsassesereceeeersncosssseeerenes 363 52 2 8 Line Diagnostics Get Command iueeseriveixidaiisxsut ivan tedoiidtedum aux sd i I eu E due 363 92 2 9 LING Diagnostibs Get 992 3 COIITIBPIC MEET 365 92 2 10 SELT Diagnostic Set Command tege ee 367 22 2 11 SELT Diagnostic Gel OTi B EEN 368 52 2 12 Tone Diagnostics 992 3 COMIN ic ecco insicreneesdccasareeimiasaanmniorarmncsaaiarsareieaionenened 368 52 3 Alarm Profile Commands 370 5553 Alarm PECTS Show COmmand WEE 370 52 3 2 Alarm Profile Set Command BEEN 371 52 3 3 Alarm Profile Delete GOMMANG scicacancesacsrncnsicencsssacensitasnccisaneessxsivecenvsassavabasaaddaabanans 372 Seed Alarm FProie Map Command EE 372 52 3 5 Alarm Profile Showmap LOITITIBEND E 373 Chap
166. RIPTION AAL This field displays the ATM adaptation layer used by the VC profile aal5 The VC profile uses ATM adaptation layer 5 This field displays the type of ATM traffic class cbr constant bit rate vbr real time variable bit rate nrt vbr non real time variable bit rate or ubr Class unspecified bit rate PCR This is the Peak Cell Rate PCR the maximum number of cells that the sender can send per second CDVT This field displays the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay Ce O JJ The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term in cells per second that can be transmitted SCR applies with the vbr traffic class Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT applies with the vbr traffic class Select Modify Delete Select a VC profile s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the VC profile Select a VC profile s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the VC profile The rest of the screen is for PVC configuration Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name for the profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Encap Select the encapsulation type LLC or VC for this port Class Select CBR constant bit rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth fo
167. RNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION as Configuration File config 0 dat This is the configuration filename for the IES 612 51A Firmware bin This is the Operating System firmware on the IES 612 51A 50 3 Editable Configuration File The configuration file can be downloaded as a plain text ASCII file Edits to the configuration can be made to this file before it is uploaded again to the IES 612 51A BS You can change the dat file to a txt file and still upload it back to the IES 612 51A lt gt Do not upload any invalid files to the IES 612 51A s configuration file as it may permanently damage your IES 612 51A 50 3 1 Editable Configuration File Backup Configure your system and then use FTP to backup the plain text configuration file onto your computer Do the following to backup the configuration file IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands Use an FTP client to connect to the IES 612 51A Figure 201 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A Qi EEO TES 612 51A IP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 202 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in Use get to transfer the configuration file to the computer The configuration file on the system that you want to backup to the co
168. S 612 51A User s Guide 437 Appendix B Customer Support 438 IES 612 51A User s Guide Numerics 2684 routed mode 383 A Access Control 225 actual rate 108 Address Resolution Protocol See ARP adsl alarmprofile commands 370 adsl commands 343 adsl linediag commands 363 adsl paepvc commands 392 ADSL Port Setup 107 125 adsl ppvc commands 379 ADSL profiles 107 default 109 adsl pvc commands 377 adsl rpvc commands 383 ADSL standard 138 adsl tlspvc commands 396 adsl vcprofile commands 375 aging time 100 alarm commands 283 Alarm Profile Screen 133 all digital mode 113 ALM LED troubleshooting 407 Annex I 113 Annex L 113 Annex M 113 ARP 172 247 table 247 ATM F5 242 ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 128 ATM QoS 127 ATM traffic class 128 132 authentication 94 default privilege level for administrators 95 modes for administrators 95 user 94 Index Index B back up configuration 239 bit allocation 142 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDU 176 Burst Tolerance BT 130 C Canonical Format Indicator CFI 145 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT 129 certifications 429 notices 430 viewing 430 Cl 257 Cl commands See commands CLI 257 CLI commands See commands command interface 43 Command Line Interface See Cl or CLI commands 257 258 abbreviations 257 config save 258 configuration back up 239 335 file names 335 restore 238 335 using FTP 335 configured
169. SL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the number of IGMP related packets received on the specified port s The following figure shows the number of IGMP packets for port 1 Figure 186 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Example bas gt statistics tompsnoop port info t port group ont query cnc jorn cnt leave cnc 47 7 4 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Syntax ras statistics igmpsnoop port group lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt 322 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 47 IGMP Commands This command displays the IGMP groups a port joins The following figure shows an example for port 1 Figure 187 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Example ras statistics igmpsnoop port group 1 port vid mcast_ip source ip 47 8 Multicast VLAN Commands Use these commands to configure VLAN multicast settings and set multicast port members Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management 47 8 1 Multicast VLAN Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan set vid portli
170. SOl BODL aieo rit pte eiBR T Eno ptt ble stas vit be Pol bx an bs bo UR HA Uu ME E Ha 230 Part IV Routing Protocol Alarm and Management 233 Chapter 35 I aa NT TT T Mme 235 Chapter 36 UEI E A PER TO anna tein Rm 237 36 1 Maintenance Screen Aen eueicehgeree ge teteeltet CECR 237 26 2 Firmware UD GOE eege ees 237 SO d HSSIDIG COLT IY SOEUR EE 238 36 4 Backing Up a Coniiguration File E 238 EE LE EEN aE a EE E E T A 239 ENO a EE 240 EE EE eege 240 Chapter 37 KI e em TR LTEM 241 SY 9d oii ETT 241 Chapter 38 dne tL 245 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents 38 1 Introduction to MAC Table 245 38 2 eNT ric iRERNRRel nba a mnuum m 246 Chapter 39 ARE TREE E etu E MEE NM MM RM MM EE are ME PM M MM ee weer 247 39 1 Introduction to ARP Table EE 247 39 1 1 How ARP Works geb 247 39 2 ARP Table Screen EE 247 Chapter 40 1 DEE EE 249 SINIT Up LERNTE 249 40 2 Alarm Status Screen ccccccccccececcccecsccccecscsccccecsccucacacsucacacsuaueusecausatscstausetsceusensesecunensees 249 LIRE Uc Ie ae EEUU RU Em 250 40 4 Alarm Event Setup Screen ENEE 251 40 4 1 Edit Alarm Event Setup Screen occae eiat ner oda kn aes Sao spin b Po ge Ea Xp IR VBE 253 Oe POET RT cra rea HEISST EEPERDETA PRIMA ELEFKI AEN 254 Part V CLI Commands eere rennen nennen EN ENEE NN EN EN nA 255
171. The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 180 IES 612 51A Users Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup 23 1 Introduction to Authentication IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile management on a network RADIUS server 23 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 85 RADIUS Server Client RADIUS Server 23 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database By storing user profiles locally on the IES 612 51A your IES 612 51A is able to authenticate users without interacting 2 At fe time of writing Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports 802 1x See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other oper
172. This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP relays for each VLAN 25 1 DHCP Relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a DHCP server You can configure the IES 612 51A to relay DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers and the server s responses back to the clients You can specify default DHCP servers for all VLAN and you can specify DHCP servers for each VLAN 25 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 The IES 612 51A can add information to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the IES 612 51A to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please see RFC 3046 for more details 25 2 1 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Formats The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of DHCP request frames that the IES 612 51A relays to a DHCP server The Agent Information field that the IES 612 51A adds contains an Agent Circuit ID sub option that includes the port number VLAN ID and optional information about the port where the DHCP request was received The following figure shows the format of the Agent Circuit ID sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option The length
173. Trap Community public s i sSC Trap Destination 1 o o o 0 Dot lz 155535 Trap Destination 2 fo 0 0 0 Portjl6e2 1 65535 Trap Destination 3 0 0 0 0 Portjl6 2 1 565535 Trap Destination 4 fo 0 0 0 Portjl6ee 1 65535 Trusted Hosti0 0 0 0 means trust all 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Return to go back to the previous screen Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Community Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Trap Destination Enter the IP address of a station to send your SNMP traps to 1 4 Enter the port number upon which the station listens for SNMP traps Trusted Host A trusted host is a computer that is allowed to use SNMP with the IES 612 51A 0 0 0 0 allows any computer to use SNMP to access the IES 612 51A Specify an IP address to allow only the computer with that IP address to use SNMP to access the IES 612 51A Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your change
174. WEE 329 Figure 193 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Example nnne 329 Figure 194 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Commands s snnnnnsseeeeenenennnsessrrrnrrnrrrreerrr renn 331 Figure 195 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Command Example 332 Figure 196 Route Show Command Example dud Fille T97 ARP onow Command EXAMDIO EE 334 Figur 198 Statistics IP Command EXAmpIS erveisexiavapkEtebidkb amid okebxVEpE b TU RETE IUD pet ITE R Ee DAFARF DDR E MP TEN 334 Figure 199 FTP Put Configuration File Example uiuat n anisune nt RR RR n asd iLNRAE nei ER Rud u EU neice 335 Fi re 200 FTP Get Contiguration File EENEG eERE 336 Figure 201 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A sseeuussss 337 Figure 202 Example Enter the Management Password cccccceececceseecceeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeeessueeessesenes 337 Figure 203 Example Get the Configuration File config O ccccssccceeccceseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeaeeseeeeessaeseeeess 337 Figure 204 Example Close FTP Client sseeeessssesseseeeeee nennen nnn nnne nnn nnn nnns 337 Figure 205 GohBguralion Filo EXAMP EE 338 Figure 206 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 338 Figure 207 Example Enter the Management Password AEN 339 Figure 208 Example Upload the Configuration File config U sccciisisstesscseveicnsssincncidscevassetercteave
175. Z Us Us z z z O02 Oz tone 400 415 02 02 2 z 2 z Us O2 02 z 2 Oz tone 416 431 02 02 2 Uz Z z O42 z z z 02 Us tone 4324 447 02 02 02 02 2 z z z 0z z 02 Oz tone 446 463 O02 02 02 Uz 2 O02 z z z z 2 Oz tone 464 479 02 02 2 Uz 2 z z z z z 02 Oz tone 460 495 n2 02 2 z 2 z z z j z z O02 Us tone 496 Sll 02 02 l 01 l z l O1 01 00 OO US carrier load number of bits per symbolf tone tone 000 015 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO 02 03 05 05 06 tone 016 031 08 08 09 09 09 09 ns 09 09 ns ns 0S IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 xDSL Line Data LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Rate Click Line Rate to display an ADSL port s line operating values see Section 15 1 on page 137 Line Performance Click Line Performance to display an ADSL port s line performance counters see Section 15 2 on page 138 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the port Bit Allocation DS carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber s DSL modem or router US carrier load displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the upstream channel from
176. a the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group In daisychain mode Ethernet interface 1 is set as the upstream interface and Ethernet interface 2 and the DSL ports are set as downstream interfaces 17 3 IGMP Status Screen Use this screen to view current IGMP information To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP 154 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 17 IGMP Figure 69 IGMP Status Bandwidth Setup IGMP Setup Filter Setup Count Setup IGMP Port Info IGMP Port Group Clear uen Report Leave Number of IGMP Groups Previous Reload Next Page O of 0 Index X VID IP Address 1121 3 4 H 10 11 12 EMET1 ENET2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 IGMP Status DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Setup Click Bandwidth Setup to open the IGMP Bandwidth screen where you can set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels see Section 17 4 on page 156 You can also open the Bandwidth Port Setup screen to set up multicast bandwidth requirements for selected ports see Section 17 4 1 on page 157 IGMP Setup Click IGMP Setup to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can configure IGMP settings see Section 17 5 on page 158 Filter Setup Click Filter Setup to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 17 6 on page 159 Count Setup Click Count Setup to open the IGMP Count screen where you can limit the number
177. aagaaag The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 xDSL Line Rate Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Performance Click Line Performance to display an ADSL port s line performance counters see Section 15 2 on page 138 Line Data Click Line Data to display an ADSL port s line bit allocation see Section 15 3 on page 140 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the port IES 612 51A User s Guide 1 3 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data Table 29 xDSL Line Rate Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate The rate fields display the transmission rates Line Down indicates that the ADSL port is not connected to a subscriber Down up Stream These are the rates in Kops at which the port has been sending and receiving Rate data Down up Stream These are the DSL line s downstream and upstream noise margins Measured Noise Margin in decibels dB Down up Stream These are the reductions in amplitude of the downstream and upstream DSL Attenuation signals Measured in decibels dB Down up Stream These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates in Kops at which the Attainable Rate port could send and receive data Service Mode This field displays the ADSL standard that the port is using G dmt G lite ANSI T1 413 issue 2 ADSL2 or ADSL2
178. able 56 DHCP Snoop continued LABEL DESCRIPTION snooping on this port None Click this to un select all entries in the table 26 3 DHCP Snoop Status Screen Use this screen to look at or to clear the DHCP snooping table on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status Figure 94 DHCP Snoop Status E DHCP Snoop Status d DHCP Snoop DHCP Counter Show Port fall Overflow U U U U U The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 DHCP Snoop Status LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Snoop Click DHCP Snoop to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port see Section 26 2 on page 191 DHCP Counter Click DHCP Counter to open the screen where you can look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port see Section 26 4 on page 193 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information This field displays the selected DSL port number s Hg This field displays the IP address assigned to a client on this port MAC This field displays the MAC address of a client on this port to which the DHCP server assigned an IP address Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the DHCP snooping table for the selected port s Overflow The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit 192 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 26 DHC
179. agged and untagged incoming frames Type Select Tag Only to have the port only accept incoming frames that have a VLAN tag Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 150 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 16 VLAN Table 34 VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports Paste Select the number of the port from which you want to copy settings Click Paste and the following screen appears Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 67 Select Ports 12 3 4 5 6 17 8 9 1 9 ES ET EE EFFE EA is 12 EE EE select EI None ENET2 Apply Cancel A X At the time of writing the VLAN Acceptable Frame Type field is read only for the Ethernet ports The IES 612 51A accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames on the Ethernet ports IES 612 51A User s Guide 5 Chapter 16 VLAN 152 IES 612 51A User s Guide IGMP This chapter describes the IGMP screens 17 1 IGMP Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in
180. ance CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT controls the time scale over which the PCR is enforced CDVT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to PCR IES 612 51A User s Guide 129 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 14 3 2 5 Burst Tolerance BT Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port 1s guaranteed to handle without any discards BT controls the time scale over which the SCR is enforced BT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to SCR Use this formula to calculate BT MBS Dx 1 SCR 1 PCR BT 14 3 2 6 Theoretical Arrival Time TAT The Theoretical Arrival Time TAT is when the next cell in an ATM connection s stream of cells 1s expected to arrive TAT is calculated based on the PCR or SCR The following figure illustrates the relationship between TAT CDVT and BT If a cell arrives at time A then according to PCR or SCR the next cell is expected to arrive at time B If the next cell arrives earlier than time C it is discarded or tagged for not complying with the TAT Time C is calculated based on the CDVT or BT Figure 57 TAT CDVT and BT in Traffic Shaping wr Cell Time B sn B CDVT BT 14 4 Upstream Policing Es Upstream policing is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate a
181. arries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each The first number is the total number of DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using The second number indicates how many upstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Table 97 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the snrm received noise power could increase with the IES 612 51A still being able to meet its transmission targets eus ars Ba This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the real part of the compl
182. as been removed from the auto mode selection list When a profile is assigned to a line in auto mode the line will not go to showtime if the modem is configured in t1413 mode only or if it is an old modem that only supports t 1413 You have to explicitly configure the line in t 1413 mode to make the modem initialize The following example sets DSL port 1 to have the gold profile in G dmt mode Figure 219 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl profile map 1 gold gdmt 52 1 8 DSL Port Name Command Syntax ras adsl name lt portlist gt lt name gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt name gt A descriptive name for the port You can use up to 31 printable ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens This command sets the name of a DSL port s The following example sets DSL port 5 to have the name super Figure 220 DSL Port Name Command Example ras gt adsl name 5 super 52 1 9 DSL Port Tel Command Syntax ras gt adsl tel lt portlist gt lt tel gt IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt tel a DSL subscriber s telephone number You can use up to 15
183. at have occurred within the 15 minute period These counters are also used in the alarm profiles see Section 52 2 9 on page 365 52 2 6 1 Day Performance Command Syntax ras statistics adsl Ildaypert portlist where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays line performance statistics for the current and previous 24 hours 362 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands An example is shown next Figure 246 1Day Performance Command Example ras statistics adsl ldayperf 1 Port 1 current 1 day elapsed time 81985 sec Link Down Current 1 Day Perf ATUC ATUR lofs loss lols lprs es ELTE ses OOOO IC OO CH CO CH IC CO IC CH uas Port 1 previous 1 day elapsed time 0 sec Previous 1 Day Perf ATUC ATUR lofs loss lols lprs es init ses OOOO I OO CH oO CO CO CO CH uas See Table 95 on page 362 for details about these counters 52 2 7 Line Diagnostics Set Command Syntax ras adsl linediag setld port number This command has the IES 612 51A perform line diagnostics on the specified port The DSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 operational mode and have a connection It takes about one minute for the line diagnostics to finish The following example performs line diagnostics on DSL port 1 The screen displays a me
184. atency mode for the ports that belong to this profile Select Fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary Select Interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line See Section 13 4 on page 108 for more on interleave delay Up Stream The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions Max Rate Type a maximum upstream transfer rate 64 to 4096 Kbps for this profile Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum upstream transfer rate 32 to 4096 Kbps for this port Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to Interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target upstream signal to noise
185. atic Multicast Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address es that you specify This feature can be used in conjunction with IGMP snooping proxy to allow multicast MAC address es that are not learned by IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy Use static multicast to pass routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF 18 2 Static Multicast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Static Multicast Figure 76 Static Multicast EIDA The Humber Of Static Multicast 1 2 Page 1 of 1 Previous Reload Hext Index MAC Address T H H 01 00 58 12 34 5B Join All Leave All Delete W V W v v v M M M M Adding new entry HHH PT M To join leave a multicast group click the port status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Static Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of static multicast entries configured on the IES 612 51A Static Multicast Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all status Next information cannot be seen in one screen Click this button to refresh the screen The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups This is the static multicast group index number IES 612 51A User s Guide 163 Chap
186. ating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software IES 612 51A User s Guide M81 Chapter 23 Port Authentication 23 2 RADIUS Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Authentication Figure 86 RADIUS RAUS Ge Enable Authentication Server IF address 0 0 0 0 UDP Part l8l z 1 55535 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Enable Local Profile Setting Support upto 64 profiles Mame Password Retjpe Password to confirm Add Cancel Index Hame 1 admin Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1x Click 802 1x to configure individual port authentication settings see Section 23 3 on page 183 Enable Select this check box to have the IES 612 51A use an external RADIUS server Authentication to authenticate users Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memor
187. ation between the end points the CPE devices and the BRAS you need to configure the DSLAM the IES 612 51A to translate PPPoA frames to PPPoE packets and vise versa When PPPoA packets are received from the CPE the ATM headers are removed and the IES 612 51A adds PPPoE and Ethernet headers before sending the packets to the BRAS When the IES 612 51A receives PPPoE packets from the BRAS PPPoE and Ethernet headers are stripped and necessary PVC information such as encapsulation type is added before forwarding to the designated CPE 28 2 PPPoA to PPPoE Screen Use this screen to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port This conversion is set up by creating a PAE PVC See Chapter 13 on page 107 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application PPPoA to PPPoE IES 612 51A User s Guide 203 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE Figure 102 PPPoA to PPPoE LIT Port VPI iS vC Profile DEFVAL LS YC Profile b FVID P 1 4094 Priority AC Name Service Mame Hellotime 600 secto hon Apply Cancel Show Port 411 Index Fort vFIP vCI PYID Priority Helloti me LIS US VC Profile Delete Select MI None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 PPPoA to PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions This field is read only once you click on a por
188. aue en Rm 150 gi d fE onda MERERETUR 151 siis leu duit TAG A aig m 154 gcbi iocd t dui ci PERUENIRE 155 GR TO MF Banon M o om 156 POU T I Eanna FON ae I PUNIRI 157 dele rae ae e ROTE AE P NAA E A E A E EE A IE E AR 158 EE Nee E 159 uim MC FON iri RTT 160 Figure 79 GMP Fart Group EE 160 POU Te S AE 163 uti EZE UIN E EEN 165 IER aE P ir 5 A E EE E E A E A EE E A E EAE E E A a tee ee rae 167 EE EE rE TE AET 168 PS E n o M TNT 171 gium ui eil qe RTTC 173 28 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 STP Root Fons and Designated FOIS EE 176 Figure 83 Spanning Tree Frotocol TEE 177 Foue 8 Sanne Tee FO OCO sriain neni EEEE EEn 179 FOWE 05 RADIS SONGI eraen a eaii 181 WUNNT 182 gg 18 0 wp PR M HEP 183 FUIS DE PAS BU aiacppietisititenphbiepE MEN MCI PEDI EHI daa FIM Me eM pM Clu EISUITUIEPHE HMM 185 al E t t EH 186 Figure 90 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format cccccccsseeccceceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaaeeeeees 197 Figure 91 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format cccccccccceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeenaees 188 Pe Re d o n 188 gti sie Lie icc PTT 191 Figure 94 DHCP Snoop Status iceosunieninent tt aed BEREXEKUEREEERE FH ECUEER rM ORE RUP EEXEEE ented PORE RE RYE ER VES EEH I ER RENATA 192 GELEET CIR 193 Figure 96 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Example
189. ave your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index This field displays the number of the gateway entry Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway VI This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the system adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway Priority This field displays the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 that is added to traffic sent to this gateway Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again D D IES 612 51A User s Guide 201 Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode 202 IES 612 51A User s Guide PPPOA to PPPoE This chapter shows you how to set up the IES 612 51A to convert PPPoA frames to PPPoE traffic and vice versa 28 1 PPPoA to PPPoE Overview Before migrating to an Ethernet infrastructure a broadband network might consist of PPPoA connections between the CPE devices and the DSLAM and PPPoE connections from the DSLAM to the Broadband Remote Access Server BRAS The following figure shows a network example Figure 101 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example In order to allow communic
190. ay DHCP snooping result on a port dscp show Displaying per port DSCP setting L dscp enable lt pOrelise gt Enable ADSL ENET ports to use M H DSCP mapping dscp disable ee porubrst Disable ADSL ENET ports to use M H DSCP mapping dscp map show portlist Displaying the DSCP code to L L 802 1p mapping table dscp map set Setting the DSCP code to 802 1p M H mapping table L L M M L srccp lt mappri gt lt srcecp gt source code point 0 63 example Ly 2556 eech lt mappri gt mapping priority Bes vlan show Displays VLAN settings M L vlan portshow portlist Displays the port s VLAN M L settings vid Configures a VLAN entry H H E EE Ee EC KEE CNS e Eh e lt F lt T U gt XIN gt sus name van enable Tums on a VLAN entry van disable Turns off a VLAN entry van delete Removes a VLAN entry vlan pvid lt portlist gt lt pvid gt _ Sets the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port s O H vlam pEDOPTCY lt portlist gt Sets a port s default IEEE 802 1p H H lt priorily gt priority vlan gvrp lt portlist gt Set the port s to enable or H H lt enable disable gt disable gvrp vlan set H H H H H H H H IES 612 51A User s Guide 2171 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P vlan frametype portlvste Sets the specified DSL port to H
191. bels in this screen Table 59 RFC 2684 Routed PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic see Section 27 3 on page 198 RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 199 Routed Gateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 200 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC Enter the subscriber s CPE WAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s WAN IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Make sure that the routed PVC s subnet does not include the IES 612 51A s IP addre
192. bscriber s device The following example adds a PVC to a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 The PVC uses VPI 8 and VCI 36 It sets the DEFVAL profile for downstream traffic shaping and for upstream traffic policing It uses priority queue 2 Figure 264 PPVC Member Set Command Example ras adsl ppvc member set 5 8 35 8 36 DEFVAL DEFVAL 2 53 5 PPVC Member Delete Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc member delete lt portlist gt vpi vci member vpi gt member vci gt where lt portlist gt The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PPVC lt Vei gt The VCI of the PPVC lt member vpi gt The VPI of the individual PVC that you are removing from the PPVC lt member vci gt The VCI of the individual PVC that you are removing from the PPVC This command removes a PVC from a PPVC IES 612 51A User s Guide 381 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands The following example removes a PVC that uses VPI 8 and VCI 36 from a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 Figure 265 PPVC Member Delete Command Example ras adsl ppvc member delete 5 8 35 8 36 53 6 PPVC Member Show Command ras adsl ppvc member show lt portlist gt vpi vci Syntax where lt poreliet gt lt vpi gt SNO member vpi gt member
193. by a scale factor and a complex number This is the real part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the imaginary part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier li im log This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line OLN The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in 1 dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture 52 2 9 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command Syntax ras adsl linediag getl1d992 3 port number Use this command to display the line diagnostics results in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard after using the line diagnostics set command on a DSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze probl
194. c hop count of this static route A name to identify this static route Up to 31 ASCII characters Spaces and tabs are not allowed Use this to configure the IES 612 51A s default route This command defines a new static IP forwarding route or edits an existing one 49 3 4 Route Delete Command Syntax ras ip route delete dst ip gt netmask where lt dst 3p netmask The destination IP address of packets to which this static route applies The destination subnet mask of packets to which this static route applies This command removes a static IP forwarding route 49 3 5 Route Show Command Syntax ras ip route show This command displays the IES 612 51A s routing table An example is shown next Figure 196 Route Show Command Example ras ip route show index dest 192 169 1 0 24 default gateway metric name 1592 5199504 OAs 69294 IES 612 51A User s Guide 333 Chapter 49 IP Commands 49 3 6 ARP Show Command Syntax ras ip arp show This command displays the IES 612 51A s IP Address Resolution Protocol table This 1s the list of IP addresses and matching MAC addresses that the IES 612 51A has resolved An example is shown next Figure 197 ARP Show Command Example ras ip arp show mac address 172 23 14 254 00 0c db 30 ac 00 172 23 15 254 00 0c db 30 ac 00 49 3 7 ARP Flush Command Syntax ras gt ip arp flush This command clears the IES 612 51A s IP A
195. cast VLAN Set Command tier EENEG 323 47 8 2 Multicast VLAN Delete Commande 324 47 8 3 Multicast VLAN Disable Commande 324 47 8 4 Multicast VLAN Enable Command oii oir aia ida dai acabe n nra 324 47 8 5 Multicast VLAN Show Command siccicicnicicsaiscasanscdarsvanesantcsnapnssaneinancvabicvravevsanawebacvos 324 47 8 6 Multicast VLAN Group Set Commande 325 47 8 7 Multicast VLAN Group Delete Commande 325 47 8 8 Multicast VLAN Group Show Commande 326 Chapter 48 Packet Filter COMMON Giana eerie 327 48 1 Fackel Fiter TINO eege 327 48 1 1 Packet Filter Show Command EE 327 48 1 2 Packet Filer Ger Command gegen 328 48 1 3 Packet Filter PPPOE Only Command TEE 329 Chapter 49 I en Lan EE 331 IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 Table of Contents aa EEN Age 331 49 2 IP Settings and Default Gateway RRE elles esee sienne nennen enne nnn nennen nas 331 gocce IP CORSO Gett 332 8d SUB ett 332 49 3 2 Ping Command NEE 332 E Roule Set LONTAN seised a E aaa 332 440 9 Moule Delete e Un Lt EEN dad TOS ROUE SMON COMMAND et ddd RG ARF GNON LOMIO ET I IL UTENTE 334 ER EEN eege 334 See IP LOTmalll asegstvioiienenditaturtiblnn atdtiatudi unen MPREH Ya UH IPOPEDCU MIR PLENUM 334 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands 335 50 1 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Overview eeeseeeeeeeeeee 335 SOMALI qp RO p RP ee 335 EE KEE Aerem 336 50 3 1 Editable Configura
196. ce TLS Commands BS You can NOT configure PPPoA to PPPoE and TLS settings on the same PVC 53 9 1 TLS PVC Delete Command ras adsl tlspvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci Syntax where Sportissto vpi Suc The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the TLS PVC The VCI of the TLS PVC This command clears TLS settings for the PVC 53 9 2 TLS PVC Set Command Syntax ras gt adsl tlspvc set Dc gt SO Fano ay where Sportissto lt vpi gt sport list gt vpl vcl D9 wvocprorrile US vcprorrile The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the TLS PVC IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands vci The VCI of the TLS PVC DS vcprofile Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s VOPLOCELE et upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile pvid 1 4094 the second VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes using this PVC pr
197. ce MAC address For downstream traffic When the IES 612 51A sees the destination IP address is specified in the RPVC or RPVC domain the IES 612 51A will strip out the MAC header and send them to the corresponding RPVC 27 1 1 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Example The following figure shows an example 2684 routed mode set up The gateway server uses IP address 192 168 10 102 and is in VLAN 1 The IES 612 51A uses IP address 192 168 20 101 The subscriber s device the CPE is connected to DSL port 1 on the IES 612 51A and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 The routed domain is the LAN IP addresses behind the CPE device The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and the LAN computer s IP address 1s 10 10 10 1 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers IES 612 51A User s Guide 195 Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Figure 96 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Example IP 192 168 10 102 IP 192 168 20 101 PVC 8 35 WAN IP 192 168 10 200 LAN IP 10 10 10 10 m c IP 10 10 10 1 Note the following The CPE device s WAN IP 192 168 10 200 in this example must be in the same subnet as the gateway s IP address 192 168 10 102 in this example The IES 612 51A s management IP address can be any IP address it doesn t have any relationship to the WAN IP address or routed gateway IP addr
198. ce the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Fuse Warning Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating Warning To avoid risk of electric shock remove only one card at a time and do not place fingers or objects inside the chassis Cover empty slots with slot covers The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7 mm Fan Module Warning Use the fan module handle when pulling out or pushing in the fan module Be careful not to put fingers or objects inside the fan module This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly IES 612 51A User s Guide IES 612 51A User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings D IES 612 51A User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview dyiipee biete ETT TRITT TT ITERUM 39 Genma O kron Me ESTIZ IA Re 41 Ee MIRI TELS E 45 diia gege 49 ICI E
199. configure switches in a VLAN network IES 612 51A User s Guide 145 Chapter 16 VLAN priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits The IES 612 51A handles up to 4094 VLANs VIDs 1 4094 The device accepts incoming frames with VIDs 1 4094 16 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the IES 612 51A first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the IES 612 51A first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed The egress outgoing port s of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination MAC address and the VID of the frame For a unicast frame the egress port based on the destination MAC address must be a member of the VID also otherwise the frame is blocked For a broadcast frame it is duplicated only o
200. connection s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent 1 sets the profile to trigger an alarm for an initialization failures trap 2 sets the profile to not trigger an alarm for an initialization failures trap 371 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands atuc fail The number of failed fast retrains that are permitted to occur tast within 15 minutes atuc ses The number of Severely Errored Seconds that are permitted Sabu DOT to occur within 15 minutes lt atuc uas gt The number of UnAvailable Seconds that are permitted to Se Sigon occur within 15 minutes This command configures settings and thresholds that define when the IES 612 514 is to send an alarm trap and generate a syslog entry Configure alarm profiles first and then use the alarmprofile map command to set the IES 612 514 to use them with specific DSL ports The following example sets an alarm profile named SESalarm that has the IES 612 51A send an alarm trap and generate a syslog whenever the upstream connection s number of severely errored seconds exceeds three within a 15 minute period Figure 254 Alarm Profile Set Command Example ras adsl alarmprofilo set SESalarm 0 0 9 9 0 0 E Err H 0 0 O 0 O 0 O Z2 E 23 prp 52 3 3 Alarm Profile Delete Command
201. creen is updated Figure 26 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup DS vr Profile US VC Profile PID f 1 4094 Priority Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port WPI WEI DS us vc Profile PVID Priority Select DEFVAL 11 Select the new channel s Select radio button Click Copy and then click Paste The following screen appears The following screen appears IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Configuration Figure 27 Select Ports 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 9 D DDDDDDU EU 10 12 EF ENET select E None ENET2 Apnty Cancel 12 Click All and then click Apply The VC Setup screen is updated Figure 28 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup auper Channel DS vc Profil USVC Profle F 1 4094 Priority Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port WPI Vcl DS us vc Profile TIEFE DEFWALS DEFVAL DEFWVAL 13 Click Config Save Config Save The Config Save screen appears Figure 29 Config Save Configsave According to data entries Saving process may take 10 seconds to several minutes Save 14 Click Save The following screen should appear IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Configuration Figure 30 Config Save Save Successful You can now use the device with the other settings set to the defaults to provide service to DSL subscribers See Section 56 4 on page 423 for information on other default settings IES 612 51A User s Gui
202. creen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 154 Filter Setup Click Filter Setup to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 17 6 on page 159 IGMP Mode Select Proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy Select Snooping to have the device passively learn multicast groups Select Disable to have the device not use either IGMP proxy or snooping Apply Click Apply to save your IGMP mode settings Clicking Apply saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 158 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 17 IGMP 17 6 IGMP Filter Setup Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Filter Setup This screen is discussed in Section 14 8 on page 135 17 7 IGMP Count Screen e at a time If each channel requires 4 5 Mbps of download bandwidth and the subscriber s connection supports 11 Mbps you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the DSL connection To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Count Setup Figure 73 IGMP Count IGMP Status Count Select s wm 16 O 0 18 0 18 5
203. ct L3 to have the ADSL connection use power saving mode and reduce the rate when there is no traffic The rate comes back up when there is traffic The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode Click Get PMM Mode to display which power mode the ADSL port is currently set to use ToneDiag Select a port number from the Port drop down list box The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode and have a connection Click Get ToneDiag data to display the ADSL port s tone diagnostics The tone diagnostic information displays in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard Use the information to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line Note ToneDiag is faster than the LDM test but displays less information IES 612 51A User s Guide 243 Chapter 37 Diagnostic 244 IES 612 51A Users Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table 38 1 Introduction to MAC Table The MAC table lists device MAC addresses that are dynamically learned by the IES 612 51A The table shows the following for each MAC address the port upon which Ethernet frames were received from the device to which VLAN groups the device belongs if any and to which channel it is connected for devices connected to DSL ports The device uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure Figure 126 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart ls destination MAC address in the MAC table Forward
204. ctets or less in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 65 127 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 65 to 127 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION packet 128 255 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 128 to 255 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 256 511 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 256 to 511 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 512 1023 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 512 to 1023 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 1024 1518 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 1522 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1519 to 1522 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitt
205. d L 4094 lt priority gt gt lt DS veprotilel US veprotile 2 where lt pOreliset gt lt vpi gt lt VC1 gt lt super vid lt priority gt DS vcprofile US voprortrle 378 You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 if the vpi is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi is not Q Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The IES 612 51A forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel The default VID 1 to 4094 Each PVC must have a unique VID since the IES 612 51A forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID You must assign a default VID 1 to 4094 and IEEE 802 1p default priority 0 to 7 to normal channels Each PVC must have a unique VID since the IES 612 51A forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID This is the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping Assign a VC profile to use for
206. dd to save the new rule to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Use this section to look at a summary of all static routes in the IES 612 51A Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of static route entries Index This field displays the index number of the route Name This field displays the name of this static route Destination Address This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Next Page Click this to display the following page of static route entries neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column IES 612 51A User s Guide Maintenance This chapter explains how to use the maintenance screens 36 1
207. ddress Resolution Protocol table 49 4 Statistics IP Command Syntax ras gt Statistics ip This command shows the statistics for the CPU IP traffic An example is shown next Figure 198 Statistics IP Command Example ras gt statistics ip Ethernet inet tg a eel ua netmask 0 0 0 0 broadcast 1524230209 012939 mtu 1500 in octet 10728504 in unicast 4 738 in multicast 232488 TIPO dscard 4 D drm error 0 in unknown proto 0 out octet 41361 out unicast 861 out multicast 0 out discard O out error 0 334 IES 612 51A User s Guide Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands This chapter tells you how to upload a new firmware and or configuration file for the IES 612 51A 50 1 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Overview The IES 612 51A s built in FTP server allows you to use any FTP client for example ftp exe in Windows to upgrade IES 612 51A firmware or configuration files The firmware or configuration file upgrade is done during operation run time Do not turn off the power to the IES 612 51A during the file transfer process as it may permanently damage your IES 612 51A The IES 612 51A automatically restarts when the upgrade process is complete 50 2 Filename Conventions The configuration file called config 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password IP address VLANs and so on The configuration file arrives with a rom file
208. de Home and Port Statistics Screens This chapter describes the Home status Port Statistics and RMON screens 6 1 Home Screen The Home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details To open this screen click Home in any web configurator screen Figure 31 Home Home J System Up Time days 19 30 31 ENET Status Port Hame Media Duplex Up Time Up engeti o 1 capper full duplex 15 30 18 Down enet ien Status Up Down stream Interleave Fast Up Time Down l Down Down Down Down Poll Intervali s 40 Set Interval Stop Fort i Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Home DESCRIPTION System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started The following fields are related to the Ethernet ports I j d l mn L ijed ia 9 This field displays the number of the Ethernet port Click a port number to display that port s statistics screen The Ethernet Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 6 1 1 on page 76 This field displays whether the Ethernet port is connected Up or not Down This field displays the name of the Ethernet port IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 5 Home continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Media This field displays the type of media
209. ded dropped This feature prevents clients from assigning their own static IP addresses 44 4 1 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcpsnoop enable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt This command activates the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port s The following example enables DHCP snooping on port 1 Figure 146 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Example ras switch dhcpsnoop enable 1 44 4 2 DHCP Snoop Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcpsnoop disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 IES 612 51A User s Guide 295 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands This command disables the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port s 44 4 3 DHCP Snoop Flush Command Syntax rasc swith dhaopsnoop flush lt port liste where portlist You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports 1 5 6 10 enet1 enet2 This command clears the DHCP snooping binding table on the specified port s The system also automatically clears the binding table when you disable DHCP snooping 44 4 4 DHCP Snoop Show
210. denrciweverses 339 Pee Empe Losa FTF g rcm 339 Figure 210 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A oo cece eeeeee eee eeee teeters 339 IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 List of Figures Figure 211 Example Enter the Management Password ENEE eene 339 Figure 212 Example Transfer the Firmware File ENEE 339 Foue 213 Example Goss FIr CIO ocupan bppE tor ener eae GUI dio DS puta 339 Figure 214 DSL Port Show Command Example usuusesictesacbe ie tbeixhe akvsed ib tepcnteutubtuba Genial a usadie beta qutn iE 343 Figure 215 DSL Profile Show Command Example ccsceeececeeeceeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeees 345 Figure 216 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 1 346 Figure 217 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 2 347 Figure 218 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example enn 347 Figure 219 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example uus eetepbioea eta epu Vez a vEi DAE Sato ree PIE en Geggd i get 348 Figure 220 DSL Port Name Command Example EE 348 Figure 221 DSL Port Tel Command Example euer 349 Figure 222 DSL Port Loopback Command Example ise ise eite rt esent tec iso abaci id oett iam aie 349 Figure 223 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Example sss 350 Figure 224 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Example sssssssnssossennreerrnnrrrrsrrrnrrrerrnrrreesrer erene 350 Figure 225 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Example sese 351 Figure 226 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Display Example
211. describes commonly used alarm command parameter notation Table 91 General Alarm Command Parameters NOTATION DESCRIPTION alarm opecify a category of alarms eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms Sys represents system alarms all specifies every alarm category severity Specify an alarm severity level critical major minor info or all Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe condition This is the text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm conditions 43 3 Alarm Show Command Syntax ras alarm show lt severity gt all lt alarm gt all lt condition gt all detail where detail Display in depth alarm information This command displays the current alarms by severity alarm category or alarm condition IES 612 51A User s Guide 283 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands The following example displays the current critical level alarms for all alarm categories and conditions The source is where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Figure 138 Alarm Show Command Example fas alarm tablelist no alarm condition facility snmp syslog severity clearable 1 dsl
212. describes the labels in this screen Table 28 IGMP Filter Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Profile Click Port Profile to configure port profiles and assign them to individual ports see Section 14 1 on page 125 VC Profile Click VC Profile to open the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 131 Alarm Profile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 133 Index This is the number of the IGMP filter profile Click a profile s index number to edit the profile You cannot edit the DEFVAL profile This name identifies the IGMP filter profile Delete Select the Delete check box and click Delete to remove an IGMP filter profile You cannot delete the DEFVAL profile Name Type a name to identify the IGMP filter profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Start IP Enter the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access End IP Enter the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 5
213. dress Command Example fasc ip set 192 168 3724 ras ip gateway 192 168 1 233 ras config save The IES 612 514A leaves the factory with a default management IP address of 192 168 1 1 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 ff ff ff 00 in hexadecimal notation and the default gateway set at 192 168 1 254 Make sure that you configure the IP parameters correctly before you connect a IES 612 51A to the network otherwise you may interrupt services already running 49 3 General IP Commands The following is a list of general IP commands that help with the management of the IP parameters 49 3 1 Show Syntax ras ip show inband outband Use the command to display the current management IP settings 49 3 2 Ping Command Syntax ras ip ping exp count This is an IP facility to check for network functionality by sending an echo request to another IP host and waiting for the reply 49 3 3 Route Set Command Syntax ras ip route set dst ip gt netmask gateway ip metric lt name gt ras ip route set default gateway ip metric 332 IES 612 51A User s Guide where SS up netmask gateway ip metric lt name gt default Chapter 49 IP Commands The destination IP address of packets that this static route 1s to route The destination subnet mask of packets that this static route is to route The IP address of the gateway that you want to send the packets through The metri
214. ducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management When the IES 612 51A forwards traffic to a subscriber port it tries to forward traffic to a normal PVC with the same VLAN ID If this PVC does not exist the IES 612 51A uses the super channel instead This applies to all downstream traffic not just multicast traffic It is suggested to use a super channel for multicast VLAN If a normal PVC is used and the multicast VLAN ID is not the same as the PVC s VID the IES 612 51A does not forward traffic to this PVC even if the subscriber s port has joined the multicast VLAN Since the IES 612 51A might change the subscriber s VLAN ID to the multicast VLAN ID both the subscriber s port and the Ethernet port should join the multicast VLAN 19 2 MVLAN Status Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of all multicast VLAN on the IES 612 51A To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN Figure 77 MVLAN Status D MYLAN Status MYLAN Setup MYLAN Group The Humber Of MYLAN 1 Status Mame YID 8g 110111112 ENET EMET2 Index example 5 JuJu U IES 612 51A User s Guide 165 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 MVLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Setup Click MVLAN Setup to open the MVLAN Setup screen where you can configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 3 on page 166
215. e AC Name Service Name Counter Status PPP LCP Config Request FFF LCP Echo Request FFF LCP Echo Reply PPPoE PADI PPPoE PADO PPPoE PADR PPPoE PADS PPPoE PADT PPPoE Service Mame Error PPPoE AC System Error PPPoE Generic Error The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 PPPoA to PPPoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoA to PPPoE Click PPPoA to PPPoE to open the screen where you can set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port see Section 28 2 on page 203 PVC This field displays the port number VPI and VCI of the PVC Session State This field displays whether or not the current session is Up or Down Session ID This field displays the ID of the current session It displays 0 if there is no Current session Session Uptime This field displays how long the current session has been up AC Name This field displays the hostname of the remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator 206 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE Table 64 PPPoA to PPPoE Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name This field specifies the name of the service that uses this PVC Counter Status Tx Rx The values in these columns are for packets transmitted t x or received rx by the IES 612 51A PPP LCP This field displays the number of config request PDUs received by the IES 61
216. e Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Apply Gateway Click Apply Gateway setting to save your changes to the device s IP address setting and or subnet mask to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again IES 612 51A User s Guide 103 Chapter 11 IP Setup 104 IES 612 51A User s Guide IES 612 51A User s Guide ENET Port Setup The ENET Port Setup screen allows you to configure settings for the Ethernet ports To open this screen click Basic Setting ENET Port Setup Figure 45 ENET Port Setup ED ENETH Port Active Hame Speed Mode Duplex EMET1 m lenetl auto Full Duplex ENET m auto zl Full Duplex Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 ENET Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the port index number Select the check box to turn on the port Clear it to disable the port Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Spe
217. e Set the down stream transfer rate in Kilobits per second that serves as the threshold for whether the port is to use the LO or the L2 power mode The system changes from LO mode to L2 mode when the downstream transfer rate stays below this threshold for LO Time The system changes back from L2 mode to LO mode when the downstream transfer rate goes above this threshold This rate must be less than or equal to one half of the Min L2 Rate and at least 16 Kbps Use this part of the screen to mask carrier tones Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the ADSL port Do this to have the system not use an ADSL line s tones that are known to have a high noise level Each mask can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 00000000 ffffffff Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask US Carrier Mask0 represents tones 0 31 Mask1 represents tones 32 63 The most significant bit defines Tone 0 In other words 0x00000001 means tone 31 For example you could use Oxfffff000 to disable upstream carrier tones 0719 and leave tones 20 31 enabled DS CarrierO Mask1 represents tones 32 63 327255 Mask2 represents tones 64 95 Mask3 represents tones 96 127 Mask4 represents tones 128 159 Mask5 represents tones 160 191 Mask6 represents tones 192 223 Mask7 represents tones 224 255 Fo
218. e VPI of the PAE PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PAE PVC This command displays the status of PPPoA to PPPoE PVC sessions on the specified port s or PVCs The following example displays the settings for port 1 Figure 285 PAE PVC Session Command Example ras adsl paepvc session 1 pvc 157 99 Session state down Session id 2 0 session uptime 0 secs acname srvcname 53 8 5 PAE PVC Counter Command Syntax ras adsl paepve counter lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Svola where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt 394 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC The VCI of the PAE PVC lt vci gt This command displays statistics about PPPoA to PPPoE PVC activity The following example displays the statistics for port 1 Figure 286 PAE PVC Counter Command Example ras adsl paepvc counter 1 pvc 191 323 ppp lcp config request ppp lcp eoho requestc ppp lep echo reply pppoe padi pppoe pado pppoe padr pppoe pads pppoe padt pppoe srvcname error pppoe ac system error O 0 O 0 0 0 0 O 0 pppoe generic error Each value is described below tx rx The values in these columns are for packets transmitted t x or received rx by the IES 612 51A
219. e memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 132 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 14 6 Alarm Profile Screen Alarm profiles define ADSL port alarm thresholds The IES 612 51A sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup Alarm Profile Use the top part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles The rest of the screen displays the configured alarm profiles Figure 59 Alarm Profile Nui gm Port Profile VC Profile IGMP Filter Profile Name Ada Cancel Threshold ATU C ATU R Threshold ATU C ATU R 15 Min LOF Init Failure Trap Active 15 Min LOS Fast Rate Up bps 15 Min LOL Fast Rate Down i bps 15 Min LPR Interleave Rate Up i bps i o o 15 Min ES seconds 3 Interleave Rate Down i bps yo o 15 Min SES seconds 15 Min UASE seconds 15 Min Failed Fast Retrain Alarm profiles with DSL port mapping Please click the to mapping a XDSL part to a new alarm profile Index Marne DEFVAL The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Alarm Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Po
220. e on the classified traffic to 1000 kbps and changes the priority level to 7 Figure 289 ACL Profile Set Command Example ras switch acl profile set test vlan 10 priority 2 rate 1000 rpri 7 400 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 54 ACL Commands 54 1 2 ACL Profile Delete Command Syntax ras switch acl profile delete lt name gt where name The name of the ACL profile This command removes the specified ACL profile LES You cannot remove the ACL profile s that is currently in use 54 1 3 ACL Profile Show Map Command Syntax ras switch acl profile showmap lt name gt where lt name gt The name of the ACL profile This command displays the DSL port s to which the specified ACL profile 1s applied The following example displays the port mapping table for the example ACL profile Figure 290 ACL Profile Show Map Command Example ras gt switch acl profile showmap test profile test port type 54 1 4 ACL Profile Show Command Syntax ras gt switch acl profile show lt name gt where lt name gt The name of the ACL profile This command lists the names of every ACL profile or displays the detailed settings of the specified ACL profile IES 612 51A User s Guide 401 Chapter 54 ACL Commands Figure 291 ACL Profile Show Command Example ras switch acl profile show test profile test rule vlan 10 Priority 2 action rpri ty rate 1000 54 2 ACL Assignment C
221. e rubber feet help protect the IES 612 51A from shock or vibration and ensure space between IES 612 51A when stacking IES 612 51A User s Guide 45 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Figure 3 Attaching Rubber Feet BS Do not block the ventilation holes Leave space between IES 612 51A when stacking 2 2 2 Rack Mounted Installation 2 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements The IES 612 51A can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your IES 612 51A on a standard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit LS Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains LES Make sure the position of the IES 612 51A does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit e Use a 2 Philips screwdriver to install the screws e See Chapter 56 on page 417 for the gauge of wire to use for the frame ground connections LES Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation LES Do not block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking 2 2 2 2 Rack Mounted Installation Procedure Do the following to rack mount the IES 612 51A The figures in this section are examples and are not intended as an exact representation of the IES 612 51A 1
222. e shows the settings for DSL port 1 Figure 150 VLAN Port Show Command Example ras switch vlan portshow 3 port pvid priority frametype 45 4 2 VLAN PVID Command Syntax Las Switch vlan pvid lt porclist gt pvrd where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports 1 3 enet1 You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt lt pvid gt The VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command sets a default VLAN ID for all untagged packets that come in through the specified port The following example sets the default VID of port 1 to 200 Figure 151 VLAN PVID Command Example ras switch vlan pvid 1 200 45 4 3 VLAN Priority Command Syntax Lag Switch vlan Priority DorLlTsL prriority 300 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt you can also include a range of ports 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 to use for incoming frames with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag This command sets the priority of incoming frames with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets a priority of three for frames with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag that come in on DSL port 2 Figure 152 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras gt switch vlan priority 2 3
223. e the DSL line Note that the default value will be used for any of the above fields that are omitted The upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the profile set command the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps The DSL up down shift noise margins define the threshold that triggers rate adaptation For example The target SNR is 6 and the up down shift noise margins are 9 3 If the signal becomes better and the SNR 1s higher than 9 rate adaptation 1s triggered and the line rate becomes higher If the signal becomes bad and the SNR is lower than 3 rate adaptation is triggered and the line rate becomes lower The following example creates a premium profile named gold for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds and no interleave delay It also sets the upstream target signal noise margin to 5 db the upstream minimum acceptable signal noise margin to 0 db the upstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 30 db the upstream minimum DSL transmission rate to 128 Kbps the downstream target signal noise margin to 5 db the downstream minimum acceptable signal
224. each port number Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN Table 44 MVLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 19 4 MVLAN Group Screen Use this screen to configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN MVLAN Group Figure 79 MVLAN Group MYLAN Group lt MYLAN Status MYLAN Setup WLAN ID 5 Index a Start Multicast IF 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Apply Cancel WYLAN ID 5 Mame example State Disable Entry Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP 1 224 1 1 0 224 1 1 255 Delete
225. eam ES ATUC ATUR The downstream or upstream number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS Fast FEBE In fast mode the number of Far End Block Errors Far End Cyclic Redundancy Checks Fast NEBE In fast mode the number of Near End Block Errors Near End Cyclic Redundancy Checks Fast FEFEC In fast mode the Far End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward Error Correction Fast NEFEC In fast mode the Near End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward Error Correction Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Far End Block Errors Far End Cyclic FEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Near End Block Errors Near End Cyclic NEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the Far End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward FEC Error Correction Interleaved In interleaved mode the Near End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward NEFEC Error Correction LPR This is the number of times that the subscriber s ADSL device has experienced a Loss of Power been off TI LU TI m 15 min 1day history This section of the screen displays line performance statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods as well as for the current and previous 24 hours lofs The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds that have occurred within the period loss The number of Loss Of Signal Seconds that have occurred within the period lols The number of Loss Of Link Seconds that have occurred wi
226. ecisio To V LANS MNT TK 299 ss EER SU AIU Tadino TOOS RUM 299 Soa aisi pagis MM mee 299 45 3 1 Static Entries SVLAN RT EE 299 45 4 IEEE VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands sese 300 45 4 1 VLAN Port Show Command RE 300 154 2 VLAN PYD COMMANDO BEE 300 Be VLAN redi disi c NR T IM 300 45 4 4 VLAN Set Command EE 301 45 4 5 VLAN Frame Type Command WEE 302 45 4 6 VLAN CPU Show Command teen ebeededeeegge geg ege gg 303 ASAF LAN CPU Set IN srin RU c TEE 303 45 4 8 Configuring Management VLAN Example seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne 304 4504 9 YLAN Ballo Command tte ege 304 S LAM ENEE 305 Qu IB CHE o EE EE 305 45 6 1 VLAN Show Command ER 305 Chapter 46 MAL E EEN 307 46 1 MAC Commands Overvi W tte 307 Tel EE ut EE 307 46 2 1 MAG Filter Show LO TII RE 307 46 2 2 MAC Filter Enable Commande 308 46 2 3 MAC Filter Disable Commande 308 46 2 4 MAC Filter Mode Command BEEN 308 46 2 5 MAC Filter Set Command ME 309 46 2 6 MAC Filter Delete Command RE 309 SO MAL COUN COMMA E eaaa Ea Ra EEDA AENA ENEA 310 46 3 1 MAC Count Show Command RE 310 46 3 2 MAC Count Enable Commande 310 46 3 3 MAC Count Disable Command eeseeseeeeeeeeeee eee rennen nein nar ek nna 311 46 3 4 MAC Count Set Commande 311 Chapter 47 eil e nu Tu CN 313 SYN I Pn ESI co Arm PTT 313 e BER Co Boo ee GO E nerT er vera 313 75 2 1 E EE EE Agenten EG 313 47 2 2 IGMP Snoop Enable EEENEEER egegeiee eegen ege gEeeegteg Egger 313 47 2
227. eck box to have the system send this alarm to a syslog server Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info for this alarm Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Clearable Select this check box to allow administrators to use the management interface to remove an alarm report generated by this alarm event entry Select this check box to keep an alarm report generated by this alarm event in the system until the conditions that caused the alarm report are no longer present IES 612 51A User s Guide 253 Chapter 40 Alarm Table 86 Alarm Event Setup Edit continued DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Close to exit the screen without saving your changes 40 5 Alarm Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Port Setup Figure 132 Alarm Port Setup e Bite a Alarm Status Alarm Event Setup Port Severity 1 Min
228. ecpepo IP address and secret high middle low d eny EE show livetetise portlist Displays the ADSL settings the ADSL settings KE portlisto Turns on the specified heic MEME ports ports profile show orori re Displays profile contents Co profile set profile rast Creates an adsl line profile interleave lt up delay gt lt down delay gt gt lt up max rate gt lt down max rate gt lt up target margin gt lt up min margin gt lt up max margin gt lt up min rate gt lt down target margin gt lt down min margin gt lt down max margin gt lt down min rate gt lt up down shift margin up p shift mafgin down down shift margin down up shift margin gt profile map SDortlisto Assigns a specific profile to a profile port s and sets the ports ADSL glite gdmt t1413 Mode 24 enue ur name 0 portlist name _ portlist name _ Sets the name of a Setsthenameofapott s lt portiast gt lt tel gt Records an tee port s subscriber s telephone m loopback pore lsc SUB Performs an OAMFS5 loopback svol lt Vei gt test vcprofile show vcprofile Shows a virtual channel profiles L L contents IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P H H Lec MN set vcprofile Creates a UBR or CBR virtual lt vc lle gt ubr cbr c
229. ed LABEL DESCRIPTION Privilege Select a privilege level to determine which screens the administrator can use There is a high medium or low privilege level for each command Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Index This field displays the number of the user account Click an account s index number to use the top of the screen to edit it Enable This field displays a V if you have the administrator account turned on It displays a if the administrator account is turned off Name This field displays the administrator account s user name Privilege This field displays the administrator account s access level high middle or low Select Select this check box and click the Delete button to remove an ad
230. ed Mode Select the type of Ethernet connection for this port When you don t use auto negotiation you must make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Select Auto auto negotiation to have the IES 612 51A automatically determine the type of connection that the Ethernet port has When the peer Ethernet device has auto negotiation turned on the IES 612 51A negotiates with the peer to determine the connection speed If the peer Ethernet port does not have auto negotiation turned on the IES 612 51A determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using full duplex Select 10 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 10 MB electrical connection Select 100 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 100 MB electrical connection The IES 612 51A uses full duplex Ethernet connections by default Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 12 ENET Port Setup 106 IES 612 51A User s Guide xDSL Port Setup This chapter explains how to configure settings for profiles and individual ADSL ports It also covers how to configure virtual channels and virtual channel profiles 13 1 ADSL Standard
231. ed packets broadcast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted broadcast frames multicast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted multicast frames octet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted octets unicast multicast and broadcast Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then Set Interval an clicking Set Interval Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to Clear Counter erase the recorded statistical information for that port Heset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 2 DSL Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to display statistics about a DSL port To open this screen click a DSL port s number in the Home screen IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 33 Port Statistics DSL e NI rnkEcmr RMON Return DSL pol Fart Name Tx packets 327528 Rx packets U Tx broadcast packets 327448 Rx broadcast packets Tx discard packets Rx discard packets Errors Tx rate Rx rate Tx bytes 40182162 Rx bytes j VI VCI ER Tx Packets 327528 Rx Packets DU Tx rate 212 Rx rate DU Tx calls T58154 Rx calls DU Err
232. eeesseeaeeeeeseaas 387 Flug 275 HPV SNOW Command une TEEN 388 Figure 276 RPVC Delete Command Example 388 Figure 277 RPVC Route Set Command E 389 Figure 278 RPVC Route Show Command Example EE 390 Figure 279 RPVC Route Delete Command Example ccccccsseccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeees 390 Figure 280 RPVC ARP Agingtime Command Example cccccceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesaas 391 Figure 281 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example A 391 Figure 282 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example sse 391 Figuro 2893 FAE FVG Se Ennen 393 Figure 284 PAE PVC Show Command Example _ ccccccccccsceesssecceeecnssecssenseeseeeesscceesseneeeessnensneeees 394 Figure 285 PAE PVC Session Command Example 12 ict petente petias Seen Seegen SEENEN 394 Figure 286 PAE PVC Counter Command Example ausssaxxtemsspetbrteves lan ddyvu Miu pres uU PM eebe Eee VIA 395 Figure 287 TLS PVC Set Command Example ere Eegeregie 397 Figure 288 TLS PYC Show Command EXample tegen age K EE 398 Figure 289 ACL Profile Set Command Example zs etseetierdtaieiakei e eicht gie enbe eieiei eebe hebeebet tee 400 Figure 290 ACL Profile Show Map Command Example cccccceccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 401 Figure 291 ACL Profile Show Command A Tue ENEE 402 Figure 292 ACL Assignment Set Command Example csccccccceeesecceeseeseeeceeseaeeeeceeeeeseeseeeeteaas 402
233. efined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 14 3 1 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR is an ATM traffic class that provides fixed bandwidth CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice 14 3 1 2 Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time rt VBR or non real time nrt VBR connections The rt VBR real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an rt VBR connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The nrt VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an nrt VBR connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers 14 3 1 3 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is similar to the ABR traffic class for bursty data transfers However while ABR gives subscribers a set amount of bandwidth UBR
234. el E EE 59 mirodusmng thie Web Conio IOP NET ER 61 OU Re ue n EE 69 Home and Port Stalistics EENEG 79 A O araa i r A 87 Dn EE 91 Rcg E gier 93 ER PERIERE E EAE E T AS 97 Ier WEEN 103 EHET SH DEB gege 105 NL PARTLSBIU EE 107 GERUNT n ERREUR 125 V MEINE NET Tr 137 e HR e EE 143 UE APTE UE HR 145 IE IRR NIKE 153 GUI UIN EE 163 ZE E MT e 9 A 165 guise rcr c P H 171 IG EE 173 Danma Be irienner cin SE Hep Di PHtImgevi cote ei HERE eb 175 axxo PET I T D RU 181 nl A e P 185 Raiber EE 187 LIU SD doesriRUHIEYUR MN MINIME NM MI DIEN qM NIMM MINIMA 191 HELL UB Hose EE Luisa ViarapuieFiclendpiatisve EEEE Dr IMEEM RUE 195 PPPOA ig EE 203 ple Tc H 209 jt e YX O0 OO 211 or 215 Bac acia e RESTI T TL t TTE EE 221 IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 Contents Overview BERI AER 223 ve o B 6 1 E 225 Routing Protocol Alarm and Management cessere eere 233 wor edi Ulp ARN EN E 235 ys qicg e 237 Boni que E 241 De P r o 245 B
235. elect this check box to activate syslog system logging and then configure the syslog parameters described in the following fields Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server The log facility is specified in Alarm gt Alarm Event Setup See Section 40 4 on page 251 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh IES 612 51A User s Guide 223 Chapter 33 Syslog 224 IES 612 51A User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to configure access control 34 1 Access Control Screen Use this screen to configure SNMP and enable disable remote service access To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Figure 113 Access Control KSE SMMP Click here Service Access Control Click here Secured Client Click here 34 2 Access Control Overview A console port or Telnet session can coexist with one FTP session a web configurator session and or limitless SNMP access control sessions Table 73 Access Control Summary CONSOLE 34 3 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a me
236. emory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Down Shift SNR The downstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the downstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and 14 2 ATM QoS ATM Quality of Service QoS mechanisms provide the best service on a per flow guarantee ATM network infrastructure was designed to provide QoS It uses fixed cell sizes and built in traffic management see Section 14 3 on page 128 This allows you to fine tune the levels of services on the priority of the traffic flow IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 14 3 Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping 1s an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections BS Traffic shaping controls outgoing downstream traffic not incoming upstream 14 3 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes d
237. emove member PVCs 53 4 1 PPVC Set Command Syntax raso adsl ppve set lt portilist gt vpl vol oncap pvigdg lt priority gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 9 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands vci lt encap gt lt pvid gt ApPLIOrIcCy gt This command creates a PPVC The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 if the vpi is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi is not 0 This PVC channel is for internal use The operator does not need to create this PVC on the subscriber s device the CPE The type of encapsulation llc vemux Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this PPVC This is the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag The following example creates a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 The PPVC uses llc encapsulation and default VID 25 Any frames received without an IEEE 802 1p priority tag will be assigned a priority of 3 The IES 612 514A uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device Figure 263 PPVC Set Command Example fasc adsl ppvc set 5 8 35 llc 25 3 53 4 2 PPVC Member Set Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc member set lt po
238. ems with the physical DSL line BES Wait at least one minute after using the line diagnostic set command before using this command IES 612 51A User s Guide 365 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The following example displays the line diagnostics results for DSL port 1 Figure 249 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command Example ras adsl linediag getl1d992 3 1 port 1 number_of_subcarries 256 32 hlinScale 17024 32767 latn Ziel 0 2 satn 2 0 0 0 snrm 0 0 6 0 attndr 10398468 1152000 farEndActatp 20 4 12 4 i li rl li im log dB QLN dBm SNR dB N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Od 00796 s ch 120 43477 E 120 28313 67576 equ 01016 86645 119 28423 89969 118 48750 85403 118 63495 79630 T T8 cu 3 75644 LIT 84457 5 125 14 117 89389 68549 SEN 90713 64631 114 vd op 63196 116 95053 64860 eJ 29 d d Gok 61565 es o9 JI6l 692111 com Z N D 0 i z 3 4 o 6 F 8 NWO C0 CH COL Cc On Porn RARER DW VO 0g 0 CH c On mn CH On CO CH mn CH O1 CH On 0ga O c c Om mn OO OD OCH O81 OF O10 On o oa ta b L ta t OO The following table lists the line diagnostics test parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 97 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subc
239. en the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 131 Alarm Profile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 133 IES 612 51A User s Guide 125 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 25 Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 135 This is the port profile index number Name These are the names of individual profiles The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Latency Mode This is the ADSL latency mode Fast or Interleave for the ports that belong to this profile Down Up Stream These are the maximum downstream and upstream transfer rates for the ports Rate kbps that belong to this profile Select Select a profile s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile Modify Select a profile s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile Delete BERE The rest of the screen is for profile configuration Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name up to 31 characters for the profile Latency Mode This field sets the ADSL l
240. eply PDU If there is a mismatch the IES 612 51A drops this PDU This is not recorded as an PPPoE AC System Error in the PPPoA to PPPoE Status screen however Service Name This field is optional Specify the name of the service that uses this PVC This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator Hellotime Specify the timeout in seconds for the PPPoE session Enter 0 if there is no timeout Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display PPPoA to PPPoE conversion settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to open the screen where you can look at the current status of this PPPoA to PPPoE conversion See Section 28 3 on page 206 Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtua
241. er and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 39 2 ARP Table Screen IES 612 51A User s Guide The ARP table can hold up to 500 entries To open this screen click Management ARP Table 247 Chapter 39 ARP Table Figure 128 ARP Table ARP Table Flush Total 1 ARP entries Page 1 of 1 Index IP Address MAC Address 1l 192 168 1 33 00 50 Gd 48 53 1 Previous Page Hext Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table Total X ARP Entries This displays the number of entries in the ARP table Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address Previous Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding or following screen if the Next Page information cannot be displayed in one screen 248 IES 612 51A User s Guide Alarm This chapter shows you how to display the alarms sets the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s and set port alarm severity level thresh
242. er is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN Implicit Tagging The MAC Media Access Control number the port or other information is used to identify the source of a VLAN frame The IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging It is important for the IES 612 51A to determine what devices are VLAN aware and VLAN unaware so that it can decide whether to forward a tagged frame to a VLAN aware device or first strip the tag from a frame and then forward it to a VLAN unaware device 45 3 Filtering Databases A filtering database stores and organizes VLAN registration information useful for switching frames to and from the IES 612 51A A filtering database consists of static entries Static VLAN or SVLAN table 45 3 1 Static Entries SVLAN Table Static entry registration information is added modified and removed by administrators only IES 612 51A User s Guide 299 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 45 4 IEEE VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands These switch commands allow you to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 45 4 1 VLAN Port Show Command Syntax ras switch vlan portshow portlist where portlist You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 This command displays the port s IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag settings The following exampl
243. er s Guide Chapter 17 IGMP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Bandwidth Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Setup Click Bandwidth Setup to open the IGMP Bandwidth screen where you can set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels see Section 17 4 on page 156 This field shows each DSL port number This field shows whether or not multicast bandwidth requirements are enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Bandwidth Enter the maximum acceptable multicast bandwidth for this port This has no effect if bandwidth requirements are disabled Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on this port Active Click this to enable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Inactive Click this to disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 17 5 IGMP Setup Screen Use this screen to configure your IGMP settings To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Setup Figure 72 IGMP Setup Ac GEBEN IGMP Status Filter Setup IGMP Mode Disable Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 IGMP Setup IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup s
244. erage This field displays the average voltage measured at this sensor Threshold Low This field displays the lowest voltage limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest voltage limit at this sensor Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Abnormal is displayed Use this section of the screen to configure the hardware monitor threshold settings New threshold Configure new threshold settings in the fields below and click Apply to use Apply them Temperature Hi Use these fields to configure the highest temperature limit at each sensor Temperature Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest temperature limit at each sensor IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 7 System Information Table 11 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Volt Hi Use these fields to configure the highest voltage limit at each sensor Volt Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest voltage limit at each sensor Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling IES 612 51A User s Guide DI Chapter 7 System Information Ei IES 612 51A User s Guide General Setup The General Setup screen allows you to configure general device identification information It
245. ere portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the packet type filter settings on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the packet type filter settings for DSL ports 1 and 2 V displays for the packet types that the IES 612 51A is to accept on the port displays for packet types that the IES 612 51A is to reject on the port packet types that are not listed are accepted When you use PPPoE only appears for all of the packet types With PPPoE only the IES 612 51A rejects all packet types except for PPPoE packet types that are not listed are also rejected Figure 191 Packet Filter Show Command Example ras switch pktfilter show 1 2 Vi pass through sp filter out f Don t care E Enable D Disable port pppoe ip arp netbios dhcp eapol igmp PPPoE Only IES 612 51A User s Guide 327 Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands 48 1 2 Packet Filter Set Command Syntax ras switch pktfilter set lt portlist gt filter where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt filter pppoe Reject PPPoE packets Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Etherne
246. erence received including interference that may cause undesired operations IES 612 51A User s Guide 429 Appendix A Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This 1s a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ECK SEL EE EB Ee es 18 AQ Be HIBE SEXSJTE TIR TExS STBIM P E EE Soe Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel co
247. ess The IES 612 51A s management IP address should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the WAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device It is suggested that you set the netmask of the subscriber s WAN IP address to 32 to avoid this problem The IES 612 51A s management IP address should not be in the same subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain It will make the IES 612 51A confused if the IES 612 51A receives a packet with this IP as destination IP The IES 612 51A s management IP address also should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the LAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device Make sure you assign the IP addresses properly In general deployment the computer must set the CPE device s LAN IP address 10 10 10 10 in this example as its default gateway The subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain must be unique 27 2 2684 Routed PVC Screen Use this screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode 196 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Figure 97 RFC 2684 Routed PVC 2684 Routed PYG Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Houted Gateway fi x Gateway IP loc 1 p VCI o o c o 0 NetMask fo 1 32 DSVC Profle Iso gt US VC Profile Index Port VPI WEI DS US vc Profile Hethiask Gateway IP Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the la
248. esses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems EAPOL Pass EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 over LAN EAP is used through with IEEE 802 1x to allow additional authentication methods besides RADIUS to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients IGMP Pass through Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts Click Add or Apply to save the filter settings The settings then display in the D summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Add or Apply saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh MEE This table shows the DSL port packet filter settings Port These are the numbers of the DSL ports Click this number to edit the port s filter settings in the section at the top PPPoE IP ARP These are the packet filter settings for each port NetBios DHCP V displays for the packet types that the IES 612 51A is to accept on the port EAPOL IGMP displays for packet types that the IES 612 51A is to reject on the port packet PPPoE Only types that are not lis
249. ete gold 52 1 7 DSL Port Profile Map Command Syntax ras adsl protile map lt pottlist gt profi le gt gt lt glite gdmt t1413 auto adsl2 ads12 gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt profile gt The profile that will define the settings of this port lt glite gdmt ets The ADSL operational mode il lt1413 autol lad sl2 ads1l12 gt This command assigns a specific profile to an individual port and sets the port s operational mode or standard The profile defines the maximum and minimum upstream downstream rates the target upstream downstream signal noise margins and the maximum and minimum upstream downstream acceptable noise margins of all the DSL ports to which you assign the profile When set to auto the port follows whatever mode is set on the other end of the line IES 612 51A User s Guide 347 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Es When the mode is set to auto the connection rates are governed by the negotiated operational mode regardless of the rates configured in the profile For example if the profile is set to use a rate of 18000 Kbps that speed is only supported if the negotiated operational mode is ADSL 2 Any other operational mode will limit the rate to what is supported by the specific standard When the mode is set to auto the t1413 mode h
250. ex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the imaginary part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale It is measured in dB This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture 52 2 10 SELT Diagnostic Set Command Syntax ras adsl linediag setselt port number This command has the IES 612 51A perform a single end line test on the specified port This test checks the distance to the subscriber s location AS The port must have an open loop There cannot be a DSL device phone fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber s end of the telephone line
251. f all of the information cannot be seen in one screen Flush Click Flush to remove all of the dynamically learned MAC address entries from the MAC table 246 IES 612 51A User s Guide ARP Table This chapter describes the ARP Table 39 1 Introduction to ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 39 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device the device s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the device puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the targets MAC address swaps the send
252. ferent priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them For example you want to give high priority to voice service on one of the ADSL ports Use the Edit Static VLAN screen to configure a static VLAN on the IES 612 51A for voice on the port Use the ADSL Edit Port Channel Setup screen to Configure a channel on the port for voice service e Set the channel to use the PVID of the static VLAN you configured e Assign the channel a high priority 13 8 1 Super Channel The IES 612 51A forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel IES 612 51A User s Guide i5 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 13 8 2 LLC LLC is a type of encapsulation where one VC Virtual Circuit carries multiple protocols with each packet header containing protocol identifying information Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 13 8 3 VC Mux VC Mux is a type of encapsulatio
253. ffic Select L3 to use both power management modes L2 and L3 L3 puts the ADSL connection to sleep mode LO power mode uses no power reduction See the ITU T G992 3 standard for more on PMM and the power modes states Enable Seamless Rate Adaptation SRA to have the IES 612 51A automatically adjust the connection s data rate according to line conditions without interrupting service Sudden spikes in the line s noise level impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the ADSL physical layer connection against impulse noise This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds It is recommended that you use a non zero setting for real time traffic that has no error correction like videoconferencing US INP Set the minimum upstream US impulse noise protection setting DS INP Set the minimum downstream DS impulse noise protection setting Max US TX PSD Specify the maximum upstream transmit power The unit of measure is 0 1 dBm Hz for example to set the maximum upstream transmit power to 10 dBm Hz set this value to 100 Max DS TX PSD opecify the maximum downstream transmit power The unit of measure is O 1 dBm Hz for example to set the maximum downstream transmit power to 10 dBm Hz set this value to 100 LO Time Set the minimum time in seconds that the ADSL line must stay in LO power mode before changing to the L2 power mode
254. fic see Section 27 3 on page 198 Routed Gateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 200 Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen where you can configure routed PVC settings see Section 27 2 on page 196 Aging Time Enter a number of seconds 10 10000 to set how long the device keeps the Address Resolution Protocol table s entries of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode Enter 0 to disable the aging time Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save your changes to the IES 612 51 A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring This field displays the number of the IP address entry Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which the device sends the traffic that it receives from this entry s IP address V This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the device adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway ID This field displays the subscriber s MAC Media Access Control address Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table 27 5 2684 Routed Gateway Screen Use this screen to configure gateway settings To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode Routed Gateway 200 IES 612 51A User s Guide
255. figuration d Restore Configuration d To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display a Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore conf 0 is the name of the configuration file on the device so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen lt gt If you load an invalid configuration file it may corrupt the settings and you might have to use the console to reconfigure the system 36 4 Backing Up a Configuration File Backing up your device configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 36 Maintenance Click Management Maintenance and do the following to save your device s configuration to your computer 1 Right click the Click here Backup Text Configuration link and click Save Target As Or Click the Click here Backup Text Configuration link and then click File Save As 2 Inthe Save As screen choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the
256. from the IES 612 51A Table 110 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Ping the IES 612 51A from the SNMP server If you cannot check the cable connections and IP configuration Check to see that the community or trusted host in the IES 612 51A matches the SNMP server s community Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured trusted host IP address if configured Incorrectly configuring the access control settings may lock you out from using in band management Try using the console port to reconfigure the system 412 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 55 14 Telnet I cannot telnet into the IES 612 514A Table 111 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure that the number of current telnet sessions does not exceed the maximum allowed number You cannot have more than five telnet sessions at one time Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured secured client IP address if configured The IES 612 51A immediately disconnects the telnet session if secured host IP addresses are configured and your computer s IP address does not match one of them Make sure that you have not disabled the Telnet service or changed the server port number that the IES 612 51A uses for Telnet Ping the IES 612 51A from your computer If you are able to ping the IES 612 514 but are still unable to telnet contact the distributor If you cannot ping t
257. fs gt lofs gt loss gt loss gt lols gt lprs gt lprs gt ess gt ess gt fast interleave rateup gt lt atur interleave rateup gt lt atuc ratedown gt lt atur fast ratedown gt lt atuc fast interleave ratedown gt lt atur interleave ratedown gt lt init fail enable gt IES 612 51A Users Guide A name for the alarm profile up to 31 ASCII characters Upstream These parameters are for the connection or traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the IES 612 51A Downstream These parameters are for the connection or traffic going from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber s device The number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss of Power seconds that are permitted to occur on the ATUR within 15 minutes The number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes A rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode
258. g the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANS This allows a service provider to provide different services based on specific VLANS for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags to traffic The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate Before the IES 612 51A sends the frames from the customers the VLAN ID is added to the frames When packets intended for specific customers are received on the IES 612 51A the outer VLAN tag is removed before the traffic is sent 30 1 1 TLS Network Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANSs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 Chapter 30 TLS PVC Figure 106 Transparent LAN Service Network Exa
259. ges of VLAN status information there are The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the VLANs This is the VLAN index number Name VID The name identifies an individual VLAN The vid is the PVID the Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port 1712 enert enet2 These columns display the VLAN s settings for each port A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows that this VLAN was added to the IES 612 51A statically that is added as a permanent entry IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 16 VLAN Table 32 VLAN Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Click Stop to halt polling statistics Previous Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding following screen if the Next Page information cannot be displayed in one screen 16 4 Static VLAN Setting Screen You can assign a port to be a member of a VLAN group or prohibit a port from joining a VLAN group in this screen This is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN To o
260. gnated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 This field identifies the Ethernet port Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is uH assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory
261. ground information on DHCP relay 44 1 1 Show Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay show This command displays whether or not the DHCP relay feature is activated which relay mode the IES 612 51A is using the current list of DHCP servers by VLAN the status of the DHCP relay agent info option 82 feature and the information configured for it Figure 145 Show Command Example ras switch dhcprelay show DHCP relay status disable DHCP relay mode auto Server list index vid primary server secondary server Jala AA rss lcu e 9 LA A D 214 e AL be ALO A Options sub optl into Circuit ID 44 1 2 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay enable This command turns on the DHCP relay feature IES 612 51A User s Guide 291 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 44 1 3 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay disable This command turns off the DHCP relay feature 44 1 4 Server Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay server set vid primary server secondary server where vid The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s primary The IP address of one DHCP server server gt lt secondary The IP address of a second DHCP server server gt This command specifies the DHCP server s that serve the specified VLAN The primary server is required the secondary server is optional The IES 612 51A routes DHCP requests to the specified DHCP server s according t
262. hannel profile with pcr lt cdvt gt encapsulation veprofile set lt vcprofile gt Creates a VBR virtual channel H H vc llc vbr rt profile with encapsulation vbr mnrt vbr porc OCOVL SOT mer gt bc ntm BERN vcprofile delete Removes a virtual channel Removes a virtual channel profile HH pvc show lport iist Ten e Displays C a settings evore pvc set Lportl rst gt lt vpi gt Creates or modifies a PVC svel super wid setting 1 4094 lt PpLilorieyo gt DS vcprofile US vcprofile pvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Removes a PVC setting vci ppvc show port ase Cent Display priority PVC settings lt vci gt ppve set SporLtlriste vpleo Set priority PVC vci lt encap gt pvido SD IOPILy WE ppvc member show pore lise I vpui Display PPVC member settings ui eve ppvc member set portlrst vols Set PPVC member vci member vpi gt member vci DS veprofile US vcprofile level ppvc member delete portlist vpi Remove PPVC member vci member vpi gt member vci ppvc delete portlist Vpl Remove Priority PVC H H SVO rpvc gateway set gateway ip vlan Setgateway for RPVC ide peprclority rpvc gateway gateway ip Delete gateway for RPVC delete rpvc set portlrst vpi Set RPVC on a port Svoroc lt Ds vcprofile US VCDroTibe gt sp lt netmask gt gateway ip IES 612 51A User
263. he IES 612 51A check the cable connections and IP configuration Incorrectly configuring the access control settings may lock you out from using in band management Try using the console port to reconfigure the system 55 15 Resetting the Defaults If you lock yourself and others from the IES 612 51A you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The user name will be reset to admin and the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 55 15 1 Resetting the Defaults Via Command If you know the password you can reload the factory default configuration file via Command Line Interface CLI command Use the following procedure 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 1 on page 50 for details 2 Enter your password 3 Type config restore 4 Type y at the question Do you want to restore default ROM file y n 5 The IES 612 51A restarts Figure 295 Resetting the Switch Via Command ras gt config restore System will reboot automatically after restoring default configuration Do you want to proceed
264. he following example turns on the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 5 Figure 162 MAC Filter Enable Command Example ras switch mac filter enable 5 46 2 3 MAC Filter Disable Command Syntax ras switch mac filter disable portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns off the MAC filtering feature on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example turns off the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 5 Figure 163 MAC Filter Disable Command Example ras switch mac filter disable 5 46 2 4 MAC Filter Mode Command Syntax ras switch mac filter mode port accept deny where accept deny accept Only allow frames from MAC addresses that you specify and block frames from other MAC addresses deny Block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Commands This command sets whether the IES 612 51A allows or blocks access for the MAC addresses you specify The following example sets DSL port 5 to allow frames from the MAC addresses specified for DSL port 5 Figure 164 MAC Filter Mode Command Example ras switch mac filter mode 5 accept 46 2 5 MAC Filter Set Command Syntax ras gt switch mac filter set lt port g
265. he lower ports of MDF 1 using telephone wires 6 Connect the upper ports of MDF 1 to the telephone company 7 Telephone subscribers only non DSL subscribers retain connections to the lower ports of MDF 1 8 Change the wiring from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want DSL service 3 2 7 3 Installation Scenario C Phone service is also available but there are two MDFs one for end user telephone line connections and the other one for CO telephone wiring connections see the following figure 56 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel BS Users A and B have telephone only service Figure 13 Two Separate MDFs for End user and CO Connections MDF 2 This installation scenario requires four MDFs Please refer to the following figure for the DSL connection schema e MDFs and 2 are the two original MDFs e MDFs 3 and 4 are two additional MDFs you need LES User A still has telephone service only User B now has telephone and DSL service see the following figure IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure 14 Installation Scenario C Telephone cables 3 2 7 3 1 Procedure To Connect To MDFs UN o MDF 3 e Q User with User with telephone telephone service only and DSL service 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the up
266. he packet filter is enabled and the packets matched a packet filter e The MAC filter is enabled and the IES 612 51A dropped the packets according to the MAC filter s configuration e The packets contained frames with an invalid VLAN ID This field shows the number of bytes that have been received on this port VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI of channels on this port Tx Packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on each channel Rx Packets This field shows the number of packets received on each channel Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to Clear Counter erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 3 RMON Statistics Screen Use this screen to display RMON statistics about a port To open this screen click RMON in the DSL Port Statistics screen or Ethernet Port Statistics screen IES 612 51A User s Guide ei Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 34 Port Statistics RMON c OU Port Statistics Eneti Enetz ether
267. he upstream channel from the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the IES 612 51A downstream carrier load displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber s DSL modem or router The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up In the following example the upstream channel is carried on tones 7 to 39 and the downstream channel is carried on tones 53 to 259 space is left between the channels to avoid interference Figure 242 Linedata Command Example ras statistics adsl linedata 1 port 1 up stream carrier load 0 19 20 39 number of bits per symbol tone Ek ZE 00 Et 00 00 02 03 04 OS 00 0 QT QJ 00 Do 0T7 09 Oe QX HE 06 UG Ers 04 03 tone tone down tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone stream carrier load number 0 Zu 40 60 SO T Os L20 140 1 60 LOUS 200s ER 240 eee EE 59 TOs go 119 139 ESAE 179 TOSS 219 239 259 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 97 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 OZ OZ 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 02 02 OZ 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 00 OZ 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 OZ 02 02 02 OZ 02 OZ 02 OZ of 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 bits per 00 00 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 00 00 02
268. hen a trap is sent Fast Rate Down Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s bps downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent Interleave Rate Up Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s bps upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent Interleave Rate Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s Down bps upstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent Alarm profiles with After you add an alarm profile you can click a port number s XDSL port mapping the xDSL port to that alarm profile The port s V symbol in the alarm profile symbol to map where it was previously mapped changes to Modify Click Modify to edit a profile Click Delete to remove a profile 14 7 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can limit the multicast channel number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription 134 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup You can set the device to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 14 8 IGMP Filter Prof
269. i 0 255 Path Cost 1 65535 laa 126 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION STP Status Click STP Status to display the IES 612 51A s STP status see Section 22 2 on page 177 Active Select this check box to turn on RSTP Note It is recommended that you only use STP when you use the IES 612 51A in standalone mode with a network topology that has loops Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch The allowed range is O to 61440 The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MAX Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUS at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the desi
270. ic Routing Use this screen to configure static routes A static route defines how the IES 612 51A should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually Alarm EI IES 612 51A User s Guide C TC Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Status Use these screens to view the alarms that are currently in the system Alarm Event Setup Use these screens to view and set the severity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them Alarm Port Setup Use this screen to set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s LC EMEN Maintenance Use this screen to perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as restart the system Use this screen to view system logs and test port s LOIN NN Config Save Use this screen to save the device s configuration into the nonvolatile memory the IES 612 51A s storage that remains even if the IES 612 51A s power is turned off 4 5 Changing Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Basic Setting and then User Account to display the User Account screen Figure 17 User Account 4 OWS ae Authentication Enable Mame Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege high Ada Cancel Enable Hame Privilege V admin high Delete Cancel Click the i
271. ides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 kHz each The first number is the total number of DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using The second number indicates how many upstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION tatn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in 1 dB ion l satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in 1 dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in 1 dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the snrm received noise power could increase with the IES 612 51A still being able to meet its transmission targets abtndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in 1 dBm This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier dias call The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format
272. ied DSL port s The following example turns off the MAC count filter on DSL port 4 Figure 169 MAC Count Disable Command Example ras gt switch mac count disable 4 46 3 4 MAC Count Set Command Syntax ras swiech mac Count set lt port list count where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt count gt Set the limit for how many MAC addresses that a port may dynamically learn For example if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to 5 then only five devices with dynamically learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out The valid range is from 1 to 128 This command sets the limit for how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned on the specified DSL port s The following example sets the MAC count filter to allow up to 50 MAC addresses to be dynamically learned on DSL port 7 Figure 170 MAC Count Set Command Example ras gt switch mac count set 7 50 IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 Chapter 46 MAC Commands 3 12 IES 612 51A User s Guide IGMP Commands This chapter describes the IGMP snooping and filtering commands 47 1 Multicast Overview See Chapter 17 on page 153 for background information on this feature 47 2 IGMP Snoop Commands Use
273. ient loops Table 49 RSTP Port States RSTP PORT STATE STP PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled RSTP or STP is disabled default Discarding Blocking In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Discarding Listening In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP all BPDUs are received and processed Learning Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded See the IEEE 802 1w standard for more information on RSTP See the IEEE 802 1D standard for more information on STP IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol 22 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 83 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Iree Frotocol Status J Spanning Tree Protocol On STP Config Bridge Status Our bridge ID 8000 001 349000001 Designated root ID 8000 001 3480006001 Topology change times U Time since change 0 00 04 Castto root DU Root part ID Ox Root max age second ZU Root hello time secondi B Hoot forward delay second 15 Max age second ZU Hello time second H Forward delay second 15 Fart Status State discarding Part ID 8032 Path cast 4 Castto root DU Designated bridge 0000 0000000000
274. iew the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them 5 For upstream traffic Since the subscriber s device will not send out a MAC address after the IES 612 51A reassembles the Ethernet packets from the AALS ATM cells the IES 612 51A will append the routed mode gateway s MAC address and the IES 612 51A s MAC address as the destination source MAC address 6 For downstream traffic When the IES 612 51A sees the destination IP address is specified in the RPVC or RPVC domain the IES 612 51A will strip out the MAC header and send them to the corresponding RPVC 53 7 1 2684 Routed Mode Example The following figure shows an example RFC 2684 formerly RFC 1483 routed mode set up The gateway server uses IP address 192 168 10 102 and is in VLAN 1 The IES 612 51A uses IP address 192 168 20 101 The subscriber s device the CPE is connected to DSL port 1 on the IES 612 51A and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 The routed domain is the LAN IP addresses behind the CPE device The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and the LAN computer s IP address is 10 10 10 1 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 269 2684 Routed Mode Example IP 192 168 10 102 IP 192 168 20 101 PVC 8 35
275. if the channel is configured to use one This field displays the number of the member DVC e priority queue Delete Click Delete to remove a member PVC from the PPVC Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring A Use this section of the screen to add or modify a member PVC Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this member PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this member PPVC This PVC cannot overlap with any existing PVC s on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Level Use the drop down list box to select the priority queue 0 to 7 to add to use for the PVC 7 is the highest level Add Modify Click Add Modify to save member PVC settings for a PPVC In order to change a member PVC s settings just enter the PVC s VPI and VCI and configure the settings you want These settings replace the PVC s old settings when you click Add Modify Clicking Add Modify saves your changes to the IES 612 51A
276. igits O ffffffff Each mx represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones ml tones 32 63 m2 tones 64 95 m3 tones 96 127 m4 tones 128 159 lt m5 gt tones 160 191 m6 tones 192 223 m7 tones 224 255 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it IES 612 51A User s Guide 35 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands This command displays or sets masks for downstream carrier tones from 33 to 255 Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the specified DSL port The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask The following example disables downstream carrier tone 71 for DSL port 5 Figure 227 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 1 ras adsl dscarriero 5 0 01000000 Q Q 9 EF 0 The following example displays the results Figure 228 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Display Example rase adsl dscarrrero 5 ds carrier port S 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tone m1 32 63 m2 64 95 m3 96 127 m4 128 159 m5 160 191 m6 192 223 m7 224 255 This example disables downstream carrier tones 70 and 71 for DSL port 5 Figure 229 DSL Port Downstream CarrierO Command Example 2 ras adsl dscarrierd 5 0 03000000 X5 QCO Qo 52 1 15 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Syntax ras ads
277. ign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit 44 4 6 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Syntax raso Statristricos dhcp snoop lt portiast gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt Use this command to look at the DHCP snooping table on the specified port s The following example displays the settings of port 1 Figure 149 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Example ras statistics dhcp snoop X port overflow IES 612 51A User s Guide 207 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands Each field is described in the following table port The selected DSL port number s overflow The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit mac The MAC address of a client on this port to which the DHCP server assigned an IP address ip The IP address assigned to a client on this port 208 IES 612 51A User s Guide IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN commands 45 1 Introduction to VLANs See Chapter 16 on page 145 for more background information on VLANS 45 2 IEEE 802 1Q Tagging Types There are two kinds of tagging Explicit Tagging A VLAN identifi
278. igure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Up Shift SNR The downstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the downstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile m
279. ile Screen You can use the IGMP filter profiles to control access to a service that uses a specific multicast group like a SIP server for example Configure an IGMP filter profile that allows access to that multicast group Then assign the IGMP filter profile to ADSL ports that are allowed to use the service The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the ADSL ports by default It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 If you want to allow an ADSL subscriber access to only specific IGMP multicast groups use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure a different profile and then assign it to the subscriber s ADSL port in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup IGMP Filter Profile The top of the screen displays the configured IGMP filter profiles Use the bottom part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles Figure 60 IGMP Filter Profile Port Profile VC Profile Alarm Profile Hame Delete DEFVAL Delete Marne Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP 1 2 3 4 5 h T H BEES Co C gt Ce gt 7C isi A o Leem Baile Eno cho dq 4059 RE 9 5 E IES 612 51A User s Guide 135 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup The following table
280. ile showmap 5 ADSL alarm profile mapping Port 5 Alarm Profile DEFVAL IES 612 51A Users Guide 373 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 374 IES 612 51A User s Guide Virtual Channel Management Commands This chapter shows you how to use commands to configure virtual channels 53 1 Virtual Channel Management Overview See Chapter 13 on page 107 for background information on virtual channels and ATM QoS 53 2 Virtual Channel Profile Commands Use the following commands to configure virtual channel profiles 53 2 1 Show Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax ras adsl vcprofile show vcprofile where vcprofile The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters Displays the settings of the specified virtual channel profile or all of them if you do not specify one 53 2 2 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax pas adsl voprofile set vcoprofile lt vc lic gt ubr cbr por ocdvLto adsl vcprofile set vcprofile lt vc llc gt vbr rt vbr nrt vbr pcr lt cdvt gt lt scr gt DU ras gt IES 612 51A User s Guide 375 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands where lt vcprofile gt The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot change the DEFVAL or DEFVAL VC profiles vc 1lc The type of encapsulation vc or llc ubr cbr The ubr unspecified bit rate or cbr constant bit rate or ATM traffic class
281. ilter Reuler EEN 315 Figure 176 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command hn ue ET Sie Figure 177 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Example AA 316 Figure 178 IGMP Filter Show Command Example ccsssssseeeeeeeceeceaeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeasseeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeess 316 Figure 179 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Example cccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 319 Figure 180 IGMP Count Disable Command Example ccccccececeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaaeaeeess 319 Figure 181 IGMP Count Enable Command Example sees nnns 320 Figure 182 IGMP Count Set Command Example eese nnn nnn 320 Figure 183 IGMP Count Show Command Example ccccccccccseeeeeeceeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeseeeeeaaees 321 Figure 184 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Example ccccccccessseeeeeeesesccessseseeeeessssseesees 321 Figure 185 IGMP Group Statistics Command Example 322 Figure 186 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Example 322 Figure 187 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Example 323 Figure 188 Multicast VLAN Disable Command Example 324 Figure 189 Multicast VLAN Show Command Example 325 Figure 190 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Example ccccccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 325 Figure 191 Packet Filter Show Command Example ccccccccceecceeceeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeesegeeeessaaeeessaeees 327 Figure 192 Packet Filter oer Command EXAMS
282. ilters Severity level configurable for each alarm Threshold levels configurable per port LED indication of alarm state Alarm event list Current alarm events Alarm history Alarm cut off feature System Monitoring Regular DSL performance counter update Watchdog support Hardware Monitoring Security Login Authorization IEEE 802 1x port based authentication local profile RADIUS VLAN Port Isolation port security Flooding storm control Logging External UNIX syslog server supported Log retention during re booting 256 records ADSL2 2 G dmt ITU T G 992 1 G lite ITU T G 992 2 G hs ITU T G 994 1 ANSI T1 413 issue 2 ADSL2 G 992 3 G 992 4 ADSL2 G 992 5 Multiple Protocols over ADSL RFC 2684 Bridged and Routed Mode LLC and VC MUX bridging RFC 2684 Power enhancement or ADSL power saving mode Rate adaptation SRA PPPoE and PPPOA conversion Multiple PVC support PVC to VLAN mapping Full range VCI VPI Monitoring of ADSL Line Quality OAM F5 end to end loopback DELT Dual End Loop Test SELT Single End Loop Test SNMP Management SNMP Trap v1 v2c SNMP agent SNMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version SMI RFC 1155 IES 612 51A User s Guide 419 Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 113 IES 612 51A Features continued MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 Bridge MIBs RFC 1493 2674 Ethernet MIB Q MIB ADSL line MIB RFC 2662 ADSL Extension Line MIB RFC2449 RMON MIB group 1 2 3 9 ZyXEL proprietary MIB
283. in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to Clear Counter erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 1 Ethernet Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to display statistics about an Ethernet port To open this screen click an Ethernet port s number in the Home screen IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 32 Port Statistics Ethernet a RMON Return Par ENETl Fart Name eneti Rx bytes 29544794 Rx packets 348191 Rx error fes DU Rx multicast 18853 Rx broadcast 327387 Rx mac pause U Rx fragments j Fx error overrun Fx error mru B Rx dropped Rx jabber U Rx error alignment Rx oversize DU Rx undersize Rx discard 17848 Tx bytes 1733468 Ts packets Tx multicast Tx broadcast xmac pause Tx fragments Tx frames Tx error underrun Tx undersize Tx jabber Tx oversize packet lt 64 265944 packet b5 127 45948 packet 28 255 30992 packet 256 511 4554 packet 512 1023 817 packet 1024 1518 1002 packet 1522 U packetitatal 350258 hraadcastitatal 327387 rmulticastitatal 18853 nctetitotal 31278267 Foll Intervali s 40 Set Interval Stop Port F Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in
284. ind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It 1s recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of Zy XEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products IES 612 51A User s Guide 431 Appendix A Legal Information 432 IES 612 51A Users Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide e Support E mail support zyxel com tw e Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Tele
285. ing the system saving changes to the nonvolatile memory and resetting to factory defaults Nonvolatile memory refers to the IES 612 51A s storage that remains even if the IES 612 51A s power is turned off Administrators with high privilege access can use all screens including the lower privilege screens Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege screens Low privilege screens are read only 4 3 Accessing the Web Configurator Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled Use the following instructions to log on to the web configurator 1 Launch your web browser and enter the IP address of the IES 612 51A default 192 168 1 1 is the factory default in the Location or Address field Press Enter The Login screen appears IES 612 51A User s Guide ei Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 15 Login ES qe Please type your user name and password Site 192 158 1 1 Realm amp M1212 51 at Thu Jan 01 18 18 52 1970 User Name admin Password Save this password in your password list Cancel 2 Type admin in the User Name field and your password default 1234 in the Password field Click OK The main screen appears This is the web configurator s main screen Figure 16 Home ZyXEL Home A Logout A S Se MEME Mur i i System Up Time O days 19 25 49 ENET Status Port Name ia Duplex i ES Up enett 100copper full duplex
286. ings when you click Add Modify Clicking Add Modify saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 23 PPVC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select the number of an ADSL port for which to display PPVC settings or display all of them Index This field displays the number of the PPVC Port This field displays the number of the ADSL port on which the PPVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port The IES 612 51A uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device Encap This field displays the PPVC s type of encapsulation llc or vc PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Members This field displays how many PVCs belong to this PPVC has Click the number to open a screen where you can configure the PPVC s member PVCs Delete Click Delete to remo
287. inutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of error seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucSesLThreshTrap The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of severely errored seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucUasLThreshTrap The number of Unavailable seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of Unavailable seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturSesLThresh Trap The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of severely errored seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturUasLThreshTrap The number of Unavailable seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of Unavailable seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval 34 4 SNMP Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control SNMP 228 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Figure 115 SNMP XV MN Return Get Community public s i sSCS Set Community DEE
288. iod timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Port Isolation Turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber ports When Active you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers 100 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 10 Switch Setup Table 15 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Anti Spoofing Select this if you want the IES 612 51A to generate an alarm and issue a SNMP trap when an existing MAC address appears on another port Switch Mode Select Standalone to use both of the IES 612 51A s Ethernet ports ENET 1 and ENET 2 as uplink ports Note Standalone mode is recommended for network topologies that use loops Use Daisychain mode to cascade daisychain multiple IES 612 51A The IES 612 51A uses Ethernet port one ENET 1 as an uplink port to connect to the Ethernet backbone and uses Ethernet port two ENET 2 to connect to another daisychained or subtending IES 612 51A Note Daisychain mode is recommended for network topologies that do not use loops Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic type
289. iority Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that uses this PVC This command sets the second VLAN tag to add to the packets from the PVC The following example adds VLAN tag 100 to traffic using the DEFVAL ATM profile on PVC 1 33 on port 2 Figure 287 TLS PVC Set Command Example ras adsl tlspvc set 2 1 33 DEFVAL 100 O0 53 9 3 TLS PVC Show Command Syntax ras gt adsl Ltlspve show lt portlist gt p vpic SVC where lt portlist gt The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the TLS PVC SVO The VCI of the TLS PVC This command displays the TLS settings for the specified port s or PVC s The following example shows the TLS settings on port 2 Figure 288 TLS PVC Show Command Example ras adsl tlspvc show 2 vel pud pra DS US voprotile IES 612 51A User s Guide 397 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands ER IES 612 51A User s Guide ACL Commands An ACL Access Control Logic profile allows the system to classify and perform actions on the upstream traffic Use the ACL Profile commands to set up ACL profiles and the ACL Assignment commands to apply them to PVCs 54 1 ACL Profile Commands Use these commands to set up ACL profiles 54 1 1 ACL Profile Set Command Syntax ras switch acl profile
290. ipants within a bridged LAN GARP 1s a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 10 2 Switch Modes The IES 612 51A supports standalone and daisychain switch modes 10 2 1 Standalone Switch Mode Standalone switch mode relates to the IES 612 51A s operational behavior not a standalone network topology The standalone switch mode allows either or both of the IES 612 51A s Ethernet ports to connect to the backbone Ethernet network You can also connect one of the IES 612 51A s Ethernet ports to the Ethernet network and the other to another IES 612 51A see Figure 41 on page 98 for an example When the IES 612 514 is in standalone mode you can use it in a network topology that uses loops you should also enable RSTP You can have multiple IES 612 51A connected on the same network and set both of them to use standalone mode in order to use them with a network topology that uses loops Standalone switch mode with port isolation enabled blocks communications between subscriber ports on an individ
291. ist box to select a port for which you wish to display settings IES 612 51A User s Guide 22 Chapter 32 Downstream Broadcast Table 71 Downstream Broadcast continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the number of the downstream broadcast blocking entry Port This is the number of a DSL port through which you will block downstream broadcast traffic on a specific VLAN VLAN This field displays the number of a VLAN to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic on the entry s port Select Select an entry s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Select All Click All to mark all of the check boxes Select None Click None to un mark all of the check boxes IES 612 51A User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains how to set the syslog parameters 33 1 Syslog The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server 33 2 SysLog Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application SysLog Figure 112 SysLog d Eat aD Enable UNIX Syslog Syslog Server IP 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 SysLog LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Unix Syslog S
292. ive to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See Chapter 41 on page 257 FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Chapter 50 on page 335 e SNMP The IES 612 51A can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 34 3 on page 225 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the IES 612 51A Do the following things regularly to make the IES 612 51A more secure and to manage the IES 612 51A more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the IES 612 51A becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to use the console port to reset the IES 612 514 to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the IES 612 51A You could simply restore your last configuration IES 612 51A User s Guide 43 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the IES 612 51A Em IES 612 51A User s Guide Hardware Installation This chapter explains how to install the IES 612 51A 2 1 General Installation Instructions Before you begin read all the safety warnings in Safety Warnings on page
293. l Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Hellotime This field displays the timeout for the PPPoE session in seconds DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one Access This field displays the name of the specified remote access concentrator if any Concentrator Name Service Name This field displays the name of the service that uses this PVC on the remote access concentrator Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table IES 612 51A User s Guide 205 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE 28 3 PPPoA to PPPoE Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current status of each PPPoA to PPPoE conversion To open this screen click Advanced Application PPPoA to PPPoE and then click an index number Figure 103 PPPoA to PPPoE Status ED PPPoA to PPPoE Status PPPoA to PPPoE PVC 1 0 33 Session Status session State session ID Session Uptim
294. l dscarrierl port number m0 ml m2 m3 m4 mb m6 m7 where moo x mes The downstream carrier tones to be masked disabled Each mx can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits O ffffffff Each mx represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones m0 tones 256 287 ml tones 288 319 m2 tones 320 351 m3 tones 352 383 m4 tones 384 415 m5 tones 416 447 m6 tones 448 479 m7 tones 480 511 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it 352 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands This command displays or sets masks for downstream carrier tones from 256 to 511 on the specified ADSL2 port s Use this command to have the system not use a DSL line s tones that are known to have a high noise level The following example disables downstream carrier tone 307 for ADSL2 port 5 Figure 230 DSL Port Downstream Carrieri Command Example 1 bos adsl dscaerrierk 5 0900UJIQQQ Q9 0x p The following example disables downstream carrier tones 304 to 307 for ADSL2 port 5 Figure 231 DSL Port Downstream Carrieri Command Example 2 ras adsl dscarrier1 5 0 0000f 0000 00000 The following example displays the results Figure 232 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Display Example Fas gt adsl dscarrreri 5
295. lashes Figure 91 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format B Telephone 25 3 DHCP Relay Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Relay Figure 92 DHCP Relay Nut Relay Mode SE Option 2 Sub option T cl aub aptian Circuit IE ate a SNR PEE M EU QE EE Apply Cancel fo 1 4094 0 for the default server Frimary Server IP 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server IP fo 0 0 0 Active Server Primary Apply Cancel Server List Note The server with VLAN ID 0 is the default server tr Active server Index VLAN ID Primary Server IP Secondary Server IP Select 0 ITa Ia 0 0 0 0 Delete Select All None IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP Relay The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 DHCP Relay LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Enable DHCP relay to have the IES 612 51A relay DHCP requests to a DHCP Relay server and the server s responses back to the clients Relay Mode Specify how the IES 612 51A relays DHCP requests Auto The IES 612 51A routes DHCP requests to the active server for each VLAN Both The IES 612 51A routes DHCP requests to the primary and secondary server for each VLAN regardless of which one is active Enable Option82 Enable DHCP relay info to have the IES 612 51A add the originating port Sub option1 numbers to DHCP requests regardless of whether the DHCP relay is on or off ID Sub option1 Circuit Use
296. last Set packet filter for port lt filter gt okt filter pppoeonly Set packet filter to pppoe only for H H pppoeonly cDOBDLISt port portlist Display doti settings Y dotix enable H H H H mac count set portlist count Sets the MAC address count filter for an ADSL port s S M M M H L H H L L H H H H L H L H Turn on dot1x H 2 2 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION dotix auth lt profile radius gt Set authentication method to profile or radius dotlx port enable Sporttlrst Turn on dot1x on port dotis por disable E Turn off dot1x on port dotlx port control lt porelist gt Set port authentication status autolauth unauth dotix port reauth lt poOre List Turn on or turn off port to do E EE reauthentication dotlx port period portiist Set port reauth period period dotix radius show Display radius server settings dotlx radius ip Set Radius server IP dotlx radius port Set Radius server port dotix radius secret Set Radius server secret secret dotix profile show Display accounts for profile mode M L doti profile sert lt name gt lt password gt Set account and password for profile mode dotlx profile name Remove account for profile mode H H delete enet show Displays the Ethernet port settings enet speed portlrsto Sets the Ethernet port s
297. le This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this PVC Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table IES 612 51A User s Guide 21 d Chapter 31 ACL 31 3 ACL Profile Setup Screen Use this screen to set up ACL profiles To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL ACL Profile Setup Figure 109 ACL Profile Setup d E ACL Setup ACL Profile Map Profile Name stharietivee 0 wm 85535 vlan 0 Te 4094 ethemettpe o mm 65535 source mac tri dL ethernet type U 165535 dest mac j i vanjo a 4094 source mac E E vlan u 4094 destmac ri source mac dest mac v an Il b 1 4094 priority 8 zi B ethernet type U 0 65535 C g van h 1 4094 C 1 0 source mac m C 11 dest mat OEE C 12 priority o m 13 protocol tep Bar protocol type LU 0 255 C 44 source ip p 0 0 0 mask n 0 0 0 n destip 0 0 0 0 mask o 0 0 0 tos starttos 0 0 255 end oe l 0 255 source port start part O 0 465535 end part f0 0 655535 dest port start port LU 0 655535 end part LU 0 635535 rate o 1 85535 Kbps replaced dan 1 4094 replaced priority o z deny Apply Cancel Action ACL Profile List Index ACL Profile Select De
298. lete Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 ACL Profile Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Setup Click ACL Setup to open the screen where you can assign ACL profiles to PVCs see Section 31 2 on page 216 ACL Profile Map Click ACL Profile Map to open the screen where you can look at which ACL profiles are assigned to which PVCs see Section 31 4 on page 219 218 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 31 ACL Table 69 ACL Profile Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the ACL profile The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII characters long Spaces are not allowed Rule Select which type of rule to use Note The lower the number 1 14 the higher the priority the rule has Provide additional information required for the selected rule Additional rules consist of one or more of the following criteria ethernet type Enter the 16 bit EtherType value between 0 and 65535 protocol type Enter the IP protocol number between 0 and 255 used dest ip dest port Enter the destination port or range of destination ports Action Select which action s the IES 612 51A should follow when the criteria are satisfied rate Enter the maximum bandwidth this traffic is allowed to have replaced vlan Enter the VLAN ID that this traffic should use replaced priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority that this traffic should have deny Select this if yo
299. line Click Get LDM Data raw to display the unformatted line diagnostics results Click Get LDM Data 992 3 to display the line diagnostics results in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard Note Wait at least one minute after using Set LDM Port before using Get LDM Data SELT Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set SELT Port to perform a Single End Loop Test SELT on the specified port This test checks the distance to the subscriber s location Note The port must have an open loop There cannot be a DSL device phone fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber s end of the telephone line The SELT takes at least fifteen seconds To check the status of the SELT or to look at the results when the SELT is complete select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Get SELT Data The results tell you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line 242 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 37 Diagnostic Table 80 Diagnostic continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PMM Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and a power management mode from the Mode drop down list box and click Set PMM Mode to have the specified port use the specified power management mode Select LO to turn off power management on the port Select L2 to scale back the power usage to just support the transmission rate that the subscriber is using Sele
300. line performance statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods An example is shown next Figure 245 15 Minute Performance Command Example ras statistics adsl 15mperf 1 1 Port 1 Current 15 Min elapsed time 12 sec Link Down Current 15 Min PM ATUC ATUR lofs 0 LOSS lols lprs es init ses uas History LS MIB PM I lofs loss lols lprs es init ses uas IES 612 51A Users Guide 361 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The following table explains these counters Table 95 15 Minute Performance Counters DESCRIPTION Upstream These statistics are for the connection or traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the IES 612 51A Downstream These statistics are for the connection or traffic going from the IES 612 51A to the subscriber s device The number of Loss Of Frame seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of Loss Of Signal seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of Loss Of Link seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of Loss of Power seconds on the AT UR that have occurred within the 15 minute period es The number of Errored Seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of link ups and link downs that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of Severely Errored Seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period The number of UnAvailable Seconds th
301. local 1 dsl S003 ad perf lof thresh local 1 dsl S004 ad perf laz thresh local 1 dsl S005 ad perf lop thresh local 1 dsl 5006 ad perf es thresh local 1 dsl S007 ad perf ses thresh local 1 dsl S008 ad perf uas thresh local 1 dsl S003 ad atuc loftrap local 1 dsl 5010 ad atuc lostrap local 1 dsl 5011 ad atur laoftrap local 1 dsl S012 ad atur lostrap local 4 dsl 5013 ad atur Iprtrap local 1 eget 10000 wal err local 1 minor minor minor minor minor rni rar Kn Oo 4 IO IO Wb Io IM La E E E minar minar mi mor minar minar mimar critical eget 10001 lemp err local 1 critical eget 10002 hw rte fail local 1 eget 10003 bw man fail local 1 eget 10004 cold start local 1 eget 10005 Warm start local 1 Sys 15000 reboot local 1 critical critical infa Sys 15001 aco local 1 15002 alm clear local 1 15003 login fail local 1 15004 anti spoofing local 1 20000 local 1 F3 ha LA d F3 r3 r3 LA Ei a Ga x GA zx L IS de demde Ten EIS le la dede dde ds ds LARES ELM C IL BLEU ML E ee Pe c LEE LO EE c TE EE E s a a ee ey eg Oe SR LOL ELLO 25 41 4191 901 05 41 T 0 id e E 20001 local 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Alarm Event Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Status Click Alarm Status to go to a screen that displays the alarms that are currently in the system see Section 40 2 on page 249 Alarm Port Setup Click Alarm Port Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the alarm
302. loses power so use the Apply Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index Select a unique number for this setting If you select a number that is already used the new setting overwrites the old one when you click Apply Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the multicast range End Multicast IP Enter the end of the multicast range For one multicast address enter the start of the multicast range again Bandwidth Enter the bandwidth requirement for the specified multicast range Apply Click Apply to save the filter settings The settings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Apply saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh This table shows the multicast range settings 17 4 1 Bandwidth Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set up multicast bandwidth requirements for specific ports To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Bandwidth Setup Port Setup Bandwidth Setup Bandwidth Select 4096 pn 100 000kbps 4096 1 100 000 Kbps i096 pn 100 000kbps i096 pn 100 000Kbps 10956 pn 100 00Kbps IES 612 51A Us
303. lowing example displays the IGMP count limit settings for ports 1 5 Figure 183 IGMP Count Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount show 1 5 port enable count 47 7 IGMP Snoop Statistics Commands Use the IGMP Snoop Statistics commands to display current IGMP settings and statistics 47 7 1 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Syntax ras statistics igmpsnoop info clear This command displays the current IGMP settings and the number of IGMP related packets received The following figure shows an example Figure 184 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Example ras statistics igmpsnoop info IGMP Snooping Proxy is Disable number of query 0 number of report 0 number of leave 0 0 number of groups 47 7 2 IGMP Group Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics igmpsnoop group lt vid gt lt mcast_ip gt IES 612 51A User s Guide 32 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands where lt vid gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt mcast_ip gt The multicast IP address This command displays the information about IGMP groups learned on the system specified VLAN or specified multicast address on the specified VLAN s Figure 185 IGMP Group Statistics Command Example roa SUGtXqsLros gmpsnoop group QrOUupD cmo Vid port 47 7 3 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics igmpsnoop port info portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all D
304. lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns on the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command turns on the IGMP count limit for port 4 Figure 181 IGMP Count Enable Command Example n Switch igmpsnoop igmpcount enable 4 47 6 3 IGMP Count Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop igmpcount set lt portlist gt lt count gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt count gt 0 16 the maximum number of IGMP groups subscribers on the specified port s can join This command sets the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command sets a IGMP count limit of 2 for port 4 Figure 182 IGMP Count Set Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount set 4 2 47 6 4 IGMP Count Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount show portlist 320 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 47 IGMP Commands where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the IGMP count limit setting status for the specified DSL port s The fol
305. m 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials Zy XEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions 430 IES 612 51A User s Guide Appendix A Legal Information Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any k
306. mand forcibly disables the specified DSL port s BS The factory default of all ports is enabled 52 1 4 DSL Port Profile Show Command Syntax ras gt adsl profile show profile where lt profile gt A profile name This command displays the specified DSL profile or all DSL profiles if you do not specify one IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The following example displays the DSL DEFVAL profile Figure 215 DSL Profile Show Command Example ras adsl profile show DEFVAL Ol DEFVAL latency mode interleave up stream down stream max rate min rate latency delay max margin min margin target margin db up smhrtt margin db down shift margin db 52 1 5 DSL Port Profile Set Command Syntax ras adsl profile set profile lt fast interleave lt up delay gt lt down delay gt gt lt up max rate gt lt down max rate gt lt up target margin gt lt up min margin gt lt up max margin gt lt up min rate gt lt down target margin gt lt down min margin gt lt down max margin gt lt down min rate gt up down shift margin gt up up shift margin down down shift margin down up shift margin gt where profile The descriptive name for the profile lt fast interleav The latency mode With interleave you must also define the SSES upstream and downstream delay 1 255 ms It is delay gt lt down recommended that you configure the same delay f
307. marize the IES 612 51A s hardware features Table 112 Hardware Specifications FEATURE Dimensions Weight Power Specification Interface Connectors Stacking Rackmounting Splitter LEDs Operating Environment Storage Environment Ground Wire Gauge Power Wire Gauge Fuse IES 612 51A User s Guide DESCRIPTION 2 0 mm W x 350 mm D x 44 45 mm H 4 6 kg AC 100 V 240 V 50 60 hz 26 Watts Max 0 7 A Max 12 ADSL2 Ports Pin 1 12 and 26 37 for CO Pin 14 25 and 39 50 for USER One console port for local management Two 10 100BASE T Ethernet ports for uplink One Telco 50 female connector UNC 4 40 inch thread mini RJ11 console port connector e Cat 5 be and 6 Ethernet cables Daisy chain three Ethernet devices recommended Stacking more devices is possible Mountable on a 19 rack One integrated DSL splitter card for POTS ALM SYS LAN 10 100 1 2 ADSL ports 1 12 C Temperature 0 C 50 Humidity 1096 9096 RH non condensing Temperature 40 C 70 C Humidity 1096 9596 RH non condensing 18 AWG or larger 26 AWG or larger Fuse specifications 250 VAC 2A Fuse dimensions 5 2 mm D x 20 mm L Fuse model name CF RST250V2AL Fuse vendor BEL 417 Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 112 Hardware Specifications continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION Certifications RoHS WEEE Safety UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1 EN41003 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A EN55022
308. mber of TCP IP protocol suite A manager station can manage and monitor the IES 612 51A through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured IES 612 51A User s Guide 225 Chapter 34 Access Control Figure 114 SNMP Management Model AGENT AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the IES 612 51A An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 7
309. ministrator account Delete Select an administrator account s check box and click this button to remove the administrator account Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen afresh 9 2 Authentication Screen Use this screen to set up the authentication policies and settings by which administrators can access the IES 612 51A To open this screen click Basic Setting User Account Authentication Figure 40 Authentication OED User account Authentication Mode local then radius IP 127 0 0 254 Fart l8lz 1 855535 Secret 1234 Default Privilege Level low Apply Cancel EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 9 User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to open the User Account screen See Section 9 1 on page 93 Authentication Mode Select the process by which the IES 612 51A authenticates administrators local Search the local database You maintain this database in the User Account screen radius Check an external RADIUS database using the settings below local then radius Search the local database if the user name is not found check an external RADIUS database using the settings below LONE Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation Port The default UDP port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network admi
310. mmand sets the packet type filter for the specified DSL port s 328 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands The following example sets DSL port 5 to reject ARP PPPoE and IGMP packets Figure 192 Packet Filter Set Command Example ras switch pktfilter set 5 arp pppoe igmp 48 1 3 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Syntax ras gt switch pktfilter pppoeonly lt portlist gt This command sets the IES 612 51A to allow only PPPoE traffic on the specified DSL port s The system will drop any non PPPoE packets The following example sets DSL port 1 to accept only PPPoE packets Figure 193 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Example ras switch pktfilter pppoeonly 1 IES 612 51A User s Guide E Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands 330 IES 612 51A User s Guide IP Commands This chapter shows you how to use the standard shell IP commands to configure the IP Internet Protocol parameters 49 1 IP Commands Introduction Use the IES 612 51A s management IP addresses to manage it through the network 49 2 IP Settings and Default Gateway Use the following command sequence to set the IES 612 51A s IP settings for the Ethernet 1 and 2 and DSL ports VID and default gateway With the Ethernet 1 and 2 and DSL ports you must connect to the IES 612 51A through a port that is a member of the management CPU VLAN in order to perform in band management Figure 194 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Commands
311. mple A VLAN 24 Y b VLAN 24 VLAN 24 i B 30 2 TLS PVC Screen Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Services on each port This is set up by creating a TLS PVC See Chapter 13 on page 107 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application TLS PVC BS You can NOT configure PPPoA to PPPoE and TLS settings on the same PVC IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 30 TLS PVC Figure 107 TLS PVC DS vi Profile DEFVAL LIS YC Profile p VID bh 1 4094 Priority n Apply Cancel Show Port 411 Index Port vPIMCI YID Priority DSUS VC Profile Select Delete Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 TLS PVC This field i is read id once you click on a ai number below EE VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing Type a VLAN ID to assign t
312. mputer is named config 0 Figure 203 Example Get the Configuration File config 0 ftp get config O0 Quit FTP Figure 204 Example Close FTP Client ftp quit 50 3 2 Edit Configuration File Open the con ig 0 file via Notepad see the following example and edit to a desired configuration IES 612 51A User s Guide 33 7 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands lt gt Ensure that any changes you make to the commands in the configuration file correspond to the commands documented in this User s Guide The wrong configuration file or an incorrectly configured configuration file can render the device inoperable Figure 205 Configuration File Example sysinfo sys info hostname sys info location Sys info contact m Zitt snmp sys sys sys sys sys sys sys sys snmp snmp snmp snmp snmp snmp snmp snmp getcommunity public setcommunity public trapcommunity public trustedhost 0 0 0 0 trapdst set 1 trapdst set trapdst set trapdst set JI server server enable telnet sys sys sys server enable ftp server enable web server enable icmp server port telnet 23 server port ftp 21 The sys user set admin Command Is encrypted and you cannot edit it in a text editor Attempting to edit it and upload it to the IES 612 51A will lock you out after the system restarts If this happens you will have to use the console port to restore the default config
313. must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Ox0000 displays when this device is the root switch Root max age This is the maximum time in seconds the root switch can wait without receiving second a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Root hello time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay ward delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Root for second Max age second This is the maximum time in seconds the IES 612 51A can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Hello time second This is the time interval in seconds at which the IES 612 51A transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Forward delay This is the time in seconds the IES 612 51A will wait before changing states second that is listening to learning to forwarding Port Status This identifies the IES 612 51A s ports that support the use of STP If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears State This field displays the ports RSTP or STP state With RSTP the state can be discarding learning or forwarding With STP the state can be disabled bl
314. n the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps Regardless of a profile s configured upstream and downstream rates the IES 612 51A automatically limits the actual rates for each individual port to the maximum speeds supported by the port S ADSL operational mode For example if you configure a profile with a maximum downstream rate of 25000 Kbps and apply it to a port set to use G dmt the IES 612 51A automatically uses a maximum downstream rate of 8160 Kbps This means that if you configure a profile with very high rates you can still use it with any port See Table 18 on page 107 for a list of the maximum rates supported by the different ADSL standards 108 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 13 6 Default Settings The default profile always exists and all of the ADSL ports use the default profile settings when the IES 612 51A is shipped The default profile s name is set to DEFVAL See Chapter 56 on page 417 for the settings of the default profile and ADSL port default settings 13 7 xDSL Port Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup Figure 46 xDSL Port Setup L VC Setup PPVC Setup Iv Active
315. n action the IES 612 51A replaces the VLAN ID before it compares the VLAN ID of the packet to the VID of the PVC As a result it is suggested that you replace VLAN ID on super channels not normal PVC since super channels accept any tagged traffic If you replace the VLAN ID for a normal PVC the IES 612 51A drops the traffic because the new VLAN ID does not match the VID of the PVC This is illustrated in the following scenario There is a normal PVC and its PVID is 900 You create an ACL rule to replace the VLAN ID with 901 Initially the traffic for the PVC belongs to VLAN 900 Then the IES 612 51A checks the ACL rule and changes the traffic to VLAN 901 When the IES 612 51A finally compares the VLAN ID of the traffic 901 to the VID of the PVC 900 the IES 612 51A drops the packets because they do not match 31 2 ACL Setup Screen Use this screen to assign ACL profiles to each PVC To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL oe IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 31 ACL Figure 108 ACL Setup m EUUEIDCTHENNENND ACL Profile Setup ACL Profile Map Port E ACL Profile Apply Cancel Show Port All Index Pon WPI vcl ACL Profile Select Delete Select Al None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 ACL Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Profile Setup Click ACL Profile Setup to open the screen where you can set up ACL profiles see Section 31 3 on page 218 ACL Profile
316. n ports except the ingress port itself that are members of the VID thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per VLAN per port basis recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 16 3 VLAN Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN 146 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 16 VLAN Figure 64 VLAN Status d MEE Static VLAN Setting VLAN Port Setting The Humber Of VI AN 1 Pagel of 1 Index Status Name i VID Elapsed Time 8 S My 12 enett enet 1 DEFAULT 1I 1 Ofdays 19 49 13 Ek qq Wu Pall Interval s ao Set Interval Stop Change Pages Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 VLAN Status Static VLAN Setting Click Static VLAN Setting to configure ports to dynamically join a VLAN group or permanently assign ports to a VLAN group or prohibit ports from joining a VLAN group see Section 16 4 on page 148 VLAN Port Setting Click VLAN Port Setting to specify Port VLAN IDs PVIDs See Section 16 5 on page 149 The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the IES 612 51A VLAN Page X of X This identifies which page of VLAN status information is displayed and how many total pa
317. n the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of error seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 m
318. n this case the subscriber s DSL modem or router during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscriber s DSL modem or router The vendor ID vendor version number and product serial number are obtained from vendor ID fields see ITU T G 994 1 or R MSGSI see T1 413 52 2 4 Lineperf Command Syntax ras statistics adsl lineperf lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line performance counters of a DSL port An example is shown next Figure 244 Lineperf Command Example ras statistics adsl lineperf 1 port 1 Perf since boot up nfebe I nfebe ni 46 Far End CRC Far End Corrected FEC Near End Corrected FEC nfecc I nfecc ni 0 nfec I nfec ni 28 K RENE Ee D Ee GE es atuc es atur 2 ncrc I ncrc ni 5 Near End CRC ses atuc ses atur 26 uas atuc uas atur LSLS lor atuc lpr atur i These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started In the list above the definitions of near end far end will always be relative to the ATU C ADSL Termination Unit Central Office Downstream ds refers to data from the ATU C and upstream us refers to data from the ATU R T stands for interleaved and ni stand
319. n where by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP VC2 carries IPX and so on VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 13 8 4 Virtual Channel Profile Virtual channel profiles allow you to configure the virtual channels efficiently You can configure all of the virtual channels with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the virtual channels one by one You can also change an individual virtual channel by assigning it a different profile The IES 612 51A provides two default virtual channel profiles DEF VAL for LLC encapsulation and DEFVAL_VC for VC encapsulation By default all virtual channels are associated to DEF VAL 13 9 VC Setup Screen Use this screen to view and configure a port s channel PVC settings To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup 116 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Figure 49 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup auper Channel VPI vci o DS VC Profile LIS YE Profile F ID Priority o Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port WPI vcl Dia us vc Profile PAID Priority Select 1 d DEFVAL 2 0ra3 DEFVAL 3 Draa DEFVAL 4 or 33 DEFWALS 5 nra PEDE Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste The following table describes the labels in this
320. n which the PVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel An asterisk denotes a super channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel 118 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 24 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to remove one or more PVCs Delete 1 Select a PVC s Select radio button 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK if you want to remove the PVC from other ports Click Cancel to only remove the one you selected Figure 50 Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Delete Microsoft Internet Explorer E E A T Do you wank to delete this channel in other parks too Cancel If you clicked OK the following screen appears Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes Click Apply to delete the channels Figure 51 Select Ports 0 12 3 4 5 6
321. nagement Screen Use this screen to configure the IP address ranges of trusted computers that may manage the IES 612 51A To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Secured Client 230 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Figure 117 Remote Management Secured Client Setup Remote Management j Return Secured Client Setup Index Enable Start IP Address End IP Address Telnet FIP Web ICMP 1 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 wv 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Remote Management Secured Client Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Return to go back to the previous screen Index This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the IES 612 51A Enable Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start IP Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can End IP Address manage the IES 612 51A The IES 612 51A checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The IES 612 51A immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telne
322. name extension The OS Operating System firmware sometimes referred to as the ras file has a bin filename extension With many FTP and clients the filenames are similar to those shown next Figure 199 FTP Put Configuration File Example ftp put firmware bin ras IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the computer file irmware bin to the IES 612 514 Figure 200 FTP Get Configuration File Example ftp get contig 0 config txt This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the IES 612 51A s current configuration file including the configuration files of all the IES 612 51A to the computer file config txt If your FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the IES 612 51A only recognizes config 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of the files for later use The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the IES 612 51A and the external filename refers to the filename not on the IES 612 51A that is on your computer local network or FTP site and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware use the sys version command on the IES 612 51A to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version Table 93 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTE
323. nated Port esi ated Part for Bridge 1 for Bridge 2 Root Port Root Pop Bridge 1 xg iesen P side D iscarding b e Ha HR GR DH RR QN UNTRA UR m nen am un nds RR RR RR GR RT UR nm Design ated Port Designated Port pestanated Port rd BEE for Bndge 3 for Bridge 4 Root Port paca Root Port Bees p xxm L ren Bridge 3 Bridge 4 Bridge 5 RSTP aware devices exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUS periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed In RSTP the devices send BPDUs every Hello Time If an RSTP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after three Hello Times pass or the Max Age the device assumes that the link to the neighboring bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology In STP once a stable network topology has been established all devices listen for Hello BPDUs transmitted from the root bridge If an STP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the device assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology RSTP assigns three port states to eliminate packet looping while STP assigns five see Table 49 on page 176 A device port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate trans
324. national Business Park The Strategy 1403 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain 436 IES 612 51A User s Guide Appendix B Customer Support Sweden e Support E mail support zyxel se e Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel se Telephone 46 31 744 7700 e Fax 46 31 744 7701 e Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand e Support E mail support zyxel co th e Sales E mail sales zyxel co th e Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine e Support E mail support 2ua zyxel com e Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 e Fax 380 44 494 49 32 e Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom e Support E mail support zyxel co uk e Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk e Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only e Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK IE
325. nd fluctuations of data transmission coming from the subscriber s device to the IES 612 51A Upstream policing controls incoming upstream traffic not outgoing downstream The ATM traffic classes and parameters are identical with downstream shaping Upstream policing can control the upstream incoming traffic rate on specific PVCs Upstream ATM cell traffic that violates the policing profile will be discarded Traffic shaping must also be enabled on the subscriber s device in order to use upstream policing If a subscriber attempts to enlarge his device s PVC shaping parameters in order to get more upstream traffic bandwidth it will violate the IES 612 51A s upstream policing profile and the traffic will be discarded Operators can use this feature to prevent subscribers from changing their device settings IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup BS Traffic shaping must also be enabled on the subscriber s device in order to use upstream policing Note that since the IES 612 51A uses ATM QoS if the subscriber device s upstream shaping rate is larger than the IES 612 51A s upstream policing rate some ATM cells will be discarded In the worst case none of the Ethernet packets from the CPE will be able to be reassembled from AALS so no packets from the subscriber s device can be received by the IES 612 514A The upstream policing feature can be enabled disabled per PVC No matter which ATM traffic class is
326. nd removes the alarm from the system It displays if the alarm clear command does not remove the alarm from the system 40 4 1 Edit Alarm Event Setup Screen Use this screen to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Status Then click an alarm s index number Figure 131 Alarm Event Setup Edit Alarm Condition Code Condition Facility SHMP Syslog Severity Clearable dsl 5000 line up local 1 m m info el Apply Close The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Alarm Event Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms Condition Code This field displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Facility The log facility locali local7 has the device log the syslog messages to a particular file in the syslog server Select a log facility local1 local7 from the drop down list box if this entry is for sending alarms to a syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details SNMP Select this check box to have the system send this alarm to an SNMP server Syslog Select this ch
327. ndex number 1 to edit the default administrator account settings IES 612 51A User s Guide es Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 18 User Account User Account Authentication Enable Mame Password Retpe Password to confirm Privilege Modify Cancel Index Enable Hame Privilege Select 1 V admin high Delete Cancel Enter the new password in the Password and Retype Password to confirm fields and click Modify Do not forget to click Config Save before you exit the web configurator See Section 4 6 on page 66 4 6 Saving Your Configuration Click Apply in a configuration screen when you are done modifying the settings in that screen to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the IES 612 51A s power is turned off Click Config Save in the navigation panel to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the IES 612 51A s storage that remains even if the IES 612 51A s power is turned off BS Use Config Save when you are done with a configuration session 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in any screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so you do not lock out other device administrators IES 612 51A User s Guide Figure 19 Logout
328. nds Sap The subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation netmask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 This command adds a domain for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain includes the subscriber s LAN IP addresses LES You must use the rpve gateway set and the rpvc set commands before you use the rpvc route set command The following example adds a domain for a CPE device is connected to DSL port 1 on the IES 612 51A and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and uses a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 277 RPVC Route Set Command Example ras adsl rove route eer l 9 35 10 20 TE Lt 53 7 9 RPVC Route Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc route show lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command lists the domains for 2684 routed mode traffic I
329. ne configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh These are the numbers of the DSL ports Select Accept to only allow frames from MAC addresses that you specify and block frames from other MAC addresses Select Deny to block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses Select this check box to turn on MAC filtering for a port This field lists the MAC addresses that are set for this port Click Delete to remove a MAC address from the list Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring IES 612 51A User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 22 1 RSTP and STP IES 612 51A User s Guide RSTP adds rapid reconfiguration capability to STP The IES 612 51A supports RSTP and the earlier STP RSTP and STP detect and break network loops and provide backup links between switches bridges or routers They allow a device to interact with other RSTP or STP aware devices in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Integrated Ethernet Switch uses RSTP by default but can still operate with STP switches al
330. ng Tree Protocol Status Screen eegne eege Eehedeege giereg 177 Cee Tee tee Ee e E E A E T 178 Chapter 23 Pon OMONE E 181 243 1 o eoll s e aae p n a E E E EEE E E E E E 181 e aE EE 181 23 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database eeeesseeesseeesseeeeeneeeenn enn 181 LFU UB IN Sa EM NP 182 A be RTT TUR 183 Chapter 24 ERKENNEN 185 SS VEER P M I 185 cnl SOOU SOOO EE 185 Chapter 25 Pole uisi vietnam nets ean 187 EDI DHGP HS ee 187 25 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 ccccccccssseceeceeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeseaaees 187 25 2 1 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Formats 187 RGB EIL Tri qM 188 IES 612 51A User s Guide 5 Table of Contents Chapter 26 Hauf i0 o M 191 COMME Prise 1 c URP 191 NR E dis qesiie ci RR C Tm 191 Re S500D SEIS e a A PPM EFIU REDE YLSM REPE MEER HI MR FL TOTE E ROEETANd FO CEP E 192 CB RB QU Mir Mei MR E 193 Chapter 27 REN ENER epe B 195 TE QERCSI E o RM 195 27 1 1 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Example cccccccsssececcceeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeseneeeesseeeeessaaes 195 UBI RR adiu er e 196 27 9 26804 Jeekelen dE 198 RE EE 199 27 9 20894 Routed Gateway E 200 Chapter 28 FFFUR ee 203 25 1 PF
331. nid erede PIE da anch io Pi e paae Sip E spGa piis sad ese deg 85 FU S7 ESAE NUR iuris e Ennn EEEE ENRETE CHAR EIERE EUER EEEE ASEEN EER 87 SUE EE E a ERR 91 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Figures Be ae oro p RENT 93 FINES Ree e ET 94 Figure 41 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example 98 Figure 42 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example ccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeees 99 Figure 43 Switch Setup dusarestesieisqiualuiatbetk uie iia pelnscatutitko ph Ue ease ima dde bb AEN 100 d ici i e 103 xci X El Ne EE 105 FIDE db ISI SB E 109 goi rE edle Ne TII T T SEDEM 110 FESSES ATL PSI SEDE EE 112 PT ee E cgo cmP 117 Figure 50 Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Delete seeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesse 119 Foue Si Select FONE Attert 119 lr O E 120 wl BR EE 121 FUE OSTTSUD ABI EO EE 122 SI ago mi ale PTT TT Dmm 125 Figure 56 PCR SCR and MBS in Traffic Shaping WE 129 Figure 57 TAL CDY T and BT in Trafic Shaping SussiessbxiveceisbeplssekaPbxkuE Ee bUk dr aiai anae nt 130 PEEL DE E EE eege 131 Figure 59 Alarm Profile M TNNT 133 FEU OU RNP FOr PITONG A D t ute 135 B DI Line RAS eem mm 137 mili ESAE VM Decani qe MANT m 139 Dae RN Ee EE 141 Bo i REKT au nen eee N DO a Ren Oren ED M EMK IN DU RUE DU EN NK den Tn ee 147 Fue po Siale SAI Auer 148 P
332. nistrator instructs you to do so Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch Default Privilege Select the privilege level assigned to administrators in case the external Level RADIUS database does not provide one The privilege level determines which screens the administrator can use There is a high medium or low privilege level for each command You can also choose to deny access to the IES 612 51A Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Select deny to prevent the administrator from accessing the IES 612 51A IES 612 51A User s Guide os Chapter 9 User Account ge IES 612 51A User s Guide Switch Setup The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global device features 10 1 GARP Timer Setup GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network devices to register and de register attribute values with other GARP partic
333. no effect if the Relay Mode is Both If the Relay Mode is Auto select which DHCP server the primary one or the secondary one to which the IES 612 51A should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Server List This section lists the DHCP servers that are already set up for each VLAN An asterisk in parentheses indicates which DHCP server is active for each VLAN Index This is a sequential value and it is not associated with any entry The entries are sorted by VLAN ID VLAN ID This field displays the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Primary Server IP This field displays the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests P Secondary Server This field displays the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests This field is 0 0 0 0 if the primary server is the only DHCP relay IES 612 51A User s Guide 189 Chapter 25 DHCP Relay Table 55 DHCP Relay continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All
334. noise margin to 0 db the downstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 30 db and the downstream minimum DSL transmission rate to 256Kbps The upstream down shift noise margin is 0 dB The upstream up shift noise margin is 6 dB The downstream down shift noise margin is 0 dB The downstream up shift noise margin is 6 dB Figure 216 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 1 ras adel profile set gold fast 1200 24000 5 0 30 128 5 0 30 256 0 6 0 6 346 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands This next example creates a similar premium profile named goldi except it sets an interleave delay of 16 ms for both upstream and downstream traffic Figure 217 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 2 ras adsl profile set goldi interleave 16 16 1200 24000 5 0 30 128 5 0 30 25 6 OG Et 36 After you create a DSL profile you can assign it to any of the DSL ports on the IES 612 51A 52 1 6 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Syntax ras adsl profile delete profile where profile A profile name This command allows you to delete an individual DSL profile by its name You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the IES 612 51A Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the gold DSL profile Figure 218 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl profile del
335. o frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for PPPoA to PPPoE conversions Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 30 TLS PVC Table 67 TLS PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display TLS PVC settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added
336. o the relaymode See Section 44 1 7 on page 293 Use VLAN ID 0 to set up the default DHCP server s for all non listed VLAN 44 1 5 Server Delete Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay server delete vid lt primary server gt where lt vid gt The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s lt primary The IP address of one DHCP server server gt This command deletes all information about DHCP servers for the specified VLAN Afterwards the specified VLAN can uses the default DHCP server s set up for VLAN ID 0 if any 44 1 6 Server Active Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcprelay server active lt vid gt lt active server gt 292 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 44 DHCP Commands where Sx The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s lt active server gt 1 The primary DHCP server is active 2 The secondary DHCP server is active This command has no effect if the relaymode is both If the relaymode is auto this command specifies to which DHCP server the primary one or the secondary one the IES 612 51A should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN 44 1 7 Relaymode Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay relaymode mode where mode relay process mode it controls to which DHCP server s the IES 612 51A relays DHCP requests auto the IES 612 51A relays DHCP requests to the active server for each VLAN both the IES 612 51A relays DHCP requests to the p
337. ocking listening learning or forwarding Disabled appears when RSTP has not been turned on for the individual port or the whole device Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree 0x0000 displays when this device is the root switch Path cost This is the path cost from this port to the root switch Cost to root This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Designated bridge This is the unique identifier for the bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address Designated port This is the port on the designated bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consisting of bridge priority Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling Set Interval 22 3 Spanning Tree Protocol Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol STP Config IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 84 Spanning Tree Protocol NE Bil STP Status Active E Bridge Priority 32768 0 565535 Hella Time z 1 10 seconds MAX Age al 6 40 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 4 30 seconds Prior
338. ode Commands Example ras adsl rpvc gateway set 192 168 10 102 1 ras cocadsb cpve get IL 8 235 DEEVARL 192 169 104200 4 232 192 P698 LO 102 ras adsl rove route set l 9 235 10 10 10 4 1724 53 7 2 RPVC Gateway Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc gateway set gateway ip vlan id lt priority gt where gateway ip The IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation vlan id The VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes to this gateway lt priority gt Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that you send to this gateway This command adds a gateway IP address to use for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example has the device use a VLAN ID of 1 and IEEE 802 1p priority of 3 when sending 2684 routed mode traffic to a gateway at IP address 192 168 10 102 Figure 271 RPVC Gateway Set Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway set 192 168 10 102 1 3 53 7 3 RPVC Gateway Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc gateway show IES 612 51A User s Guide es Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands This command displays the gateway IP addresses that are configured for use with 2684 routed mode traffic The following is an example Figure 272 RPVC Gateway Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway show gateway ip I924160510 102 53
339. off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again EI IES 612 51A User s Guide User Account The User Account screens allows you to set up and configure system administrator accounts for the IES 612 51A You can also configure the authentication policy for IES 612 51A administrators This is different than port authentication in Chapter 23 on page 181 See Chapter 23 on page 181 for background information on authentication 9 1 User Account Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting User Account Figure 39 User Account D User Account Authentication Enable Mame Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege high Ada Cancel Hame Privilege admin high Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Click this to open the Authentication screen See Section 9 2 on page 94 Select this check box to turn on the administrator account Name Enter a user name for the administrator account Enter a password for the administrator account Retype Password to Re enter the administrator account s password to verify that you have entered it Confirm correctly IES 612 51A User s Guide 93 Chapter 9 User Account Table 13 User Account continu
340. og Jaaooooad DS Carrieri 255 511 Jaaooooad Joaooooad oonsogog pooonnoo Joaooooad oongooon Joaooonod Jaaooooad hit 1 indicates the bin is masked off Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 xDSL Port Setting Seene o Customer Info Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port You can use up to 31 printable ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Customer Tel Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this ADSL port You can use up to 15 ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Profile Select a profile of ADSL settings such as the transfer rate interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings to assign to this port Use the Port Profile screen to configure port profiles see Chapter 14 on page 125 Mode Select the port s ADSL operational mode Select the mode that the subscriber s device uses or auto to have the IES 612 51A automatically determine the mode to use See Table 18 on page 107 for information on the individual ADSL modes IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Profile Select the port s alarm profile The alarm profile defines alarm thresholds for the ADSL port The IES 612 51A sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded see Section 14 6 on page
341. old settings 40 1 Alarm The IES 612 51A monitors for equipment DSL and system alarms and can report them via SNMP or syslog You can specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s You can also set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold 40 2 Alarm Status Screen This screen displays the alarms that are currently in the system To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Status Figure 129 Alarm Status e RAISIN Alarm Event Setup Alarm Port Setup Alarm Type all Refresh Clear Ho Alarm Condition Severity Timestamp SOurce 1 dsl line down minor 01 04 15 45 48 1 Page 10f 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Alarm Status Alarm Event Setup Click Alarm Event Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 40 4 on page 251 Alarm Port Setup Click Alarm Port Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s See Section 40 5 on page 254 Alarm Type Select which type of alarms to display by Severity or select All to look at all the alarms Click this button to update this screen IES 612 51A User s Guide 249 Chapter 40 Alarm
342. ommands Use these commands to apply ACL profiles to PVCs 54 2 1 ACL Assignment Set Command Syntax ras switch acl set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci profile where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PVC vci The VCI of the PVC profile The name of the ACL profile This command allows you to apply an ACL profile to the specified port s You can apply up to eight profiles to a subscriber port The following example applies the ACL profile test to a PVC Figure 292 ACL Assignment Set Command Example eg switch acl set 1 0 33 test 54 2 2 ACL Assignment Delete Command Syntax ras switch acl delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci profile 402 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 54 ACL Commands where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PVC vci The VCI of the PVC profile The name of the ACL profile This command allows you to remove an ACL profile from the specified PVC 54 2 3 ACL Assignment Show Command Syntax ras switch acl show lt portlist gt lt vpi gt l
343. ommands that allow you to configure and monitor the DSL ports 52 1 DSL Port Commands Use these commands to configure the DSL ports See Chapter 13 on page 107 for background information on DSL and ADSL 52 1 1 DSL Port Show Command Syntax ras adsl show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the activation status operational mode maximum upstream and downstream rate settings profile and name of each DSL port The following example displays information on DSL port 5 Figure 214 DSL Port Show Command Example ras adsl show 5 port enable mode up downstream profile name 5 auto 512 2048 DEFVAL 52 1 2 DSL Port Enable Command Syntax ras adsl enable lt portlist gt IES 612 51A User s Guide am Chapter 52 ADSL Commands where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command forcibly enables the specified DSL port s 52 1 3 DSL Port Disable Command Syntax ras gt adsl disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This com
344. onest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary 434 IES 612 51A User s Guide Appendix B Customer Support India e Support E mail support zyxel in e Sales E mail sales zyxel in e Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 e Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 e Web http www zyxel in e Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India e Support E mail support zyxel co jp e Sales E mail zyp zyxel co p e Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 e Web www zyxel co p Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan s Support http zyxel kz support e Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 e Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia e Support E mail support zyxel com my e Sales E mail
345. onnection Up SN seq no ds port port number pate gt lt us rate gt lt seq no gt sequence number of the connection or lt ds rate gt downstream rate ADSL Link Info NM lt ds lt us rate gt upstream rate NM gt lt us NM gt Spe us NM upstream noise margin ds NM downstream noise margin ADSL port Link WARN An ADSL port lost its connection Down SN seq no port port number seq no sequence number of the connection of Power Dying Gasp power Dying Gasp Event port port number Change time server to INFO The time server setting was changed to none none Change time server to The time server protocol setting was changed to TIME The time server s IP ADSL port Link Loss WARN The subscriber device connected to an ADSL port experienced a loss of TIME IP lt ip gt address and time zone are displayed Timezone time zone Change time server to INFO The time server protocol setting was changed to DAYTIME The time DAYTIME IP ip server s IP address and time zone are displayed Change time server to The time server protocol setting was changed to NTP The time server s IP NTP IP ip address and time zone are displayed Timezone time zone Ether port Link WARN An Ethernet link is down Down SN N port 1 is ENET1 2 is ENET2 SN an internal sequencer number Ether N Link Up SN N INFO An Ethernet link is up
346. operating range devi lt id gt limit lt id gt 1 1 2 V 2 1 8 V 3 3 3 V 4 18 V lt threshold gt value lt threshold gt voltage limit lt voltage gt voltage of the DC power when logged THERMO LOW WARN The temperature was too low at one of the temperature sensors TEMPERATURE dev lt id gt lt id gt threshold lt thresnolds 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset degree C 1 sensor near the CPU voltage value lt temp gt degree 2 thermal sensor chip C threshold temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER WARN The temperature was too high at one of the temperature sensors TEMPERATURE dev lt id gt id thresholdssthresholg 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset degree C 1 sensor near the CPU value lt temp gt degree 2 thermal sensor chip C threshold temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER INFO The temperature at one of the temperature sensors has come back to TEMPERATURE released normal d v lt id gt lt id gt threshold lt threshold gt 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset degree C 1 sensor near the CPU value lt temp gt degree 2 thermal sensor chip C lt threshold gt temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER VOLTAGE WARN The voltage at one of the voltage sensors went above the accepted deve Td lami operating range lt threshold gt value
347. or z minor 3 minor minor zl 3 Minor uxor sl minor Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Alarm Port Setup Alarm Status Click Alarm Status to go to a screen that displays the alarms that are currently in the system see Section 40 2 on page 249 Alarm Event Setup Click Alarm Event Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 40 4 on page 251 This column lists the device s individual DSL and Ethernet interfaces Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info as the threshold for recording alarms on this port Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 254 IES 612 51A User s Guide PART V CLI Commands Commands Summary 257 Command Examples 277 Alarm Commands 283 DHCP Commands 291 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 299 MAC Commands 307 IGMP Commands 313 Packet Filter Commands
348. or ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 2 G Lite ITU G 992 3 G dmt bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 3 Glite bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits 1 363 5 Compliant AAL5 SAR Segmentation And Re assembly ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation 56 4 Default Settings This section lists the default configuration of the IES 612 514A Table 115 Default Settings Default Login Settings Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 ADSL Default Settings Enable Disable State Operational Mode DSL Port Profile Default Settings Name DEFVAL Factory Default Profile Status Enabled auto Active Interleave Upstream ADSL Settings 512 Kbps 64 Kbps 4 ms Latency Mode Downstream ADSL Settings 2048 Kbps 64 Kbps 4 ms Max Rate Min Rate Latency Delay Max SNR 31 db 31 db IES 612 51A User s Guide D Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 115 Default Settings continued Min SNR Target SNR Up Shift Margin Down Shift Margin 0 db d oO 3d oO o Co o Name DEFVAL
349. or both upstream and downstream lt up max rate gt The maximum DSL upstream transmission rate 64 4096 Kbps lt down max rate gt The maximum DSL downstream transmission rate 64 32000 Kbps lt up target The target DSL upstream signal noise margin 0 31db margin gt up min margin gt The minimum acceptable DSL upstream signal noise margin 0 3 1db lt up max margin gt The maximum acceptable DSL upstream signal noise margin 0 31db The minimum DSL upstream transmission rate 32 4096 Kbps The target DSL downstream signal noise margin 0 31db up min rate down target margin down min The minimum acceptable DSL downstream signal noise margin gt margin 0 31db IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands down max The maximum acceptable DSL downstream signal noise margin gt margin 0 31db down min rate The minimum DSL downstream transmission rate 32 32000 Kbps up down shift The upstream down shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin up up shift The upstream up shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin down down The downstream down shift noise margin 0 31 in dB shift margin down up shift The downstream up shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin gt The profile is a table that contains information on DSL line configuration Each entry in this table reflects a parameter defined by a manager which can be used to configur
350. ors Foll Intervali s 40 Set Interval Stop Port 1 Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Port Statistics DSL LABEL DESCRIPTION RMON Click this to open the RMON Statistics screen Return Click this to go back to the Home screen xDSL Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen Port Name This field displays the name that you have configured for the port If you have not configured a name it is blank Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port Tx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast packets transmitted on this port packets Rx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast packets received on this port packets Tx discard packets This field shows the number of outgoing packets that were dropped on this port The Tx discard packets counter always displays 0 because the IES 612 51A does not discard packets that it sends EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 7 Port Statistics DSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx discard packets This field shows the number of received packets that were dropped on this port Some of the possible reasons for the discarding of received rx packets are e T
351. oting CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the statistics monitor command to verify the cause of the alarm See step 2 if the unit is overheated and step 3 if the voltages are out of the allowed ranges Ensure that the IES 612 51A is installed in a well ventilated area Keep the bottom top and all sides clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment If the voltage levels are outside the allowed range take a screen shot of the statistics monitor command display and contact your vendor IES 612 51A User s Guide 407 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 55 3 LAN Port LEDs Do Not Turn On A LAN port s LEDs do not turn on Table 101 10 100 LED Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Check the Speed Mode settings in the ENET Port Setup screen Make sure that the LAN port s connection speed is set to match that of the port on the peer Ethernet device 2 Check the Ethernet cable and connections between the LAN port and the peer Ethernet device Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly If the Ethernet cable and peer Ethernet device are both OK and the LEDs still stay off there may be a problem with the port Contact the distributor 55 4 LAN Port Data Transmission The LAN port s LED is on but data cannot be transmitted Table 102 Troubleshooting Data Transmission and the Ethernet switch or router 8 Note Check the switch mode In daisychain mode if you have a loop topology and enable RSTP it is
352. otocol See SNMP Single End Loop Test See SELT SMT 43 SNMP 43 225 commands 226 Get 226 GetNext 226 manager 226 MIBs 227 supported versions 225 Trap 226 traps 227 SNMP screen 228 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP specifications 417 static multicast filter 163 static route 235 metric 236 Static VLAN See SVLAN Statistics DSL port 79 Ethernet port 77 statistics adsl commands 357 statistics dhcp commands 296 statistics igmpsnoop commands 321 statistics ip commands 334 statistics monitor command 281 statistics port command 281 STP 175 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDU 176 designated bridge 175 hello time 176 max age 176 path cost 175 port path cost 180 port priority 180 port states 176 root bridge 175 root port 175 super channel 115 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 129 SVLAN 299 switch acl commands 402 switch acl profile commands 399 switch dhcprelay commands 291 switch dhcpsnoop commands 295 switch igmpfilter commands 314 switch igmpsnoop bandwidth commands 316 switch igmpsnoop commands 313 switch igmpsnoop igmpcount commands 319 switch igmpsnoop mvlan commands 323 switch isolation commands 280 switch mac count commands 310 switch mac filter commands 307 switch pktfilter commands 327 Switch Setup 99 switch vlan commands 300 syntax conventions 4 Sys commands 277 SYS LED troubleshooting 407 sys snmp commands 341 syslog 223 System Information 87 system log 242 442 IES 612 51A User
353. ound traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Priority 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh IES 612 51A User s Guide 101 Chapter 10 Switch Setup 102 IES 612 51A Users Guide IP Setup The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a device IP address subnet mask and DNS domain name server for management purposes To open this screen click Basic Setting IP Setup Figure 44 IP Setup IP mask PUE TER Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway bas 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION 00 the IP address of your Lo MEEEENMMMUEMSD 612 51A in dotted decimal notation for example 1 2 3 4 IP Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your IES 612 51A in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Click Apply IP setting to save your changes to the device s IP address and or subnet mask to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use th
354. owmap Command Example cccccsessccccesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaeeessaeseeeeaeees 373 Figure 258 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 1 376 Figure 259 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 2 376 Figure 260 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 3 377 Figure 261 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Example cccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeas arr Fig r 262 PVC Set Command EXamplE ORT o D 379 Figure 2693 PFG Set Command Ru EE 380 Figure 264 PPVC Member Set Command Example c sccccceeecceeeaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseeeeeeeeeseseeaaaeeess 381 Figure 265 PPVC Member Delete Command Example 382 Figure 266 PPVC Member Show Command Example ccccccccsssseceeeeceeeeeceeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneaeeees 382 Fue 287 FPYL onaw Gommang EXSImplB EE 383 Figure 268 PPVC Delete Command Example esses eene n nnns 383 Figure 269 2684 Routed Mode Example 384 Figure 270 2684 Routed Mode Commands Example ccccccssssssseceeeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeeseeseaaaeeees 385 Figure 271 RPVC Gateway Set Command Example cccccssscccecceeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseaeseeeeeenas 385 Figure 272 RPVC Gateway Show Command Example nennen nnns 386 Figure 273 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Example cccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 386 Figure 274 RPVC Set Command Example ccccccccseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaaeee
355. own 43 9 Alarm History Clear Command Syntax ras alarm history clear lt alarm gt all condition all severity This command removes historic alarm entries by alarm category alarm condition or severity The following example removes the historic minor level alarms for all alarm categories and all conditions Figure 143 Alarm History Clear Command Example be alarm history clear minor IES 612 51A User s Guide 287 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 43 10 Alarm XEdit Command Syntax ras alarm xedit alarm all lt cond gt lt condcode gt severity fac lt target gt lt target gt clearable where lt cond gt all condition This is the text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm conditions lt condcode gt The condition code is the number of a specific alarm message Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm condition codes lt severity gt Specify an alarm severity level critical major minor or info for this alarm Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe fac The log facility 10ca11 10ca17 has the device log the syslog messages to a particular file in the syslog server Set this if this entry is for sending alarms to a syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details target snmp syslog
356. pe lt etype gt vlan vid smac mac dmac mac priority priority protocol protocol priority 0 7 lt etype gt 0 65535 lt protocol gt tcp udp ospf igmp ip gre icmp pty pe ptype 0 65535 Note multiple field rules position independent MFC rules srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt tos lt tos gt srcport lt port gt dstport lt port gt lt mask gt 0 32 lt tos gt 0 255 lt port gt 0 65535 lt action gt rate lt rate gt rvian lt rvian gt rpri rpri deny lt rate gt 1 65535 in unit of kbps rvlan replaced vlan 1 4094 lt rpri gt replaced priority 0 7 M acl profile show Display an acl profile acl profile name Display acl profile reference showmap acl delete lt pOrtlist gt vpl Remove an acl profile from PVC H vci profile profile string32 up to 8 profiles if only one PVC has profiles 2 0 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P acl set spOrtIrSt vpl Apply an acl profile to a PVC M H vel lt prolLile gt Max 8 profiles per port acl show portiist lt ypi gt Show acl profile setting for a PVC L L lt vci gt dhcpsnoop disable Disable ip spoofing for a port dhcpsnoop enable Enable ip spoofing for a port H H M H dhcpsnoop flush lt SORE Lie o Flush DHCP snooping table for a port dhcpsnoop show Displ
357. pen this screen click Advanced Application VLAN Static VLAN Setting Figure 65 Static VLAN Setting d EARNE VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting VID Actie Hame Delete L Yes DEFAULT BR Delete Cancel Active BR Mame VAN ID fo 14094 Port Control Tagging Select All Select All Select E None Norma Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Normal Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging Fixed Forbidden IT Tx Tagging The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Static VLAN Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click VLAN Status to see which of the IES 612 51A s ports are members of which VLANs see Section 16 3 on page 146 VLAN Port Setting Click VLAN Port Setting to specify Port VLAN IDs PVIDs See Section 16 5 on page 149 148 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 16 VLAN Table 33 Static VLAN Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or
358. per ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool 3 Connect the lower ports of MDF 3 to the upper ports of MDF 2 for those users that want DSL service Users who want telephone service only retain the original connection from the top port of MDF 2 to the bottom port of MDF 1 4 Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s DSL equipment to the lower ports of MDF 2 5 Connect the CO wiring of the Telco 50 cable to the lower ports of MDF 4 using a punch down tool 6 Connect the top ports of MDF 4 to the bottom ports of MDF 1 using telephone wires 7 Connect the top ports of MDF 1 to the telephone company EI IES 612 51A User s Guide PART ll Basic Settings Introducing the Web Configurator 61 Initial Configuration 69 Home and Port Statistics Screens 75 System Information 87 General Setup 91 User Account 93 Switch Setup 97 IP Setup 103 ENET Port Setup 105 xDSL Port Setup 107 xDSL Profiles Setup 125 xDSL Line Data 137 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter tells how to access and navigate the web configurator 4 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator allows you to use a web browser to manage the IES 612 51A 4 2 Screen Privilege Levels There is a high or low privilege level for each screen High privilege screens are only available to administrators with high privilege access High privilege screens include things like creating administrator accounts restart
359. phone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 e Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica e Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr e Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 e Fax 506 2015098 e Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 e Fax 420 241 091 359 e Web www zyxel cz IES 612 51A User s Guide 433 Appendix B Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support 9 zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info Q zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Lim
360. policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel Add Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port The name of the Apply button depends on whether or not you have clicked on a PVC number in the Index column This saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select the number of an ADSL port for which to display VC settings or display all of them Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs This field displays the number of the ADSL port o
361. possible for RSTP to disable Ethernet port 1 the uplink port Note It is not recommended to use daisychain mode in a loop topology 55 5 DSL Data Transmission The DSL link is up but data cannot be transmitted Table 103 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Check the switch mode and port isolation settings Check to see that the VPI VCI and multiplexing mode LLC VC settings in the subscriber s DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port If the subscriber is having problems with a video or other high bandwidth services make sure the IES 612 51A s DSL port s data rates are set high enough Check the VLAN configuration Ping the IES 612 51A from the computer behind the DSL modem or router 408 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting Table 103 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting continued CORRECTIVE ACTION If you cannot ping connect a DSL modem to a DSL port that is known to work If the DSL modem or router works with a different DSL port there may be a problem with the original port Contact the distributor 5 If using a different port does not work try a different DSL modem or router with the original port 55 6 There Is No Voice on a DSL Connection The IES 612 51A has internal splitters and CO side Telco 50 connectors that allow the telephone wiring used for DSL connections to also simultaneously carry normal voice conversations Table 104 DSL Voice T
362. r example use 0x01000000 in Mask2 to disable downstream carrier tone 71 Use 0x03000000 in Mask to disable downstream carrier tones 70 and 71 4 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DS Carrier1 Mask represents tones 256 287 2567511 Mask1 represents tones 288 319 Mask2 represents tones 320 351 Mask3 represents tones 352 383 Mask4 represents tones 384 415 Mask5 represents tones 416 447 Mask6 represents tones 448 479 Mask7 represents tones 480 511 For example use 0x00001000 in Mask1 to disable downstream carrier tone 307 Use 0x0000f000 in Mask1 to disable downstream carrier tones 304 to 307 Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 13 8 Virtual Channels Defining virtual channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs allows you to set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign dif
363. r s ADSL modem or router The Info Atuc fields show data acquired from the ATUC ADSL Termination Unit Central in this case IES 612 51A during negotiation provisioning message interchanges The vendor ID vendor version number and product serial number are obtained from vendor ID fields see ITU T G 994 1 or R MSGS 1 see T1 413 A At the time of writing the IES 612 51A always uses Trellis coding 15 2 xDSL Performance Screen These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started The definitions of near end far end are always relative to the ATU C ADSL Termination Unit Central Office ATU C refers to downstream traffic from the IES 612 51A ATU R ADSL Termination Unit Remote refers to upstream traffic from the subscriber To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Performance 138 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data Figure 62 xDSL Performance ERSTEN Line Rate Line Data Port 2 Port Mame Performance Refresh Line Type Fast and Interleave Init oO ATUC ATUR ES ATUC ATUR SES O 0 ATUC ATUR UAS 0 0 Fast FEBE O Far End CRC Fast NEBE O Near End CR Fast FEFEC O Far End Corrected FEC Fast WEFEC O Near End Corrected FEC Interleaved FEBE O Far End CRC Interleaved NEBE UO Near End CRE Interleaved FEFEC Far End Corrected FEC Interleaved MEFEC 0 Near End Corrected FEC LPR 15 min his
364. r voice or data traffic Select UBR unspecified bit rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR real time variable bit rate or NRT VBR non real time variable bit rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications PCR The Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells PCR applies with all of the ATM traffic classes You can type a number of ATM cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT applies with all of the ATM traffic classes Type the CDVT here SCHR The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR SCR applies with the VBR traffic classes You can type a number of ATM cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second Burst Tolerance BT sets a maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards Type the BT here BT applies with the VBR traffic classes Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatil
365. rames received transmitted including bad frames that were 256 to 511 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStatsb512to1023Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 512 to 1023 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats1024to1518Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes Set Interval You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Clear Counter Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Heset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 4 RMON History Screen Use this screen to display general information such as sample time on history samples To open this screen click any port number in the RMON Statistics screen IES 612 51A User s Guide 83 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 35 Port Statistics RMON History vd RMON Histo Enet 1 Index interval 1 30 sl Seconds Apnty Refresh Sample index Interval Star
366. re 145 Show Command Example ccccccccccceeeeecceeeeenseceeeeeseeeceeceeseeseceessseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesesegeseeees 291 Figure 146 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Example cccccccssececceeseecceeeceeseeueeecseseeesseaeeeeseaes 295 Figure 147 DHCP Snoop Show Command Example eese nenne nenas 296 Figure 148 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Example nennen 297 Figure 149 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Example 5 eicere entera rara ENEE 297 Figure 130 VLAN Port Show Command Example ues im ert opp EIE OR IAEIEPRRTEEIESERETULH bn FCU Stu RES GE 300 Foure 191 VLAN PMID Command EXIIT AE 300 Figure 152 VLAN CPU Set Command Example 1st i nier rote set e plane Unio etae b Uo ropes Mb Les eR aba 301 Figure 153 Modifying the Static VLAN Example ccccccccccesseseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 302 Figure 154 VLAN Frame Type Command Example ENEE 303 Figure 155 VLAN CPU Set Command Example cccccccccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeeeeeesseaaeeeeeseaas 303 Figure 156 VLAN CPU Set Command Example geesde geed 303 Figure 157 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example cccceccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeesaees 304 Figure 158 Deleting Default VLAN Example Netgen gEdgede 304 Figure 159 VLAN Delete Command Example ccccccscccccccceeseeceeeceseeecceeeceeeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseaas 304 Figure 160 VLAN Show Command Example iaietaesaiecictened rbi
367. re using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the silver virtual channel profile Figure 261 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Example ras adsl vcprofile delete silver 53 3 PVC Channels Channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs let you set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them Use the following commands to define channels 53 3 1 PVC Show Command Syntax Pas adsl pve show lportlxst JI vpso Ves IES 612 51A User s Guide 377 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands where portiisto EVOL eror You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC This command allows you to display the PVC parameters of the specified DSL port s or all of the DSL ports if you do not specify any 53 3 2 PVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl pvo set bortlist vor vcl super vi
368. received noise power could increase with the IES 612 514 still being able to meet its transmission targets This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm E g This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier IES 612 51A User s Guide 369 Table 98 ToneDiag Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION log dB This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line OLN dBm The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture 52 3 Alarm Profile Commands Configure alarm profiles to set alarm settings and thresholds for the DSL ports 52 3 1 Alarm Profile Show Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile show profile where profile The name of an alarm profile Displays the se
369. ress Resolution Protocol table The following 1s an example Figure 282 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp show gateway ip 92 169 10 192 i 39020d0 90 09 45 93D 53 7 14 RPVC ARP Flush Command Syntax ras gt adsl rpvc arp flush IES 612 51A Users Guide E Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands This command clears the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways from the Address Resolution Protocol table 53 8 PPPoA to PPPoE PAE Commands You can use these commands to create PVCs for PAE translation 53 8 1 PAE PVC Delete Command ras adsl paepvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci Syntax where ApOrt list gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PAE PVC The VCI of the PAE PVC This command removes a PAE PVC 53 8 2 PAE PVC Set Command Syntax raso adsl psepvo set DOrtlTst e vpl vole D 9 wveoebroftile US veprofile o lt pvid gt priority acname lt acname gt srvcname srvcname hellotime hellotime where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt DS vcprofile US vcprofile lt pvid gt SpIgq TU DSL port 1 all DSL ports or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5
370. rimary and secondary server for each VLAN regardless of which one is active This command controls how the IES 612 51A routes DHCP requests The IES 612 51A can route DHCP requests to the active DHCP server for the VLAN or it can route DHCP requests to all DHCP servers set up for the VLAN 44 2 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 1 Circuit ID Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay Option 82 agent information feature sub option 1 This feature applies regardless of whether or not the DHCP relay is on 44 2 1 Option 82 Sub option 1 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 enable This command turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 1 feature IES 612 51A User s Guide 293 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 44 2 2 Option 82 Sub option 1 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 disable This command turns off the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 1 feature 44 2 3 Option 82 Sub option 1 Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 set lt relay info gt where lt relay info Upto 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the IES 612 51A to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the name of the IES 612 51A or the ISP This command adds the specified information for the relay agent 44 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option
371. riority is 0 This configuration is for the video service on the vom access concentrator The switch waits 10 seconds before terminating the PPPoE session Figure 283 PAE PVC Set Command Example ras adsl paepvc set 1 1 33 DEFVAL 1 0 acname vom srvcname video hellotime 10 93 8 3 PAE PVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc show lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PAE PVC This command displays the PPPoA to PPPoE PVC settings for the specified port s or PVCs The following example displays the settings for port 1 IES 612 51A User s Guide E Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands Figure 284 PAE PVC Show Command Example ras adsl paepvc show 1 port vpi vci pvid pri htime US DS vcprofile acname srvcname L 1 Bo 1 0 10 dsprofile DEFVAL usprofile acname vom srvcname video 53 9 4 PAE PVC Session Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc session lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt Th
372. roubleshooting Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and the CO connector s Check the connection from the MDF s to the telephone company or the PBX Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly Repeat the steps above using a different DSL port 55 Testing Wiring Use the following tests 1f there 1s no voice Systematically test wiring using a functioning telephone to determine if there is a wiring problem If the connection is good the telephone will return a dial tone Letters 1n the figure shown next indicate the systematic tests to be done Suppose you re using installation scenario B as shown in the chapter on MDF connections The logic for other scenarios should be similar Use steps A D if there is no voice but you can transmit data Use all of the steps if there is no voice and you cannot transmit data Table 105 Wiring Tests DESCRIPTION Test A determines if there is a wiring problem between the TELCO telephone company and MDF 1 Test B determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 1 and MDF 2 Test C determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 2 and your device Test D determines if there is a problem with your device s internal splitter IES 612 51A User s Guide 409 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting Table 105 Wiring Tests DESCRIPTION Test E determines if there is a wiring problem between your device and MD
373. rsus Aciual Hale ouepdrers xttunbiA Mages Zap rez tret EENE EE Nra 108 PE NS 109 Tod XDSL Pan E OTe E 109 EE For Seling STOEN Attert tee 111 13 8 Virtua Channels AA steiert bred iaa aa aE MAN EEEERE NI e 115 is mE see 115 ESA E Y V Y VY 116 kg EE 116 TE BETEN Aer 116 IRAE PE qb9 lei 1 EE 116 TIO leen D gt LE 120 Nk E e EE 121 13 11 1 PPVC Setup Members Screen eeeesessesssssssesseseee nennen nennen nnne nnne nns 122 Chapter 14 AN TT i RC 125 RE eng ee osesaretten E 125 LSU Pe E 127 ILS HANE ODD EE 128 E E RE e EE 128 14 3 2 Traffic Parameters ccccccccceecccesceceeeeceeeeceneeceneeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseueeseaeesasesseeesags 128 IES 612 51A User s Guide E Table of Contents ia dis u Me e em m mem 130 a eg E 131 TRO I Frona E rt EE 133 DUM IC iui eM ED NT PM TE 134 14 8 IGMP Filter Profile Screen EN 135 Chapter 15 WER EE ee 137 EE KR E EE i TP LU NET 137 IS XDSL E 138 IOS DSL LIS LO AGT SOIL used ox FERRUM EENEG 140 Part Ill Advanced Application 143 Chapter 16 CR erem poate eels ene 145 151 RE LAND ar A ev Pu Du iveU E 145 16 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN sienne tto pic hee 145 16 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
374. rt Profile Click Port Profile to open the Port Profile screen see Section 14 1 on page 125 Use the Port Profile screen to configure profiles of ADSL port settings such as the transfer rate interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings VC Profile Click VC Profile to open the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 131 IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 135 Name This field is read only if you click Modify to edit a port profile Type a name to identify the alarm profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again IES 612 51A User s Guide 133 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 27 Alarm Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters The IES 612 51A sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold ATU
375. rt Setting Screen Use this screen to specify port VLAN IDs and to set whether or not Ethernet ports propagate VLAN information to other devices To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Port Setting IES 612 51A User s Guide 149 Chapter 16 VLAN Figure 66 VLAN Port Setting VLAN Status Static VLAN Setting PVID iari GVRP Acceptable Frame Type ji 91 4094 i 914094 i 91 4094 i 91 4094 D 0 4084 D 4004 i 1 4084 Apply Cancel Copy port 1 Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click VLAN Status to see which of the IES 612 51A s ports are members of which VLANs see Section 16 3 on page 146 Static VLAN Click Static VLAN to configure ports to dynamically join a VLAN group or permanently assign ports to a VLAN group or prohibit ports from joining a VLAN group see Section 16 4 on page 148 Port The port numbers identify the IES 612 51A s ports PVID Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The IES 612 51A assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port Priority Select an IEEE 802 1p priority to assign to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port GVRP Select this check box if the IES 612 51A should use GVRP to automatically register and configure VLAN membership A Acceptable Frame Select All to have the port accept both t
376. rt This field displays the DSL port number on which the PVC is configured VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port 220 IES 612 51A User s Guide Downstream Broadcast This chapter shows you how to allow or block downstream broadcast traffic 32 1 Downstream Broadcast Downstream broadcast allows you to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports 32 2 Downstream Broadcast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Downstream Broadcast Figure 111 Downstream Broadcast HIT Broadcast Port i sl vw AN Blocking Table Port 411 Index Port VLAM Select Delete Select BED None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Downstream Broadcast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings VLAN Specify the number of a VLAN on this entry s port to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic The VLAN must already be configured in the system Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring MEME LLL Port Use this drop down l
377. rt mcast ip ip start multicast IP address end mcast ip ip end multicast IP address igmpsnoop Show bandwidth budget for a bandwidth show range of multicast IP channels igmpsnoop zportlsst Disable IGMP count limiting to igmpcount disable subscriber port igmpsnoop lt portlist gt Enable IGMP count limiting to igmpcount enable subscriber port igmpsnoop lt portlist gt count Set IGMP count limiting number to H H igmpcount set subscriber port igmpsnoop portlist Display IGMP count limiting igmpcount show setting status on the specified slot L H H L H H M L IES 612 51A User s Guide 267 Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P igmpsnoop mvlan vid Configures a MVLAN entry H H set POLC S CaS ELTU xX DSDOEStlLrISt lt F lt T U gt X gt name igmpsnoop mvlan lt vlanlist gt Show multicast vlans M L show Include group information igmpsnoop mvlan lt vid gt Turns off a MVLAN entry H H disable igmpsnoop mvlan lt vid gt Turns on a MVLAN entry H H enable igmpsnoop mvlan lt vlanlist gt Removes a MVLAN entry H H delere H igmpsnoop mvlan vid index Create a multicast to VLAN group set start mcas 2p translation entry end mcast ip up to 16 entries index 1 16 H Note IP address in each entry should be disjointed igmpsnoop mvlan vid index Delete a multicast to VL
378. rtlist gt lt vpi gt vci member vpi gt member vci DS vcprofile US vcprofile gt level where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt Do vocprorlile The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC This PVC channel 1s for internal use The subscriber does not need to create this PVC The VPI of the individual PVC that you are adding to the PPVC The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 The VCI of the individual PVC that you are adding to the PPVC The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 with a VPI of 0 or 1 to 65535 if the VPI is not 0 The subscriber s device must create this PVC Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping 380 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s E upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile level The priority queue 0 7 to use for this PVCs traffic 7 is the highest priority This command adds a member PVC to a PPVC You must create the PPVC before you use this command to add a member BES Only the member PVCs need to be created on the su
379. rver for example Then you can assign the IGMP filter profile to DSL ports that are allowed to use the service 47 3 1 IGMP Filter Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpfilter show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays which IGMP filter profile a DSL port s is using The following example displays which IGMP filter profile DSL port 5 is using Figure 174 IGMP Filter Show Command Example ras gt switch igmpfilter show 5 DEF VAL 47 3 2 IGMP Filter Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpfilter set lt port gt lt name gt 314 IES 612 51A User s Guide where SOT m lt name gt Chapter 47 IGMP Commands You can specify a single DSL port 1 or all DSL ports lt gt The name of an IGMP filter profile This command sets a DSL port s to use an IGMP filter profile The following example sets DSL port 5 to use the voice IGMP filter profile Figure 175 IGMP Filter Set Command Example ras gt switch igmpfilter set 5 voice 47 3 3 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command ras switch igmpfilter profile set name index lt startip gt lt endip gt Syntax where name lt index gt lt startip gt lt endip gt Specify a name to identify the IGMP filter profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile
380. s VLAN entries 256 VLAN DSL Line mapping map one DSL line VPI VCI to one VLAN maximum 256 VLANs supported Residential bridging user to user traffic can be blocked IEEE 802 1q Tag based VLAN GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Transparent LAN Service TLS or IEEE 802 1ad Q in Q VLAN stacking Port Isolation ADSL2 2 accept tagged untagged frame from CPE Quality of Service Traffic shaping Bandwidth control SPQ priority queuing SPQ 4 queues per Ethernet port 8 queues per DSL port PVC IEEE 802 1p mapping DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping Priority queuing based on physical port VLAN details source destination MAC address source destination IP address TCP UDP port number ToS and DSCP value The priority queues are configurable based on the PVC ATM service types UBR CBR rt VBR nrt VBR to 802 1p priority mapping Layer 2 Bridging IEEE 802 1q VLAN aware bridging MAC addresses MAC address table Up to 9 5K entries MAC addresses per port Up to 128 addresses ARP Table Up to 500 entries Automatic MAC address learning Configurable number of MAC addresses learned per port 1 128 MAC aging out time Source MAC address filtering 10 MAC addresses per port MAC anti spoofing STP RSTP IEEE 802 1d spanning tree protocol STP IEEE 802 1w rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1p priority queue mapping static mapping DHCP DHCP Snooping Anti Spoofing DHCP relay Option 82 globally 420 IES 612 51A Users Guide
381. s 243 Lineinio Command rn EEN 359 Figure 244 Lineperf Command Example sce cs ntfedniera yiceanceyeseuincaasdersessiaundiaacisneeniperanionsarecnienieesuvaeendic 360 Figure 245 15 Minute Performance Command Example 361 Figure 246 1Day Performance Command Example A 363 Figure 247 Line Diagnostics Set Command Example ssseesssssesseeeeeeen nennen nnns 363 Figure 248 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example cccccccsseeecceeeeeessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeauseeeeeeeesaaeseees 364 Figure 249 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command Example sssnoss1nnnnneeeeeserttrtrrrnessssrtrrrtrrreesssnnnne 366 Figure 250 SELT Diagnostic Set Command Example cccccccsssccceeeeseceeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeceesseaeeeeeauees 367 Figure 251 Line Diagnostics Get Command Emmer aeria ria PenEi bmi ica Eerst 368 Figure 252 Tone Diagnostics Command Example cccccsssssceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseceeeseaseeeeesseasseeeesseaaseeees 369 Figure 253 Alarm Profile Show Command Example sse 370 32 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Figures Figure 254 Alarm Profile Set Command Example 1 oi be iren roro kata Sec eara El aa ehre EC rara ran 372 Figure 255 Alarm Profile Delete Command Example ccccccccsssseeeeeeseceeseeeeceeeseeeeeesaeaeeesesaneeessaaes 372 Figure 256 Alarm Profile Map Command Example ccccccccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeees 373 Figure 257 Alarm Profile Sh
382. s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P H rpvc delete lt portlist gt vplo Delete RPVC on a port Suo pvo show Display RPVC on a por rpvo route set H M L port number Set RPVC routing subnet on a H H SE lt Vver gt 3p7 port lt netmask gt rpvc route delete port number Delete RPVC routing subnet on a supir UOI lt ip gt port lt netmask gt rpvc route show Display RPVC routing subnet ona M L port rpvc arp agingtime Display RPVC ARP proxy aging H H show time Set RPVC ARP proxy aging time M L rpvc arp agingtime sec set 10 10000 I0 disabl ed rpve arp flush MEME Flush RPVC ARP proxy table H H rpvc arp show La Show RPVC ARP proxy table M L H paepvc delete Delete a PPPoAoE PVC M lt vci gt paepvc set sport list vpi Create modify a PPPoAoE PVC M H lt vyvci gt DS acname access concentrator vcprofile US name vcprofile lt pvid gt srvcname service name priority acname lt time gt 0 600 in unit of second SEE S ORS far Default acname srvcname srvcname lt time gt 600 ASE ENG 2 hellotime time paepvc show Display PPPoAoE PVC setting by L L paepvc session portl4tst E Display PPPoAoE PVC session vei status paepvc counter portlist vpi Display PPPoAoE PVC counter lt vci gt tlspvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Delete a TLS PVC SU
383. s Overview These are the ADSL standards and rates that the IES 612 51A supports at the time of writing The actual transfer rates will vary depending on what the subscriber s device supports the line conditions and the connection distance Table 18 ADSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates STANDARD MAXIMUM DOWNSTREAM MAXIMUM UPSTREAM G dmt Annex A 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps G dmt Annex B 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps ETSI 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps 13 2 Downstream and Upstream Downstream refers to traffic going out from the IES 612 514A to the subscriber s ADSL modem or router Upstream refers to traffic coming into the IES 612 51A from the subscriber s ADSL modem or router 13 3 Profiles A profile is a table that contains a list of pre configured ADSL settings Each ADSL port has one and only one profile assigned to it at any given time You can configure multiple profiles including profiles for troubleshooting Profiles allow you to configure ADSL ports efficiently You can configure all of the ADSL ports with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the ADSL ports one by one You can also change an individual ADSL port by assigning it a different profile IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup For example you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts for example economy standard and premium Assign the appropriate profile to an ADSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port s configura
384. s Overview These are commands that you may use frequently in configuring and maintaining your IES 612 514 See Chapter 45 on page 299 for commands that deal with the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 42 2 Sys Commands These are the commonly used commands that belong to the sys system group of commands 42 2 1 Log Show Command Syntax ras sys log show This command displays the system error log An example is shown next Figure 133 Log Show Command Example show 11 20 37 11 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 11 20 37 05 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 11 20 36 56 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 42 3 Log Format The common format of the system logs is item no time process type log message Table 89 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the log entry time This is the time and date when the log was created process This is the process that created the log IES 612 51A User s Guide 2 1 Chapter 42 Command Examples Table 89 Log Format continued DESCRIPTION type This identifies what kind of log it is INFO identifies an information log WARN identifies a warning log log message This is the log s detailed information see Table 90 on page 278 42 3 1 Log Messages The following table lists and describes the system log messages Table 90 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION 0000000000000 ADSL porto Link INFO An d port established a c
385. s by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The device has 4 physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels for outgoing Ethernet traffic The device has 8 physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels for outgoing DSL traffic Traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through the device faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates IEEE 802 1p Priority 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Priority 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Priority 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Priority 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Priority 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Priority 2 This is for spare bandwidth Priority 1 This is typically used for non critical backgr
386. s for non interleaved fast mode A block is a set of consecutive bits associated with the path each bit belongs to one and only one block Consecutive bits may not be contiguous in time Table 94 Line Performance Counters DESCRIPTION The Number of Far End Block Errors Cyclic Redundancy Check Near end Cyclic Redundancy Check errors The Far End blocks repaired by Forward Error Correction 360 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Table 94 Line Performance Counters continued LABEL DESCRIPTION The Near End blocks repaired by Forward Error Correction The number of link ups and link downs es The Number of Errored Seconds This is how many seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect ses The Number of Severely Errored Seconds This is how many seconds contained 3096 or more errored blocks This is a subset of n es uas The Number of Unavailable Seconds lor The Number of Loss of Power Seconds on the ATUR that have occurred 52 2 5 15 Minute Performance Command Syntax Fas gt statistics adsl lb5mpert portlrst count 0596 where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt count lt 0 96 gt Specify for which 15 minute interval 0 96 you want to display performance statistics O is the current 15 minutes This command displays
387. s gt alarm port show ifindex severity Press any key to continue e to exit n for nopause 43 5 Alarm Port Set Command Syntax ras alarm port set alll enetl enet2 port severity where all enetl enet Ports on the IES 612 51A AZ port This command sets the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold The following example has the IES 612 51A only record critical alarms on DSL port 7 Figure 140 Alarm Port Set Command Example ras alarm port set 7 critical 43 6 Alarm Tablelist Command Syntax ras alarm tablelist lt alarm gt all lt severity gt all lt fac gt all lt target gt lt target gt condition all where lt fac gt The log facility 10ca11 10ca17 that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details lt target gt snmp syslog all The type of alarm messages that the device is to send SNMP syslog or all IES 612 51A User s Guide 285 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands This command lists alarm settings The following example displays the supported minor level alarms for all alarm categories facilities types of alarm messages and conditions Figure 141 Alarm Tablelist Command Example ras alarm table no alarm condition facility snmp syslog severity
388. s screen click Management Maintenance Click here Reboot System Figure 124 Reboot System Microsoft Internet Explorer E xj j 22 Are vou sure you want to reboot system Cancel Click OK You then see the screen as shown in Figure 123 on page 240 Click OK again and wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the device s configuration 36 7 Command Line FTP See Chapter 50 on page 335 for how to upload or download files to or from the device using FTP commands 240 IES 612 51A User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screens 37 1 Diagnostic Screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform loopback tests To open this screen click Management Diagnostic Figure 125 Diagnostic Syslog Event Lag IP Ping Loopback Test LOM Test SELT F MM ToneDiag Display Clear IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping i Times 1 10 pol v vei o velo OAMFS Loopback Port 1 Set LDM Port Get LDM Datairaw Get LDM Data 992 3 pont zl SetSELT Port Get SELT Data pont 1 zl Mode Lo zl Set PMM Mode Get PMM Mode Port 1 zl Get ToneDiag data IES 612 51A User s Guide 241 Chapter 37 Diagnostic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Event Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the tex
389. s to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 5 Service Access Control Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Service Access Control IES 612 51A User s Guide 229 Chapter 34 Access Control Figure 116 Service Access Control Kee Return Services Active Server Port Telnet 23 1 55535 FER 2 1 555351 WEB sn 1 B5535 MP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Return to go back to the previous screen Services you may use to access the IES 612 51A are listed here Active Select the Active check boxes for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the IES 612 51A Server Port For Telnet FTP or web services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 6 Remote Ma
390. set name rule action where name The name of the ACL profile rule The rule that classifies traffic flows See below actione One or more actions to perform on the classified packets You can select one or more of the following actions e rate rate Sets the transmission rate 1 65535 in kbps for the matched traffic rvlan lt rvlan gt Replaces the VLAN ID with this VLAN ID 174094 e rpri rpri Replaces the priority with this priority 0 7 of the matched packets deny Drops the packets This command configures an ACL rule to classify the upstream traffic and perform action s on the classified traffic The following lists the set of criteria you can configure for rules in ACL profiles The rules are listed in sequence from highest priority to lowest priority The criteria within a rule are po sition independent etype lt etype gt vlan vid etype eLype smac lt mac etype lt etype gt dmac mac vlan vid smac mac vlan lt vid gt dmac mac IES 612 51A User s Guide 399 Chapter 54 ACL Commands e smac lt Mac gt qdmac lt mac gt Van lt P LOLLY lt PrIior rity e etype lt etype gt e vlan lt vid gt e Smac mac e dmac mac e Priority lt pPriority protocol protocol e Srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt tos tos srcport sport lt eport gt dstport sport lt eport gt
391. severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s See Section 40 5 on page 254 Index This field displays the index number of the alarm in the list Click this to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 40 4 1 on page 253 Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms Condition Code This field displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Facility This field displays the log facility local1 local7 on the syslog server where the system is to log this alarm This is for alarms that send alarms to a syslog server IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 40 Alarm Table 85 Alarm Event Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to an SNMP server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to an SNMP server Syslog This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to a syslog server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to a syslog server This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Clearable This displays V if the alarm clear comma
392. snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group The IES 612 51A discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device 17 2 2 IGMP Proxy To allow better network performance you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology IES 612 51A User s Guide 153 Chapter 17 IGMP In IGMP proxy an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source or the root of the multicast tree and is able to receive multicast traffic There should only be one upstream interface also known as the query port for one query VLAN on the IES 612 51A A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host such as a computer The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1 2 and 3 are the receivers In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface Figure 68 IGMP Proxy Network Example The IES 612 51A will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface The IES 612 51A only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface The IES 612 51A sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN The IES 612 51A only sends an IGMP leave messages vi
393. ss DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again This field displays the number of the routed PVC Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the routed PVC is configured IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Table 59 RFC 2684 Routed PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IP This field displays the subscriber s IP address DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subne
394. ssage confirming upon which DSL port line diagnostics will be performed Figure 247 Line Diagnostics Set Command Example ras adsl linediag setld 1 Line 1 set to Line Diagnostic Mode 52 2 8 Line Diagnostics Get Command Syntax ras adsl linediag getld port number Use this command to display the line diagnostics results after using the line diagnostics set command on a DSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical DSL line IES 612 51A User s Guide 363 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands Es Wait at least one minute after using the line diagnostic set command before using this command The following example displays the line diagnostics results for DSL port 1 Figure 248 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example ras adsl linediag getld 1 Line Diagnostics Parameter channel 0 number of subcarries 256 32 hlinScale 19625 32767 latn 54 0 satn 52 8 snrm 60 60 attndr 12140000 1120000 farEndActatp 75 1295 Llar log 32768 1023 32768 1023 32768 1023 32768 1023 32768 1023 32768 1023 11604 83 17794 48 22385 30 24903 21 26768 15 29 19 8 31605 1 32766 32159 30990 30432 30259 294 97 26499 23288 a O d 2 S 4 3 6 8 The following table lists the line diagnostics test parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Command DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation div
395. ssssseseessssseeenn nnne nnne nnne AANER 411 Table 109 Troubleshooting the IES 612 51A s Configured Settings eeeseseeesssssss 412 Table 110 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server ccccccccsseccecceseceeceesceeeeeeeceeseeeseeesseueeseseeceesseneeeess 412 i Rune io iocitt Ei li demo 413 Tue 12 re E EEN 417 Pole Ediz KAN E 418 DES TIONI NUBE BEE 422 jc meg dvi AREE 423 Table 116 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers eeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeneeee 425 Table 117 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments 426 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Tables EI IES 612 51A User s Guide PART I Introduction Getting to Know the IES 612 51A 41 Hardware Installation 45 Front Panel 49 Getting to Know the IES 612 51A This chapter introduces the main features and applications of your IES 612 51A It also introduces the ways you can manage the IES 612 51A 1 1 Overview The IES 612 51A Standalone mini DSLAM is an IP based DSLAM The IES 612 51A aggregates traffic from 12 ADSL lines to two Ethernet ports to connect ADSL subscribers to the Internet You can use the built in web configurator to manage and configure the IES 612 51A In addition the IES 612 51A can also be managed via Telnet the console port or third party SNMP management See Chapter 56 on page 417 for a complete list of features 1 2 Applications These are the main applications for the
396. st F T U X DOFLlIISES FST U A X s s reme where vid The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 1 all ports lt gt a list of ports 1 3 enet1 you can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt lt F lt T U gt The lt F gt stands for a fixed registrar administration control flag and registers a lt port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt For a fixed port you also have to specify TIU the tag control flag T has the device add an IEEE 802 1Q tag to frames going out through this port s lt U gt has the device send frames out through this port s without an IEEE 802 10 tag X gt This is the registrar administration control flag lt X gt stands for forbidden and blocks a lt port gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vid gt name A name to identify the SVLAN entry This command creates a multicast VLAN and sets the allowed blocked port member s This command is similar to the command to create a regular VLAN See Section 45 4 4 on page 301 for examples and more information IES 612 51A User s Guide 323 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 47 8 2 Multicast VLAN Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan delete lt vlanlist gt where vlanlist You can specify a single VLAN 1 all VLAN lt gt a list of VLAN lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VLAN lt 1 5 6 10 gt
397. statsDroapeEvents 0 DU etherStats Octets 15280457 1451837 etherStatsPkts 26003 14852 etherstatsbroadcastPkts 14740 14604 etherstats MulticastP kts 1106 100 ethersState CRCAlignbErrars etherstats UndersizePkts etherstats OversizePkts etherstatsFragments etherstatstabbers etherstats Collisions etherstats64Octets 141983 etherstats6Sto1 27 Octets j8Hhb etherstats 1 2eto255Octets 24939 etherStats256t0511 Octets 1290 etherStats51 2 t010230ctets 341 etherStats1024t015180ctets 3294 Pall Intervali s 40 Set Interval Port 1 Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Port Statistics RMON EtherStatsDropEvents This field displays the total number of packets that were dropped on this port EtherStatsOctets This field displays the total number of octets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsPkts This field displays the total number of good packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsBroadcastPkts This field displays the total number of broadcast packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsMulticastPkts This field displays the total number of multicast packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsC RCAlignErrors This field displays the total number of CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check alignment errors on this port EtherStatsUndersizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too small received transmitted on this port EI IES 612
398. system is to send this alarm to a syslog server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to a syslog server This is the alarm severity level critical major minor or info clearable This displays V if the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the system It displays if the alarm clear command does not remove the alarm from the system IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 43 8 Alarm History Show Command Syntax ras alarm history show lt severity gt all lt alarm gt all lt condition gt all sdate all1 edate all for rev detaill where sdate The start date in yyyy mm dd format edate The end date in yyyy mm dd format Kee leese The displaying order Use for to display in chronological order starting from the oldest alarm Use rev to display in reverse chronological order starting from the most recent alarm detail Display in depth alarm information This command displays historic alarms by severity alarm category alarm condition and or dates The following example displays the historic critical level alarms for all alarm categories and all conditions Figure 142 Alarm History Show Command Example ras gt alarm history show major all all all all rev detail no alarm condition severity timestamp source 01 01 00 00 12 enet 1 NTENET1 GbE interface is down 2 enet down major 01 01 00 00210 ener I NTENET1 GbE interface is d
399. t 350 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it This command displays or sets masks for upstream carrier tones from 0 to 63 Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the specified DSL port Use this command to have the system not use a DSL line s tones that are known to have a high noise level The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask The most significant bit defines the first tone sequentially For example in m0 0x00000001 means tone 31 For example you could use Oxffff0000 for m0 to disable upstream carrier tones 0 15 and leave tones 16 31 enabled The following example disables upstream carrier tones 0 15 for DSL port 5 Figure 225 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Example ras gt adsl uscarrier 5 ffff0000 00000000 The following example displays the results Figure 226 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Display Example ras gt adsl uscarrier 5 us carrier port mO m1 meer Jee Kee 9 FFFFO000 00000000 lone m0 0 31 m1 32 63 52 1 14 DSL Port Downstream Carter Command Syntax ras adsl dscarrier port number m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 where lt mi gt ccm The downstream carrier tones to be masked disabled Each mx can use up to 8 hexadecimal d
400. t mac mac maco voc where port The number of a DSL port lt mac gt The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command adds an allowed source MAC address on the specified DSL port The following example adds source MAC address 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 for DSL port 5 Figure 165 MAC Filter Set Command Example ras switch mac filter set 5 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 46 2 6 MAC Filter Delete Command Syntax ras switch mac filter delete port mac mac mac where port The number of a DSL port mac The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command removes a configured source MAC address from the DSL port that you specify The following example removes the source MAC address of 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 from the MAC filter for DSL port 5 Figure 166 MAC Filter Delete Command Example ras switch mac filter delete 5 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 IES 612 51A User s Guide am Chapter 46 MAC Commands 46 3 MAC Count Commands Use MAC count commands to limit how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned MAC count commands are listed next When the MAC filter accept mode is enabled see Section 46 2 on page 307 the IES 612 51A ignores the MAC count setting and accepts all of the MAC addresses listed for the port in the MAC filter settings 46 3 1 MAC Count Show Command Syntax ras switch mac count show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 1 all
401. t PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem ip Reject IP packets Internet Protocol The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks arp Reject ARP packets Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network netbios Reject NetBIOS packets Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN dhcp Reject DHCP packets Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems eapol Reject EAPol packets EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 over LAN EAP is used with IEEE 802 1x to allow additional authentication methods besides RADIUS to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients igmp Reject IGMP packets Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts none Accept all packets This co
402. t packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note that a VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic 16 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the device on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or configured dynamically using GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame 1s four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 2 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a 1 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to automatically
403. t F TP Web Select services that may be used for managing the IES 612 51A from the ICMP specified trusted computers Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh IES 612 51A User s Guide 23 Chapter 34 Access Control 232 IES 612 51A User s Guide PART IV Routing Protocol Alarm and Management Static Routing 235 Maintenance 237 Diagnostic 241 MAC Table 245 ARP Table 247 Alarm 249 Static Routing This chapter shows you how to configure the static routing function Static routes tell the IES 612 51A how to forward the IES 612 51A s own IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually This is generally useful for allowing management of the device from a device with an IP address on a different subnet from that of the device s IP address remote management To open this screen click Routing Protocol Static Routing Figure 118 Static Routing Static Routing Marre Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric ous Add Cancel Page iof 4 Previous Page Next Page Destination Gatew Index Name Subnet Mask ay Metric Delete Address Address Default 192 158 1 254 l
404. t Pkts BroadcastPkts MulticastPkts Utilization 15 13 15 45 45 15 12 45 85 85 15 12 15 TA T4 15 49 45 15 49 15 15 48 45 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Port Statistics RMON History Index Interval Select the index of the sample interval and the desired data sampling time in seconds Pkts This field displays the number of packets received or transmitted since the last sample time BroadcastPkts This field displays the number of broadcast packets received or transmitted since the last sample time MulticastPkts This field displays the number of multicast packets received transmitted since the last sample time Utilization This field displays the port utilization status 6 1 5 RMON History Detail Screen Use this screen to display detailed RMON history To open this screen click any index number in the RMON History screen EI IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 36 Port Statistics RMON History Detail E RMON History Detail J Index Sample Index Interval Start Drap Events Octets Pkts BroadcastPkts MulticastPkte CRCAlignbErars UndersizePkts OversizePkts Fragments Jabbers collisions Utilizations EZE EK ECKE E E E ECH The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail LABEL Refresh Index Sample Index Interval Start Drop Events Octets Pkts
405. t box and reset the log IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection In the field to the right specify the number of times that you want to ping the IP address Click Ping to have the device ping the IP address in the field to the left Loopback Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and enter a VPI VCI to specify a PVC Click OAM F5 Loopback to perform an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operational Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test The results Passed or Failed display in the multi line text box LDM Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set LDM Port to have the IES 612 51A perform line diagnostics on the specified port The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode and have a connection It takes about one minute for the line diagnostics to finish The screen displays a message confirming upon which ADSL port line diagnostics will be performed Click Get LDM Data to display the line diagnostics results after using the Set LDM Port button on an ADSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical ADSL
406. t mask of the subscriber s IP address Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 27 3 2684 Routed Domain Screen Use this screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode Routed Domain Figure 98 2684 Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Routed P C e o NetMask b 4 33 Add Cancel Index Port YVPIl VCI IP HetMask Delete Delete Cancel 198 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 2684 Routed Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 ro
407. t number below Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The IES 612 51A does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for multicast VLAN or TLS PVC Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag 204 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE Table 63 PPPoA to PPPoE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION AC Name This field is optional Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator In this case the IES 612 51A checks the AC name field in the BRAS s r
408. t vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt vpi The VPI of the PVC Sere The VCI of the PVC This command displays the current ACL profiles applied to the specified PVC s The following figure shows an example Figure 293 ACL Assignment Show Command Example ras switch acl show vci type profile 33 PVC test IES 612 51A User s Guide 403 Chapter 54 ACL Commands 404 IES 612 51A User s Guide PART VI Troubleshooting and Specifications eshooting 407 pecifications 417 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some steps are provided to help you to diagnose and solve the problem 55 1 The SYS LED Does Not Turn On The SYS LED does not turn on Table 99 SYS LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 0000000000000 ACTION Make sure the Eeer 612 51A is properly connected to the power supply and the power supply is operating normally Make sure you are using the correct power source See Table 112 on page 417 The LED itself or the unit may be faulty contact your vendor 55 2 The ALM LED Is On The ALM alarm LED lights when the IES 612 51A is overheated or the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels Table 100 ALM LED Troublesho
409. tail port show severity all Display xDSL port threshold of L severity which will issue an alarm port set all enetl enet2 p Set xDSL port threshold of ort gt lt severity gt severity which will issue an alarm L M L IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P tablelist lt alarm gt laL Display system alarm table L L severity all tac all lt target gt lt target gt lt condition gt all igmpsnoop show Displays the IGMP snooping M L setting DEBE igmpsnoop enable proxy snooping Sets IGMP snooping mode H igmpsnoop bandwidth Set default bandwidth for M H bandwidth default multicast IP channels igmpsnoop index Delete an entry of bandwidth M H bandwidth delete budget setting specified in index field igmpsnoop lt portlist gt Disable bandwidth budget control M H bandwidth for a port disable igmpsnoop spor Liot Enable bandwidth budget control L H bandwidth for a port enable igmpsnoop portlist Set bandwidth threshold for a port M H bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth 1 100 000 in unit of kbps igmpsnoop sportist Show bandwidth control setting bandwidth for a port show igmpsnoop index start Set bandwidth budget for a range M H bandwidth mcast ip end of multicast IP channels specified bandwidth index 1 96 sta
410. te tae ioci cti diis et hbrte eb PU Ed nide 408 55 6 There Is No Voice on a DSL Connection nonna tine thea rra pon tah a EFE dA 409 SA S MU TT Rm 409 Seog Brier EE 411 EE METER RETENIR ent lt NE 411 ey eI M EE 412 Gago c o ege 412 S08 USD LOO EE 412 SWR RH De rm 412 SI MEI NRI 413 E EE EE m O 413 55 15 1 Resetting the Defaults Via Command E 413 55 15 2 Uploading the Default Configuration File eeeeeeeseeesseeeeeees ees 414 59 16 e ue the nen EE 415 Chapter 56 ag 26 0 n M eee eee naX MU HI MEDII EM APPRIME IM DUMNMMzMMiiMbs ixeA NM erate 417 SOMMER E Perro pesi e oT RR 417 OB PERROS PORUM ees 418 ENEE eege 422 DA KEE ee 423 56 5 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Pin Assignments ccccceecceseeceeceseceeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeesaaees 425 56 6 Console Cable Pin Assignments 1uiilesscsistedassamekolecvenqubu earth ota dae itasse ics 425 Part VII Appendices and Index 427 Appendix A E ET te ung e EEN 429 IES 612 51A User s Guide 25 Table of Contents 26 IES 612 51A User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures FUSE ee idismisdapecipietevabiust ede p r uh etos eite n epi ebd MOT EH E qud nta eh pui dd Lire EEU HPV PO PDS M 42 EE relier RUP TEENS 42 PS 2S AGI ENEE EE NE 46 Figure 4 Attaching Mounting Brackets and Screws ccccccsesecceceeseeeecseeeeeceaeseeesseeeeeeseaeeeseuaeseesaaaees
411. ted Delete check boxes 23 3 802 1x Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Authentication 802 1x Figure 87 802 1x OE Are Authentication RADIUS Local Profile Iv Apply Cancel Port Enable Control Reauthentication Reauthentication Periodi s WW 3600 B B5535 3600 B 65535 3600 B 65535 3600 B 65535 S600 B0 55535 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 802 1x DESCRIPTION Click this link to configure the RADIUS server or local profile settings see Section 23 2 on page 182 Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on the switch Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring IES 612 51A User s Guide 183 Chapter 23 Port Authentication Table 53 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays a port number Enable Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on this port Select AUTO to authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port Select FORCE AUTHORIZED to allow all connected users to access the Control network through this port witho
412. ted are accepted When you select PPPoE Only appears for all of the packet types With PPPoE Only the IES 612 51A rejects all packet types except for PPPoE packet types that are not listed are also rejected IES 612 51A User s Guide MAC Filter This chapter introduces the MAC filter 21 1 MAC Filter Introduction Use the MAC filter to control from which MAC Media Access Control addresses frames can or cannot come in through a port 21 2 MACFilter Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application MAC Filter Figure 81 MAC Filter ALERT Accept Mode accept specified MACs but deny others Deny Mode deny specified MACs but accept others en EA vac QOOOCC Ada Cancel Mode ctive Delete Accept e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 MAC Filter LABEL MAC Type a device s MAC address in hexadecimal notation xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is a number from O to 9 or a letter from a to f in this field The MAC address must be a valid MAC address IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 21 MAC Filter Table 47 MAC Filter continued DESCRIPTION Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config LABEL Add Cancel Port Mode Active MAC Delete Apply Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are do
413. ter DESCRIPTION Use this drop down list box to select a DSL port for which you wish to configure packet type filtering This box is read only after you click on one of the port numbers in the table below Select the check boxes of the types of packets to accept on the DSL port When you clear one of these check boxes the field label changes to Filter Out and the system drops the corresponding type of packets IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 20 Filtering Table 46 Packet Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoE Pass Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Ethernet It is a through specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem IP Pass through Internet Protocol The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks ARP Pass through Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network NetBios Pass NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that through enable a computer to find other computers DHCP Pass through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addr
414. ter 18 Static Multicast Table 42 Static Multicast continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address This is the multicast MAC address 1 12 These fields display the static multicast group membership status of the DSL ports V displays for members and displays for non members Click a DSL port s status to change it clicking a V changes it to and vise versa Join All Click Join All to make all of the DSL ports members of the static multicast group Leave All Click Leave All to remove all of the DSL ports from the static multicast group Click Delete to remove a static multicast group Adding new entry Type a multicast MAC address in the field and click the Add button to create a Add new static multicast entry Multicast MAC addresses must be 01 00 5E xx xx xx where x is a don t care value For example 01 00 5E 10 10 10 is a valid multicast MAC address Clicking Add saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 164 IES 612 51A Users Guide Multicast VLAN This chapter describes the Multicast VLAN screens 19 1 Multicast VLAN Overview Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANS on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by re
415. ter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands c scececeeseeecenseeeeenseseeaseeeenaseeseasseeeenseeseoenees 375 53 1 Virtual Channel Management Overview cccccccseeececceeseceeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeesaeeeesaens 375 53 2 Virtual Channel Profile Created EEAEEEAEEREEEEAAEEERE EAR EE 375 53 2 1 Show Virtual Channel Profile Commande 375 93 2 2 Set vina Channel Profle Command tee Ee EE 375 53 2 3 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Commande 377 E E ENEE aO A NUM ER 377 IES 612 51A User s Guide 23 Table of Contents DOT PYG OON LOT EEN 377 Oe e ut BEE 378 EENEG Kee CO eegene ee a ae es eerie 379 DIA FRON als cic i PLE eee eee eek Pree ee ees eee a cere ert ee aa uten inde et 379 934 1 PFVL ENEE kieren pA nl akorada 379 53 4 2 PPVC Member Set Command EE 380 53 5 PPVC Member Delete Commande 381 53 60 E Member Show EENEG eeh Eege 382 e Re PIE EEN 382 EE E EE Dokle COMMANG ee 383 53 7 2684 Routed Mode GIANG LEE 383 53 7 1 2684 Routed Mode Example EE 384 53 7 2 RPVC Gateway Set Commande 385 Us 7 3 E Ee COITIBF WEE 385 53 7 4 RPVC Gateway Delete Commande 386 Pee ae TO L un EE 386 te I EEN 387 E E FAP ee DOE COMITAT TNR 388 53 7 8 RPVC Route Ser Command BEEN 388 93 759 RPFYG Roule Show Comman TEE 389 53 7 10 RPVC Route Delete Commande 390 DS 2 T HPV ARF Adingime Ser Command WR 390 53 7 12 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Commande 391 53 13 RPYC ARP Show Command ueuesusdixetssenvetdssenas a dee 391 BS VG ARF Flush COmIBAPIE EE 391
416. that can be learned on the port Clear this check box to not limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Limited Number of Specify how many MAC addresses the IES 612 51A can learn on this port The Learned MAC range is 17128 Address Note If you also use MAC filtering on a port it is recommended that you set this limit to be equal to or greater than the number of MAC filter entries you configure IES 612 51A User s Guide 185 Chapter 24 Port Security Table 54 Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports Paste Select the number of the port from which you want to copy settings Click Paste and the following screen appears Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 89 Select Ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 1 9 Er dy ER dr det E p E3 qui i0 12 0 O EE select EI None ENET2 Apply Cancel 186 IES 612 51A User s Guide DHCP Relay
417. that this Ethernet port is using for a connection displays when the port is disabled or not connected Duplex This field displays whether the port is using half or full duplex communication displays when the port is disabled or not connected This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port s connection has been up displays when the port is disabled or not connected The following fields are related to the xDSL ports This identifies the xDSL port Click a port number to display that port s statistics Up Time xDSL screen The DSL Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 6 1 2 on page 79 Status This field shows whether the port is connected Up or not Down CG tt Mode This field shows which ADSL operational mode the port is set to use displays when the port is not connected Up Down stream This field shows the number of kilobits per second that a port is set to transmit and receive Interleave Fast This field shows the ports ADSL latency mode fast or interleave This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the Up Time port s connection has been up displays when the port is not connected The following fields and buttons apply to the whole screen Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number
418. the IGMP snoop commands to enable or disable IGMP proxy or IGMP snooping 47 2 1 IGMP Snoop Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop show This command displays the IGMP mode proxy snooping or disabled The following is an example Figure 171 IGMP Snoop Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop show IGMP Snooping Proxy is Disable 47 2 2 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop enable lt proxy snooping gt This command turns on IGMP proxy or snooping Use proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy Use IGMP snooping to have the device passively learn multicast groups The following example sets the device to use IGMP proxy Figure 172 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop enable proxy IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 3 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 47 2 3 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop disable This command turns off IGMP proxy or snooping The following example sets the device to not use IGMP proxy or snooping Figure 173 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop disable 47 3 IGMP Filter Commands Use the IGMP filter commands to define IGMP filter profiles and assign them to DSL ports IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups You can have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service like a SIP se
419. the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Select this check box to enable the VLAN Delete Active You cannot disable a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name for this VLAN group for identification purposes Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static VLAN entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port numbers identify the IES 612 51A s ports Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Use the Select All button to include every port Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Tagging Add Click Add to save your settings The VLAN then displays in the summary table at the top of the screen Clicking Add saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 16 5 VLAN Po
420. the channels to avoid interference Figure 63 xDSL Line Data a OFS Sle aa Line Rate Line Performance Part 2 Refresh Port Name DS carrier load number of bits per zymbolitone tone 000 015 00 00 OO OU nO OO OO nOJOD OO OO OO tone 016 031 00 00 00 00 OO OO 00 00 OO tone 032 047 00 00 00 00 BO OO 00 O1 l tone O46 063 03 03 03 3 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 3 tone 064 079 03 03 03 3 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 00 095 n3 03 03 3 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 096 111 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone llz 127 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 1l26 143 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 031 03 03 03 03 tone 144 159 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 160 175 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 176 191 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 192 207 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 206 223 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 224 239 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 240 255 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 256 271 03 03 03 03 03 03 n3 03 03 03 03 03 Bit Allocation tone 272 287 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 200 303 03 03 03 03 03 03 n3 03 03 03 03 03 tone 304 319 03 03 03 3 03 3 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 320 335 03 03 03 n3 03 03 n3 03 03 03 03 03 tone 335 351 03 03 03 03 03 3 03 03 03 03 03 03 tone 352 367 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 3 0z Oe DU De tone 358 383 z O2 z z z z z z z z z z tone 384 399 02 02 2 Uz
421. the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the IES 612 514A 142 IES 612 51A User s Guide PART III Advanced Application VLAN 145 IGMP 153 Static Multicast 163 Multicast VLAN 165 Filtering 171 MAC Filter 173 Spanning Tree Protocol 175 Port Authentication 181 Port Security 185 DHCP Relay 187 DHCP Snoop 191 RFC 2684 Routed Mode 195 PPPoA to PPPoE 203 DSCP 209 TLS PVC 211 ACL 215 Downstream Broadcast 221 Syslog 223 Access Control 225 VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANS 16 1 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcas
422. thin the period lors The number of Loss of Power Seconds that have occurred within the period o The number of Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period init The number of successful initializations that have occurred within the period The number of Severely Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period ses uas The number of UnAvailable Seconds that have occurred within the period 15 3 xDSL Line Data Screen This screen displays an ADSL port s line bit allocation IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This screen displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support ADSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist See the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Data In the screen shown the downstream channel is carried on tones 48 to 255 and the upstream channel is carried on tones 16 to 31 space is left between
423. this field to specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the IES 612 51A to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the chassis number of the IES 612 51A or the ISP s name Enable Option82 Enable DHCP relay info to have the IES 612 51A add the sub option 2 Remote Sub option2 ID to DHCP requests regardless of whether the DHCP relay is on or off Sub option2 Use this field to specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for Remote ID the IES 612 51A to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN ID Enter the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Enter O to set up the IP address es of the default DHCP relay s Primary Server IP Enter the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN P Secondary Server Enter the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Enter 0 0 0 0 if there is only one DHCP relay for the selected VLAN Active Server This field has
424. this screen Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION RMON Click this to open the RMON Statistics screen Click this to go back to the Home screen Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen This field displays the name that you have configured for the port Rx bytes This field shows the number of octets of Ethernet frames received that are from 0 to 1518 octets in size counting the ones in bad packets not counting framing bits but counting FCS Frame Check Sequence octets An octet is an 8 bit binary digit byte Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port including multicast unicast broadcast and bad packets Rx error fcs This field shows the number of frames received with an integral length of 64 to 1518 octets and containing a Frame Check Sequence error Rx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including Broadcast frames Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account Rx broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including multicast frames Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter
425. though without RSTP s benefits The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value MAC address Path cost 1s the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost as illustrated in the following table Table 48 Path Cost RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED LINK SPEED VALUE RANGE ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port 1s the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Integrated Ethernet Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there 1s no root port then this Integrated Ethernet Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge 1s selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with RSTP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for the connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in RSTP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 82 STP Root Ports and Designated Ports Root Bridge Desig
426. tifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port This field displays the subscriber s IP address NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s LAN IP address Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 27 4 RPVC Arp Proxy Screen Use this screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode RPVC ARP Proxy IES 612 51A User s Guide 199 Chapter 27 RFC 2684 Routed Mode Figure 99 RPVC Arp Proxy d Eure Routed Domain Routed Gateway Routed PVC Aging Time 600 10 10000 seconds O Disabled Apply Setting Index Gateway IP Hush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 RPVC Arp Proxy LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traf
427. tinued STEP TEST E Reconnect the telephone wire to USER Connect a telephone to a lower port of MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 3 Check the pin assignments of the telephone wire s connector that connects to USER Replace the telephone wire connecting your device to MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then MDF 3 may be faulty Contact the telephone company if that is the case F Disconnect the DSL modem from the wall jack and connect the telephone to the wall jack If there is no dial tone then there is a problem with the building wiring between the DSL subscriber s home and the MDF Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting 55 8 Local Server The computer behind a DSL modem or router cannot access a local server connected to the IES 612 51A Table 107 Troubleshooting a Local Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION See Section 55 5 on page 408 to make sure that the subscriber is able to transmit to the IES 612 51A Make sure the computer behind the DSL device has the correct gateway IP address configured Check the VLAN configuration see Chapter 16 on page 145 Check the cable and connections between the IES 612 51A and the local server Try to access another local server If data can be transmitted to a different local server the local server that could not be accessed may have a problem 55 9 Data Rate The SYNC rate is not the same as the configured rate Table
428. tion General Setup Use this screen to configure general identification information about the device and the time and date settings Use this screen to configure system administrator accounts Switch Setup Use this screen to set up system wide parameters such as MAC address learning and priority queues IES 612 51A User s Guide 63 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Table A Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Setup Use this screen to configure the system and management IP addresses and subnet masks ENET Port Setup Use this screen to configure settings for the Ethernet ports xDSL Port Setup Use these screens for configuring settings for individual DSL ports xDSL Profiles Setup Use these screens for configuring profiles for the DSL ports xDSL Line Data Use these screens for viewing DSL line operating values bit allocation and performance counters Advanced Application VLAN Use these screens for viewing and configuring the VLAN settings IGMP Use these screens to view IGMP status information and configure IGMP settings and IGMP filters You can also use these screens to set up bandwidth requirements by multicast group or port and to set up limits on the number of multicast groups to which a port can subscribe Static Multicast Use this screen to configure static multicast entries Multicast VLAN Use these screens to set up multicast VLANs that can be shared among different subscriber VLA
429. tion File Backup ianeektesmeieke Petitizis nante Nasa c sa MOI quit lena suere piana 336 s mom cene aic ee UE 337 50 3 3 Editable Configuration File Upload iesaveaxeebesosseas vieta guute Seet eege ege te beo daria eg 338 50 4 Firmware File Upgrade 339 Chapter 51 GN SEENEN ee 341 SEA C RUDI tege 341 RARE ES eee cc lag lies eebe 341 DCK Vee Sel LoOommagn C OPIDO emgeet EE 341 8 Tusted Host Set DINI BE 341 51 1 4 Trap Community Commande 342 SLES Irap Desinalon Set EE Aere 342 51 1 6 Show SNMP Settings Commande 342 Chapter 52 nun e e EE 343 SEA EE EEN erence en EEA 343 DE L3 DSL POE SIDON LG Ommani ares fat ceded cece en obuatudfee Ma tevatis val tap petia appa itis 343 52 1 2 DSL Port Enable COIImIBP IO uiesecsepieik tibnkh bti ob REA RR A Lb RR Y GNI FE LR EXR E Xa e kPa kels 343 Gata DSL Fon Diane HIN REPETIT 344 S214 DSL Pon Prolle Show Command EN 344 Be 1 0 DSL Pon Fi Eu WEE 345 92 16 DSL Fori Prolile Delete COMI teste tege hett 347 986 1 7 DSL lon Prol BOSE CO iek ia 347 Se LS DSL Pert Names Command eegene 348 22 IES 612 51A User s Guide Table of Contents 2A RIEBIIDUM eI deir a DIET 348 92 1 10 DSL POR LODDDSCE AI E 349 52 1 11 DSL Port Upstream FSD Command aussesssinrenrtiiasiibyHivMibHareeruetkvE div Eo pus FEED m DIEUK 349 52 1 12 DSL Pon Downstream PSD Command uusietisioliedsens eege Agen 350 52 1 13 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Commande 350 52 1 14 DSL Port Downstream CarrierO Commande 351 52 1 15 DSL
430. tion maximum and minimum transfer rates You still get to individually enable or disable each port as well as configure its channels and operational mode 13 4 Interleave Delay Interleave delay is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Reed Solomon codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications The Reed Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra redundant bits The Reed Solomon decoder processes each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data 13 4 1 Fast Mode Fast mode means no interleaving takes place and transmission is faster a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary 13 5 Configured Versus Actual Rate You configure the maximum rate of an individual ADSL port by modifying its profile see Chapter 14 on page 125 or assigning the port to a different profile see Section 13 7 1 on page 111 However due to noise and other factors on the line the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers using the Edit Profile scree
431. to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table IES 612 51A User s Guide ACL This chapter shows you how to set up ACL profiles on each port 31 1 Access Control Logic ACL Overview An ACL Access Control Logic profile allows the IES 612 514A to classify and perform actions on the upstream traffic Each ACL profile consists of a rule and an action and you assign ACL profiles to PVCs 31 1 1 ACL Profile Rules Each ACL profile uses one of 14 rules to classify upstream traffic These rules are listed below by rule number 1 COON Om P CIN 9 etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt etype lt etype gt smac lt mac gt etype lt etype gt dmac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt smac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt dmac lt mac gt smac lt mac gt dmac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt priority lt priority gt etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt 10 smac lt mac gt 11 dmac mac 12 priority priority 13 protocol protocol 14 srcip ip mask Idstip lt ip gt lt mask gt ltos
432. to standalone standalone mode SE outband the Management IP address settings arp show Displays the device s IP Address M L Resolution Protocol ARP table arp flush Clears the device s IP Address Resolution Protocol ARP table lt ip gt netmask Sets the Management IP address H H and subnet mask gateway lt gateway ip gt Sets the IP address of the B s default sands toue Set dst 1p Adds a routing table entry gateway ip metric lt name gt route set default lt gateway Sets the device s default route BW aad lt metric gt Leste enee 1 pm ue ewm Pings amotio host mama 0 S monito _ Displays hardware monitor status Displays hardware monitor status hardware monitor status ML adsl show portlist Displays ADSL port connection status adsl linedata CDOYVELTSE Displays the line data load per symbol tone adsl lineinfo sport List Displays the info of the specified ADSL ports 214 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 41 Commands Summary Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P Displays the performance M L statistics of the specified ADSL adsl lineperf lt pPOLLLiseS port lt portlist gt Displays the line rate M L adsl 15mperf xp rtlist gt Leoune Displays line performance M L 0 96 statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods adsl ldayperf POPC List statistics for the current and previous 24
433. tocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the device the time and date will be reset to 2000 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Enter the IP address of your timeserver The device searches for the timeserver Address for up to 60 seconds This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then hh min ss appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears mm dd in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned
434. tor to one end of the cable see the hardware specifications appendix for pin assignments and connect the other end directly to an MDF alternatively attach RJ 11 connectors and connect directly to DSL modem s IES 612 51A User s Guide 5 Chapter 3 Front Panel Figure8 Telco 50 Cable with RJ 11 Connectors 3 2 5 Telco 50 Connections The internal DSL splitters separate the voice signals from the DSL signals They feed the DSL signals to the IES 612 51A and divert the voice signals to the CO lines of the Telco 50 connector Connect the CO lines of the Telco 50 connector to the PBX or PSTN ISDN switch Connect the USER lines of the Telco 50 connector to the subscribers telephone wiring In most multi tenant unit applications the USER pins connect to the subscribers telephone wiring via Main Distribution Frame MDF See the section on MDF scenarios and the pin assignments in the hardware specifications appendix for details on Telco 50 connections 3 2 6 ADSL Connections Connect the lines from the user equipment ADSL modems to the Telco 50 connector USER pins and the lines from the central office switch or PBX Private Branch Exchange to the Telco 50 connector CO pins Make sure that the USER line and the CO lines are not shorted on the MDF Main Distribution Frame The line from the user carries both the ADSL and the voice signals For each line the IES 612 514 has a built in splitter that separates the high frequency ADSL
435. tory lofts loss lols Iprs Current Previous 1 Previous 2 Previous 3 ATUC 0 0 ATUR ATUC ATUR ATUC ATUR ATUC ATUR CO Oo Oo Oo oo c CHOCO COOC oa 1 day history lofs loss lols Iprs Current Previous ATUC 0 0 ATUR 0 0 ATUC 0 0 ATUR 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 xDSL Performance LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Rate Click Line Rate to display an ADSL port s line operating values see Section 15 1 on page 137 Line Data Click Line Data to display an ADSL port s line bit allocation see Section 15 3 on page 140 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Click Refresh to display updated information This section displays the name of the port est ink up ui BEEN last link up IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data Table 30 xDSL Performance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Type Fast stands for non interleaved fast mode and Interleaved stands for interleaved mode Init This field displays the number of link ups and link downs ATUC ATUR ES The Number of Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or received upstream on this ADSL port The Number of Severely Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or received upstream on this ADSL port Severely errored seconds contained ATUC ATUR 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of the Down Up Str
436. ttings of the specified alarm profile or all of them if you do not specify one The following example displays the default alarm profile DEFVAL Figure 253 Alarm Profile Show Command Example ras adsl alarmprofile show DEFVAL 01 DEFVAL ATURE ATU R Threshl15MinLofs sec O 0 Threshli15MinLoss sec 0 0 Threshl15MinLols sec 0 E Threshl5MinLprs 0 0 Threshl5MinESs sec O 0 IhreshFastRateUp bps 0 0 ThreshinterleaveRateUp bps 0 0 ThreshFastRateDown bps 0 0 ThreshlInterleaveRateDown bps 0 O InitFailureTrap l enable 2 disable 2 iem Threshl5MinFailedFastRetrain 0 n Threshl5MinSes sec O 0 Threshi5MinUas sec O 0 3 0 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 52 3 2 Alarm Profile Set Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile set profile lt atuc lofs atur lofs gt atuc loss amp atur loss lt atuc lols lt atuc lprs gt dtur lprs gt atuc ess atur ess gt lt atuc fast rateup gt atur fast rateup gt lt atuc interleave rateup gt atur interleave rateup gt lt atuc fast ratedown gt lt atur fast ratedown gt lt atuc interleave ratedown gt atur interleave ratedown gt lt init fail enables lt atuc fail fast gt lt atuc Ses atur ses atuc uas atur uas where profile atuc atur atuc atur lt atuc lt atur lt atuc lt atuc lt atur lt atuc lt atur lt atuc rateup gt lt atur fast rateup gt lt atuc lo
437. u want the IES 612 514 to reject this kind of traffic iiis AN RENE Index This field displays a sequential value The sequence in this table is not important Click this to edit the associated ACL profile in the section above ACL Profile This field displays the name of this ACL profile Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 31 4 ACL Profile Map Screen Use this screen to look at all the ACL profiles and the PVCs to which each one is assigned To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL ACL Profile Map IES 612 51A User s Guide 219 Chapter 31 ACL Figure 110 ACL Profile Map Eng HET ACL Setup ACL Profile Setup ACL Profile List All Index Profile Port VPIAICI 1 example 1 Of 33 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 ACL Profile Map ACL Setup Click ACL Setup to open the screen where you can assign ACL profiles to PVCs see Section 31 2 on page 216 ACL Profile Setup Click ACL Profile Setup to open the screen where you can set up ACL profiles see Section 31 3 on page 218 ACL Profile Select the ACL profile s for which you want to see which PVCs are assigned to it Index This field displays the number of an entry Profile This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this PVC Po
438. ual IES 612 51A However one IES 612 51A s subscribers can communicate with another IES 612 51A s subscribers if the two IES 612 51A s Ethernet ports are connected to each other see Figure 41 on page 98 for an example If you have multiple IES 612 51A connected on the same network and set to standalone mode they do not all need to have the same port isolation setting IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 10 Switch Setup 10 2 2 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example The following graphic shows IES 612 51A 1 and 2 connected to each other and the Ethernet backbone switch 3 in a network topology that creates a loop The IES 612 51A are using the standalone switch mode and have RSTP enabled In this example both IES 612 51A have port isolation turned on Communications between A and B must first go through another switch 3 in the figure However A and B can communicate with C without their communications going through another switch or router Figure 41 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example Internet 10 2 3 Daisychain Switch Mode Daisychain switch mode sets the IES 612 51A to use Ethernet port one ENET 1 as an uplink port to connect to the Ethernet backbone and Ethernet port two ENET 2 to connect to another daisychained or subtending IES 612 51A The daisychain switch mode is recommended for use in a network topology that does not have loops When you daisychain multiple IES 612 51A they must all be set
439. un CT ME 288 Lx cue de ius m Tm 289 Chapter 44 Wise deir igle FEN 291 44 1 DHCP Relay Tei Rim S T LN TEN 291 44 1 1 Show Command uasuaiuebxit ienbbtEd duutbd bnddedxb abd bx ld Aba LR FORE TU ERE EE FIT auri a dala 291 zo EE EEN eege 291 SLIDES DOO E 292 SANE oaar oe C OMMAN eR 292 44 1 5 Server Delete Command EE 292 44 1 6 Server Active Command eege 292 OA 1 Helavinbde Comiat EE 293 44 2 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 1 Circuit ID 293 44 2 1 Option 82 Sub option 1 Enable Commande 293 44 2 2 Option 82 Sub option 1 Disable Commande 294 44 2 3 Option 82 Sub option 1 Set Commande 294 44 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 2 Remote ID 294 44 3 1 Option 82 Sub option 2 Enable Commande 294 44 3 2 Option 82 Sub option 2 Disable Commande 294 44 3 3 Option 82 Sub option 2 Set Commande 294 TIS DHCP Snoop CODICI bebe 295 44 4 1 DHCP Snoop Enable Commande 295 44 4 2 DHCP Snoop Disable Command 2uoecap eene AI do aU IER RUE e SE Ee E gec 295 143 DHCP Snoop Fush LAO stets deg ERAERE AER 296 44 4 4 DHCP Snoop Show Command 2c verd Fio ace oig ue ue FTH Eo ege 296 44 4 5 DHCP Counter Statistics Commande 296 44 4 6 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command PN 297 IES 612 51A User s Guide 19 Table of Contents Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 1 eeeeee eer ieeeeeer rene enean nnne ena a nana nnns 299 EES d
440. uration file and all of your configuration changes will be lost 50 3 3 Editable Configuration File Upload You can upload the configuration file by following the steps below Use an FTP client to connect to the IES 612 51A Figure 206 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A C gt ftp IES 612 51A IP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin 338 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Commands Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 207 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in Use put to transfer the configuration file from the computer The configuration file on the system is named conf ig 0 Figure 208 Example Upload the Configuration File config O Lp put sob dat cong Quit FTP Figure 209 Example Close FTP Client fbpo quit Wait for the update to finish The system restarts automatically 50 4 Firmware File Upgrade Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the IES 612 51A Use an FTP client to connect to the IES 612 51A Figure 210 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the IES 612 51A Ehe ftp IES O1I2 51A TP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 211 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in
441. used for the PVC s upstream traffic CBR VBR or UBR the IES 612 51A will drop any upstream traffic that violates the specified ATM VC profile 14 5 VC Profile Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup VC Profile Figure 58 VC Profile vC Frofile Port Profile Alarm Profile IGMP Filter Profile Index Hame Encap AAL Class PCR CDVT SCR Select 1 DEFVAL Ilc aal5 uhr 300000 e Fi DEFVAL vic ve aal5 uhr 300000 C Modify Delete C B UER sl i150 300000 cellisec 0 1552 E Iwte s ec 0 255 150 S00000icellisec 8 1552 HR bytefsec L zeen Ada Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 VC Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Profile Click Port Profile to configure port profiles and assign them to individual ports see Section 14 1 on page 125 Alarm Profile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 133 IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 135 This is the number of the VC profile This name identifies the VC profile This field displays the profile s type of encapsulation Ilc or vc IES 612 51A User s Guide 3 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 26 VC Profile continued LABEL DESC
442. ut authentication Select FORCE UNAUTHORIZED to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to Period s stay connected to the port Click Apply to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Apply Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 184 IES 612 51A Users Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 24 1 Port Security Overview Port security allows you to restrict the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port 24 2 Port Security Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Security Figure 88 Port Security LEE a Pot Enable Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 1 Isa 1 28 5 nu 1 28 Isa 128 s n 128 s 1 120 Apply Cancel Copy port 1 Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Enable Select this check box to restrict the number of MAC addresses
443. uted mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 199 Routed Gateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 200 Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen where you can configure routed PVC settings see Section 27 2 on page 196 Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC IP Enter the subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again This field displays the number of the routed PVC Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the routed PVC is configured This field displays the Virtual Path Iden
444. vci The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC The VPI of the individual PVC that you are displaying The VCI of the individual PVC that you are displaying This command displays the PVCs that are members of a PPVC The following example displays the PVCs that are members of a PPVC for port 5 Figure 266 PPVC Member Show Command Example ras gt adsl ppvc member show 5 level DS US voprofile port Vor VC m vp 53 6 1 PPVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc show where Sportirst vpi C Lepor c List Devpic w ver The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC 382 IES 612 51A Users Guide Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management Commands This command displays the runtime configured PPVCs The following example displays the PPVCs configured on DSL port 5 Figure 267 PPVC Show Command Example ras adsl ppvc show 5 vci encap pvid pri 53 6 2 PPVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 1
445. ve a PPVC Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 13 11 1 PPVC Setup Members Screen Use this screen to add and remove member PVCs ez The member PVCs must be created on the subscriber s device To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Then click a PPVC s member number to open the PPVC Setup Members screen Figure 54 PPVC Setup Edit Mit Port 1 0 32 Index YPI VCI VC Profile Delete DEFWVAL l 1732 DEFVAL aalma DEFWVAL d 1134 DEFVAL delete Add VPI lo VCI o DS VC Profile DEFVAL Us vc Profile Level o Add Modify Close 22 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 PPVC Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the port for which you are viewing or configuring settings This field displays the number of the member PVC VPI AVCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port The subscriber s device must create this PVC VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays
446. where etype etype Ethernet type 0 65535 e vlan vid VLAN ID 1 4094 e smac mac Source MAC address dmac mac Destination MAC address e priority priority Priority 0 7 protocol protocol Protocol type tcp udp ospf igmp ip gre icmp Or user specified IP protocol number 0 255 e srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt Source IP address and subnet mask 0 32 dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt Destination IP address and subnet mask 0 32 tos stos etos Sets the ToS Type of Service range between 0 and 255 e srcport sport lt eport gt Source port range 0 655395 e dstport sport lt eport gt Destination port range 0 65535 The following guidelines apply to classifiers e You can apply one classifier for a protocol on a port s PVC You cannot create a classifier that contains matching criteria for layer 2 and layer 3 fields For example switch acl profile set test protocol tcp vlan 15 deny is not allowed as protocol type and VLAN do not belong to the same network layer Each type of criteria can only be used once in a classifier For example profile acl set test protocol tcp protocol udp deny is notallowed For this example you need to create a separate classifier for each protocol and apply them to the same PVC s The following example creates an ACL rule example named test for traffic from VLAN 10 with a priority level of 2 This rule limits the rat
447. y when you are done configuring Enable Local Profile Select this check box to have the IES 612 51A use its internal database of user Setting names and passwords to authenticate users Type the user name of the user profile Type a password up to 31 characters long for this user profile Shared Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the 182 IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 23 Port Authentication Table 52 RADIUS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Retype Password to Type the password again to make sure you have entered it properly confirm Add Click Add to save your changes to the IES 612 51A s volatile memory The IES 612 51A loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh This table displays the configured user profiles Index These are the numbers of the user profiles Click this number to edit the user profile Name This is the user name of the user profile Delete Select a user profile s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the user profile Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh and clear any selec
448. z 3 4 5 6 Click VC Setup The following screen appears IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Configuration Figure 22 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup auper Channel in 1 4084 Priority Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port WPI VCI DS US vc Profile DEFWALS Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied COBY Past 7 Select any virtual channel s Select radio button and click Delete The following screen appears Figure 23 VC Setup Delete Microsoft Internet Explorer E X Ki Do you want Ea delete this channel in other ports boo Cancel 8 Click OK The following screen appears Figure 24 Select Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 6 9 1 9 I D rpDnrnrLrtLrert 102 12 EHET select EI None apply Cancel IES 612 51A User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Configuration 9 Click All and then click Apply The VC Setup screen is updated Figure 25 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup super Channel DSWC Profle DEFVAL US YC Profile FID F 1 4084 Priority o Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port WPI VCI DS ius vc Profile PVID Priority Select Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied ORY Paste 10 Select Super Channel to allow the channel to forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels Then enter the VPI and VCI that you use Leave the other default settings and click Add The VC Setup s

ZyXEL IES-612-51A User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents